2206 user 14.01

Teradata ViewpointUser Guide

Release 14.01B035-2206-112K

October 2012

The product or products described in this book are licensed products of Teradata Corporation or its affiliates.

Teradata, Active Enterprise Intelligence, Applications-Within, Aprimo, Aprimo Marketing Studio, Aster, BYNET, Claraview, DecisionCast,Gridscale, MyCommerce, Raising Intelligence, Smarter. Faster. Wins., SQL-MapReduce, Teradata Decision Experts, "Teradata Labs" logo,"Teradata Raising Intelligence" logo, Teradata ServiceConnect, Teradata Source Experts, "Teradata The Best Decision Possible" logo, TheBest Decision Possible, WebAnalyst, and Xkoto are trademarks or registered trademarks of Teradata Corporation or its affiliates in theUnited States and other countries.Adaptec and SCSISelect are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adaptec, Inc.AMD Opteron and Opteron are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.Apache, Apache Hadoop, Hadoop, and the yellow elephant logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Apache SoftwareFoundation in the United States and/or other countries.Axeda is a registered trademark of Axeda Corporation. Axeda Agents, Axeda Applications, Axeda Policy Manager, Axeda Enterprise, AxedaAccess, Axeda Software Management, Axeda Service, Axeda ServiceLink, and Firewall-Friendly are trademarks and Maximum Results andMaximum Support are servicemarks of Axeda Corporation.Data Domain, EMC, PowerPath, SRDF, and Symmetrix are registered trademarks of EMC Corporation.GoldenGate is a trademark of Oracle.Hewlett-Packard and HP are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.Hortonworks, the Hortonworks logo and other Hortonworks trademarks are trademarks of Hortonworks Inc. in the United States and othercountries.Intel, Pentium, and XEON are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.IBM, CICS, RACF, Tivoli, and z/OS are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.LSI is a registered trademark of LSI Corporation.Microsoft, Active Directory, Windows, Windows NT, and Windows Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in theUnited States and other countries.NetVault is a trademark or registered trademark of Quest Software, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.Novell and SUSE are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc., in the United States and other countries.Oracle, Java, and Solaris are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.QLogic and SANbox are trademarks or registered trademarks of QLogic Corporation.Red Hat is a trademark of Red Hat, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Used under license.SAS and SAS/C are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAS Institute Inc.SPARC is a registered trademark of SPARC International, Inc.Symantec, NetBackup, and VERITAS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in the United Statesand other countries.Unicode is a registered trademark of Unicode, Inc. in the United States and other countries.UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.

The information contained in this document is provided on an "as-is" basis, without warranty of any kind, either expressor implied, including the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-infringement.Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not apply to you. In noevent will Teradata Corporation be liable for any indirect, direct, special, incidental, or consequential damages, includinglost profits or lost savings, even if expressly advised of the possibility of such damages.

The information contained in this document may contain references or cross-references to features, functions, products, or services that arenot announced or available in your country. Such references do not imply that Teradata Corporation intends to announce such features,functions, products, or services in your country. Please consult your local Teradata Corporation representative for those features, functions,products, or services available in your country.Information contained in this document may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Information may be changed orupdated without notice. Teradata Corporation may also make improvements or changes in the products or services described in thisinformation at any time without notice.To maintain the quality of our products and services, we would like your comments on the accuracy, clarity, organization, and value of thisdocument. Please e-mail: [email protected] comments or materials (collectively referred to as "Feedback") sent to Teradata Corporation will be deemed non-confidential. TeradataCorporation will have no obligation of any kind with respect to Feedback and will be free to use, reproduce, disclose, exhibit, display,transform, create derivative works of, and distribute the Feedback and derivative works thereof without limitation on a royalty-free basis.Further, Teradata Corporation will be free to use any ideas, concepts, know-how, or techniques contained in such Feedback for any purposewhatsoever, including developing, manufacturing, or marketing products or services incorporating Feedback.Copyright © 2008 - 2012 by Teradata Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

mailto:[email protected]

Table of Contents

Preface...........................................................................................................................................................13

Changes to This Book........................................................................................................................................13Related Documentation.....................................................................................................................................13

Chapter 1: Teradata Viewpoint Basics........................................................................................................15

Teradata Viewpoint Portal and Portlets..........................................................................................................15Getting Started.............................................................................................................................................15Setting Up the Portal for Portlets..............................................................................................................16Working With Portlets in the Portal........................................................................................................20

Chapter 2: Profile.............................................................................................................................................................27

Profile...................................................................................................................................................................27About the Personal Info Tab.....................................................................................................................27About the Teradata Accounts Tab............................................................................................................29

Chapter 3: System Administration..................................................................................................................33

System Administration......................................................................................................................................33Admin Portlets.............................................................................................................................................33Security and Permissions...........................................................................................................................34

Backup..................................................................................................................................................................34About Backup Errors..................................................................................................................................35Scheduling Viewpoint Backups.................................................................................................................35

Certificates...........................................................................................................................................................35About Certificate Authorities....................................................................................................................36About HTTPS Connections.......................................................................................................................36

General.................................................................................................................................................................38Setting General Options.............................................................................................................................38

LDAP Servers......................................................................................................................................................38

Teradata Viewpoint User Guide, Release 14.01 3

What Is an LDAP Server?............................................................................................................................39Adding an LDAP Server..............................................................................................................................39About Role Mapping....................................................................................................................................40

Managed Servers..................................................................................................................................................41Adding a Managed Server...........................................................................................................................42Deleting a Managed Server.........................................................................................................................42Enabling or Disabling a Managed Server..................................................................................................42

Portlet Library......................................................................................................................................................43Enabling or Disabling Portlets....................................................................................................................43Deleting a Shared Portlet.............................................................................................................................44

Query Group Setup.............................................................................................................................................44Creating a Query Group..............................................................................................................................44Viewing Query Groups................................................................................................................................46Editing a Query Group................................................................................................................................46Filter Symbols...............................................................................................................................................46Deleting a Query Group..............................................................................................................................47

Roles Manager......................................................................................................................................................47About Roles...................................................................................................................................................48Example Roles...............................................................................................................................................48About the Roles Manager View..................................................................................................................49Adding a Role................................................................................................................................................49Editing a Role................................................................................................................................................50Copying a Role..............................................................................................................................................51Deleting a Role..............................................................................................................................................52Assigning Users to a Role............................................................................................................................52Removing Users from a Role......................................................................................................................53Portlet Preferences and Permissions.........................................................................................................53Enabling Portlets for a Role........................................................................................................................53Enabling Notifications for a Role...............................................................................................................54Configuring Default Portlet Settings.........................................................................................................54Granting Metric Permissions for a Role....................................................................................................55Granting Portlet Permissions for a Role...................................................................................................55Portlet Permissions......................................................................................................................................56

Shared Pages.........................................................................................................................................................61About Shared Page Controls.......................................................................................................................62About Read-Only and Mandatory Shared Pages.....................................................................................63Creating a Shared Page................................................................................................................................63Copying a Shared Page................................................................................................................................64Editing Portlets on a Shared Page..............................................................................................................65Viewing All Shared Pages............................................................................................................................66Deleting a Shared Page................................................................................................................................66

Teradata Systems.................................................................................................................................................66General...........................................................................................................................................................67

Table of Contents

4 Teradata Viewpoint User Guide, Release 14.01

Data Collectors........................................................................................................................................................72System Health..........................................................................................................................................................79Canary Queries.......................................................................................................................................................82Alerts........................................................................................................................................................................84Monitor Rates..........................................................................................................................................................93Log Table Clean Up................................................................................................................................................95Clean Up Schedule.................................................................................................................................................96Disk Usage...............................................................................................................................................................96

User Manager.................................................................................................................................................................97About the User List View......................................................................................................................................97About the User Details View.................................................................................................................................98

Chapter 4: Aster Completed Processes...............................................................................................................103

Aster Completed Processes........................................................................................................................................103Aster Completed Processes View.......................................................................................................................103About Details View..............................................................................................................................................108

Chapter 5: Aster Node Monitor....................................................................................................................................111

Aster Node Monitor....................................................................................................................................................111Aster Node Monitor View...................................................................................................................................111About the Details View........................................................................................................................................116

Chapter 6: Calendar................................................................................................................................................................119

Calendar........................................................................................................................................................................119About the Calendar Week View.........................................................................................................................119About the Calendar Month View.......................................................................................................................120About the Calendar Event Details View............................................................................................................121Adding an Event...................................................................................................................................................122Editing an Event...................................................................................................................................................123Deleting an Event.................................................................................................................................................124

Table of Contents


Chapter 7: Canary Response Times..............................................................................................................125

Canary Response Times....................................................................................................................................125About the Canary Response Times View................................................................................................125About the Preferences View......................................................................................................................127

Chapter 8: Capacity Heatmap.............................................................................................................................131

Capacity Heatmap.............................................................................................................................................131About the Capacity Heatmap View.........................................................................................................131About the Capacity Heatmap Menus and Toolbar...............................................................................139About the Preferences View......................................................................................................................142

Chapter 9: Elastic Performance........................................................................................................................145

Elastic Performance...........................................................................................................................................145About the Elastic Performance View.......................................................................................................145About the Preferences View......................................................................................................................148

Chapter 10: External Content.................................................................................................................................149

External Content................................................................................................................................................149About the Preferences View......................................................................................................................149

Chapter 11: Lock Viewer.............................................................................................................................................151

Lock Viewer........................................................................................................................................................151About the Lock Viewer View....................................................................................................................151

Table of Contents


Chapter 12: Metrics Analysis............................................................................................................................................159

Metrics Analysis...........................................................................................................................................................159About the Metrics Analysis View.......................................................................................................................159About the Preferences View................................................................................................................................165

Chapter 13: Metrics Graph...................................................................................................................................................169

Metrics Graph..............................................................................................................................................................169About the Metrics Graph View..........................................................................................................................169About the Metrics Graph Menus and Toolbar.................................................................................................177

Chapter 14: My Queries..........................................................................................................................................................179

My Queries...................................................................................................................................................................179About the My Queries View...............................................................................................................................179About the Details View........................................................................................................................................184About Managing Queries and Sessions.............................................................................................................189About the Preferences View................................................................................................................................192

Chapter 15: Node Resources.............................................................................................................................................195

Node Resources............................................................................................................................................................195About the Summary Views.................................................................................................................................195About the Table View..........................................................................................................................................201About the Details View........................................................................................................................................204About the Preferences View................................................................................................................................207

Chapter 16: Productivity.......................................................................................................................................................209

Productivity..................................................................................................................................................................209About the Productivity View..............................................................................................................................209About the Preferences View................................................................................................................................210

Table of Contents


Chapter 17: Query Groups.........................................................................................................................................215

Query Groups.....................................................................................................................................................215About the Query Groups View.................................................................................................................215About the Details View..............................................................................................................................222About Managing Queries and Sessions...................................................................................................227About the Preferences View......................................................................................................................229

Chapter 18: Query Monitor.......................................................................................................................................231

Query Monitor...................................................................................................................................................231About the Query Monitor View...............................................................................................................231About the Utility View..............................................................................................................................242About the Details View..............................................................................................................................242About Managing Queries and Sessions...................................................................................................248About the Preferences View......................................................................................................................251

Chapter 19: Query Spotlight....................................................................................................................................255

Query Spotlight..................................................................................................................................................255About the Query Spotlight View..............................................................................................................255About the Details View .............................................................................................................................260About the Preferences View......................................................................................................................266

Chapter 20: Remote Console...................................................................................................................................269

Remote Console.................................................................................................................................................269About the Remote Console View.............................................................................................................269About the Remote Console Menus and Toolbar...................................................................................271About Console Utilities.............................................................................................................................272About the Preferences View......................................................................................................................273

Table of Contents


Chapter 21: Space Usage......................................................................................................................................................275

Space Usage..................................................................................................................................................................275About the Space Usage View..............................................................................................................................275About the Space Usage Details View.................................................................................................................284About the Preferences View................................................................................................................................285

Chapter 22: SQL Scratchpad..............................................................................................................................................287

SQL Scratchpad............................................................................................................................................................287About the Query Box...........................................................................................................................................287About Query Results............................................................................................................................................290About the Object Browser...................................................................................................................................292About the History Tab.........................................................................................................................................294About the Saved Tab............................................................................................................................................295

Chapter 23: System Health.................................................................................................................................................297

System Health...............................................................................................................................................................297About the System Health View...........................................................................................................................297About the System Health Details View.............................................................................................................298About the Preferences View................................................................................................................................300

Chapter 24: Today's Statistics.........................................................................................................................................303

Today's Statistics..........................................................................................................................................................303About the Today's Statistics View......................................................................................................................303About the Preferences View................................................................................................................................306

Chapter 25: TVS Monitor.......................................................................................................................................................309

TVS Monitor................................................................................................................................................................309TVS Monitor Concepts........................................................................................................................................309

Table of Contents


Selecting a View..........................................................................................................................................310Viewing Cylinder Distribution by Grade................................................................................................310Viewing Historical Cylinder Distribution by Grade.............................................................................310Viewing Cylinder Allocation by Temperature and Grade...................................................................311

Chapter 26: Viewpoint Monitoring....................................................................................................................315

Viewpoint Monitoring......................................................................................................................................315About the Viewpoint Monitoring View..................................................................................................315About the Preferences View......................................................................................................................319

Chapter 27: Workload Designer...........................................................................................................................323

Workload Designer...........................................................................................................................................323Workload Designer Concepts..................................................................................................................323About the Workload Designer View.......................................................................................................324About Ruleset Options..............................................................................................................................325About the Ruleset General View..............................................................................................................330About Ruleset States...................................................................................................................................332About Classification Settings....................................................................................................................344About Ruleset Sessions..............................................................................................................................350About Ruleset Filters..................................................................................................................................356About Ruleset Throttles.............................................................................................................................358About Ruleset Workloads.........................................................................................................................361About Ruleset Exceptions.........................................................................................................................378

Chapter 28: Workload Health.................................................................................................................................381

Workload Health...............................................................................................................................................381Workload Health Concepts......................................................................................................................381About the Workload Health View...........................................................................................................382About the Workload Health Details View..............................................................................................384About the Preferences View......................................................................................................................387

Table of Contents


Chapter 29: Workload Monitor........................................................................................................................................389

Workload Monitor......................................................................................................................................................389Workload Monitor Concepts..............................................................................................................................389Workload Monitor Views...................................................................................................................................391About the State Matrix.........................................................................................................................................394About the Dynamic Pipes View.........................................................................................................................395About the Static Pipes View................................................................................................................................397About the Distribution View..............................................................................................................................400About the Workload Details View.....................................................................................................................403About the Workload Group View......................................................................................................................405About the Request Details View.........................................................................................................................405About Managing Queries and Sessions.............................................................................................................410About the Preferences View................................................................................................................................412

Table of Contents


Table of Contents


Preface

Changes to This Book

Date and Release Description

October 2012

14.01

Updated for the 14.01 release.

Related DocumentationAccess the Teradata Information Products web site to view or download additionaldocumentation related to this product.

1. Go to http://www.info.teradata.com.2. Under the Online Publications subcategory, click General Search.3. Search on the title or publication ID.

Title Publication ID

Teradata Viewpoint Configuration Guide

Describes how to configure and upgrade a Teradata Viewpoint server.

B035-2207

Teradata Alerts User Guide

Describes how to set up and monitor alerts using Teradata Alerts portlets.

B035-2210

Teradata Alerts Installation and Configuration Guide

Describes how to configure Teradata Alerts on a Teradata Viewpoint server.

B035-2211

Teradata Data Lab User Guide

Describes how to use Teradata Data Lab portlets.

B035-2212


http://www.info.teradata.com

Preface


CHAPTER 1

Teradata Viewpoint Basics

Teradata Viewpoint Portal and PortletsThe Teradata Viewpoint portal is a framework where Web-based applications, known asportlets, are displayed. IT professionals and business users can customize their portlets tomanage and monitor their Teradata systems using a Web browser.

Portlets enable users across an enterprise to customize tasks and display options to theirspecific business needs. You can view current data, run queries, and make timely businessdecisions, reducing the database administrator workload by allowing you to manage yourwork independently. Portlets are added to a portal page from a menu. The TeradataViewpoint Administrator configures access to portlets based on your role.

Getting Started

Learn how to start and end a Teradata Viewpoint session, use the help, and use notifications.

Logging On

Logging on to the Teradata Viewpoint portal starts your session so you can begin workingwith the Teradata Viewpoint portal.

1 Open a browser.

2 Enter the address for your Teradata Viewpoint portal.

The Welcome page appears, with the portal version number shown at the bottom.

3 Log on to the Teradata Viewpoint portal.

If your Teradata Viewpoint system is set up to create a user profile automatically, theusername and password you enter are authenticated against your company-providedusername and password the first time you log on to Teradata Viewpoint. Automaticprofile creation is known as auto-provisioning.

Using Viewpoint Help

The Teradata Viewpoint Help provides information about how to use Teradata Viewpointto manage and monitor your Teradata systems.

1 Click to open a browser window containing Teradata Viewpoint Help.The display is divided into two panes. The Contents pane on the left lists the hierarchyof topics contained in the help.

2 Do any of the following:


• Click next to a topic name to expand the list of available topics.• Click next to a topic name to collapse the list of available topics.

3 Click any topic name to display corresponding topic information in the right pane.

4 [Optional] Select links to related topics that are above (parent) or below (child) thecurrent topic in the content hierarchy.

Using Notifications

Teradata Viewpoint uses notifications to communicate the status of Viewpoint operations.Notifications are displayed in the Teradata Viewpoint portal for 72 hours from the last statuschange.

Notifications appear if they are enabled for your role.

1 Read the notifications, and click to hide the notifications.

2 [Optional] Click to display hidden notifications.You can click the icon again to hide notifications.

Logging Off

Logging off the Teradata Viewpoint portal ends your current session and returns you to theWelcome page.

1 From the Teradata Viewpoint main menu bar, click Logout to exit the portal.

All page content is preserved for your next Teradata Viewpoint session. Any openTeradata Viewpoint Help window is closed.

Setting Up the Portal for Portlets

Teradata Viewpoint provides portlets to manage and monitor systems. A portal page is avirtual work space where you decide which portlets to display and how to arrange them onthe page. Examples of ways to organize your work include defining a page for each systembeing monitored, or for each type of query or user. The currently selected page is called theactive page.

A portal page has two columns that can be resized. After adding portlets to the portal, youcan drag and drop portlets into either column. You can resize the width of the portalcolumns on each page by dragging the column divider until the minimum size of a column isreached. Portlets that can be horizontally resized will expand to fill the width of the column.Portlets that cannot be horizontally resized are not affected by resizing the portal columns.Resizing the browser window adjusts the columns proportionally unless a column is at itsminimum size. Not all Viewpoint portlets and products support resizing or two-columnlayout.

Chapter 1 Teradata Viewpoint Basics


A shared page contains portlets that are applicable to your role. The Teradata ViewpointAdministrator controls the type of shared page you have access to and can discusslimitations you may have with read-only and mandatory pages. Your role may be preventedfrom adding portlets, deleting portlets, moving portlets on a page, as well as other functionsyou may have been accustomed to doing with regular portal pages.

Adding a Page

Organize your portlets by adding pages to the Teradata Viewpoint portal. Multiple pagescan be added or removed. The newest page is always the active page unless you click anothertab.

1 In the portal, do one of the following:• Click Add Page.• Click and select Add Page if shared page administration state is enabled for your

role.

A new tab appears and becomes the active page.

2 [Optional] Add portlets from the Add Content menu.

Naming a Page

One way you can customize the Teradata Viewpoint portal is by giving meaningful names tothe pages that display portlets. You can change the page name at any time during a TeradataViewpoint session. Two pages can have the same name.

1 Click the page tab to highlight the page name.

2 Enter the new name up to 30 characters.

3 Press Enter to apply the new name.

4 [Optional] Rearrange the portal pages to group and organize pages or according to thefrequency of use.

Adding a Portlet

A portlet can be added to the active page at any time during a session. Except for theCalendar portlet, multiple instances of a portlet can be added to a portal page.

1 In the portal, click Add Content.

2 Select a portlet from the submenus.

The portlet is added to the top of the left-most column.

3 [Optional] Reposition the portlet on the portal page by dragging it to another location.



Filtering Portlets

Locate a portlet by using the keyword filter box and the SEARCH RESULTS list. Thismethod is also useful when you want to add a portlet to the active page and the list of portletsis long.

1 Click in the keyword filter box, and begin typing the portlet name.As you type, the SEARCH RESULTS list shows the portlets that match your filtercriteria. This field is not case-sensitive.

2 Click a portlet name in the SEARCH RESULTS list to add it to the page.

Resizing Portal Columns

Portlets that can be horizontally resized will expand to fill the width of the column. Portletsthat cannot be horizontally resized are not affected by resizing the portal columns.

1 Mouse over the column divider.

The cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow .

2 Drag the column divider to the left or to the right to resize the column width.

The portlets resize after the column divider is released.

Arranging Pages

Initially portal pages appear in the order in which they have been added from left to right.Arranging pages does not change page content, and can be done at any time during yourTeradata Viewpoint session.

1 In the portal task bar, mouse over the tab you intend to move.The cursor changes to a directional cursor.

2 Drag the tab to the left or to the right of its current position.The tab aligns in the new position.

Adding a Shared Page

A shared page contains portlets that are applicable to your role. A shared page can be addedmultiple times if it is not read-only. Mandatory shared pages automatically appear when youlog on and cannot be added from the Add Content menu.

You can create shared pages if your role has permissions.

1 In the portal, click Add Content.

2 Select Shared Pages.

3 Select a shared page from the submenu.A new tab appears to the right of the last tab and becomes the active page.



4 [Optional] Add portlets from the Add Content menu if the shared page is not read-only.

Refreshing a Shared Page

When the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator updates the contents of a shared page, an iconin the tab indicates a new version of the page is available. You can keep your currentversion by renaming the page or removing the out of date page and then adding therefreshed page to the portal.

1 Rename or remove a shared page when a new version is available.

Option Description

Rename a. Click the page tab to highlight the page name.b. Enter the new name up to 30 characters.c. Press Enter.

The icon disappears from the tab after you rename the page.

Remove a. Click the out of date page tab indicated by .b. Click to remove the page.c. Click OK.

2 In the portal, click Add Content.Mandatory shared pages automatically appear when you log on and cannot be addedfrom the Add Content menu.

3 Select Shared Pages.

4 Select the refreshed page from the submenu.A new tab appears and becomes the active page.

5 [Optional] Add portlets from the Add Content menu if the shared page is not read-only.

Deleting a Portlet

A portlet can be deleted from the active portal page at any time. Deleting a portlet resetsportlet information and deletes any custom settings set for that instance only. Other portletinstances on the same page or on other pages are not affected.

1 On the active portal page, mouse over the portlet frame to activate the portlet.The portlet does not need to be expanded if it is collapsed.

2 Click to remove the portlet from the portal page.

A confirmation message appears.

3 Click OK.The portlet is removed from the active portal page.



Deleting a Page

A portal page and its contents can be deleted from the portal at any time after it has beendefined and at any time during your Teradata Viewpoint session. One page tab must remain.

A mandatory shared page cannot be deleted.

1 Click the tab of the page you intend to delete to make it the active page.

2 Click to remove the portal page and its contents.


3 Click OK to delete the page.The page is removed, and the remaining tabs shift to the left.

Working With Portlets in the Portal

After you select a portlet from the Add Content menu, it appears on the portal page. Youcan use the filter to search for a specific portlet.

Generally, every instance of a portlet:• Has a frame that appears when the cursor moves over any part of the portlet on the page

and disappears when the cursor moves off the portlet.• Displays the portlet name or the current settings in the upper frame, depending on the

current activity.

Portlets that span two columns, such as the WORKLOAD DESIGNER portlet, cannot beresized and always appear at the top of the portal page.

Most portlets can be resized horizontally, vertically, or both. Portlets have a minimum heightand can be resized vertically using the control at the bottom of the portlet.

Portlet Controls

The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator controls which portlets and what features you areauthorized to use. If a portlet or feature is not available, the Teradata ViewpointAdministrator can assign permissions.

The following is a list of portlet controls:

Note: Not all portlets have all controls.

Adjust Height

Adjusts the vertical size for portlets that can be resized. Drag the control to resize theportlet vertically. The portlet retains its new dimensions until you click the RestoreHeight button.



Back

Returns to the previous view.

Collapse

Toggles the portlet closed. This button appears only when the portlet is open. Whencollapsed, only the upper and lower portlet frame sections are displayed.

Expand

Toggles the portlet open. This button appears only when the portlet is collapsed.When expanded, the portlet returns to its normal size and position on the portalpage.

Maximize

Toggles the portlet to fill the portal page.

Minimize

Toggles the portlet to the default size of one column wide.

Pause, Resume

Pauses or resumes the data display for a portlet.

If rewind is on, you can select to Unlink from Rewind or Link to Rewind.

If rewind is off, you can select Refresh to bring the most current data from theTeradata server to the portlet.

Portlet Frame

Contains the portlet name and portlet controls.

Portlet Name

Displays the portlet name. You can rename shareable portlets.

Preferences

Accesses portlet preferences and settings. Preferences are used to specify whatinformation is displayed, time intervals for reporting, and other features that helpyou customize the portlet functions.

Remove

Removes the portlet and its settings from the active portal page.

Restore Height

Restores the portlet to its default height. This button appears only when you changethe default height of the portlet.

Rewind

Provides the following indications of the status of the rewind function for a portlet:• indicates a portlet can participate in rewind.• indicates the rewind feature is on.



• indicates the portlet is unlinked from rewind.

Share Portlet

Captures a customized version of a portlet for use by other users. The TeradataViewpoint Administrator must make the customized portlet available for sharing.

Time Stamp

Displays the last time data was retrieved from the Teradata server. The time is basedon the time zone set in the Profile portlet.

Each portlet instance has its own settings and controls as well as the features common to allportlets. A portlet can include any of the following features:• Selection menus for accessing detailed information• A toolbar with buttons for quick access to information• Date-range slider for selecting start dates and end dates for analysis• Information balloons to show detailed information when you mouse over the portlet

Teradata Database Logon Settings

Several portlets require you to log on to Teradata Database to take actions such as aborting aquery or session, changing a workload, changing a priority, or releasing a query from thedelay queue. Teradata Database logon information is stored with your session and does notpersist beyond the current session.



The logon dialog box fields are listed below.

Field Name Description

username Name of the user account on Teradata Database and is authenticatedagainst a domain username that matches a Teradata Database username.

password Secret string of characters used to prove identity or gain access to aresource and is authenticated against the domain password associatedwith a domain username that matches a Teradata Database username.

account string Characteristics for profile member sessions in Teradata Database. Anaccount string identifies which account is charged for the space used bythe user and session and may include a priority-level Performance Groupprefix code which establishes the session priority.

authenticationmechanism

Method of identifying an account to the database. Options might includeTD2 or LDAP. If an authentication mechanism is not selected, the logonuses the default authentication mechanism for the Teradata Database.

character set Character set the system uses to communicate with Teradata Database. Ifnot defined, Teradata Viewpoint uses Teradata Database system settings.

About the Rewind Feature

The rewind feature allows you to view data that corresponds to dates and times in the pastand compare it to data for a different date and time. You can rewind the data for some or allportlets on a portal page to a previous point in time, such as when a job failed. Rewindingportlet data is useful for identifying and resolving issues.

You can rewind data as far back as data is available. The rewind feature is not available forportlets that have portlet-specific methods for reviewing data over time. The rewind featureworks uniquely in the QUERY SPOTLIGHT portlet. See the Query Spotlight topics forfurther details.

Using the rewind toolbar, you can enter a specific date and time as well as scroll through thedata in increments of seconds, minutes, hours, or days. All portlets on the page that areparticipating in rewind activities display data that corresponds to the selected rewind dateand time each time a selection is made.

If portlet data can be rewound, a rewind icon appears in the portlet frame.

Permission to use the rewind feature is granted to individual users based on their role andportlet access. If the rewind toolbar does not appear on the portal page, you are notauthorized to use the feature. If the rewind icon does not appear in the portlet frame, therewind feature is not available for that portlet.

Rewinding a Portal Page

You can rewind data for some or all portlets on a portal page. Use rewind to see changes indata over time among portlets displayed on the portal page.

1 In the upper right corner, click to turn on the rewind feature.The rewind toolbar appears along the top of the portal page.

2 Click the Date and time fields to select a date from the calendar and enter a time.



3 Do any of the following:• Click and drag left to scroll back in time or right to scroll forward through time.• Click an increment arrow to adjust time by seconds, minutes, hours, or days.• Click and hold an increment arrow to adjust time continuously.

Pausing Rewind for a Portlet

You can pause an individual portlet on a portal page while other portlets on the page displayrewound data. Pausing an instance of a portlet freezes the display of data at the moment theportlet is placed in pause mode, allowing you to compare data for multiple rewound timeperiods.

1 In the upper right corner, click to turn on the rewind feature.

2 Click in the portlet frame.

3 Click Pause.

Data displayed in the portlet freezes and does not change until you resume the portletrefresh.

Resuming Rewind for a Portlet

You can resume using the rewind feature for an individual portlet that is in pause mode on aportal page.


2 Click Resume.Data displayed in the portlet is updated to the selected rewind time and does not changeuntil the selected date or time for the rewind feature is changed.

Stopping Rewind Participation

You can prevent an individual portlet from participating in rewind when the portlet framedisplays .

1 In the upper right corner, click to turn on the rewind feature.

2 Click in the portlet frame.The portlet can be in pause mode or actively responding to the rewind date and timecontrols.

3 Click Unlink from Rewind.

The portlet no longer responds to rewind date or time controls and is updated to displaythe most recent data available from the Teradata server.



Restarting Rewind Participation

You can have an individual portlet not participating in rewind resume participation whenthe portlet frame displays .


2 Click Link to Rewind.

The portlet returns to the mode it was in when it was unlinked from participation inrewind. For example, if the portlet was in pause mode when unlinked from rewind, it isin pause mode when participation in rewind resumes.

Turning Off the Rewind Feature

You can turn off the rewind feature and resume display of current data in all portlets on theportal page.

1 In the upper right corner of the page, click to turn off the rewind feature.All portlets on the portal page that were participating in rewind activities endparticipation and display the most recent data available.

About the Pause Feature

Any rewindable portlet can be paused from refreshing data. Pausing an instance of a portletfreezes the display of data at the moment the portlet is placed in pause mode, allowing youto compare data for different time periods. The rewind feature does not need to be active topause the portlet. When a portlet is in pause mode, the time stamp flashes, indicating thatthe data in the portlet is no longer being refreshed.

Pausing Portlet Refresh

You can pause an individual portlet on a portal page.


2 Click Pause.

Data displayed in the portlet freezes and does not change until you resume the portletrefresh.

Resuming Portlet Refresh

You can resume the portlet refresh when the portlet is in pause mode.


2 To resume the portlet refresh, do one of the following:• Click Refresh to refresh portlet summary and detail data to the current date and

time, including data from the Teradata server.• Click Resume to resume the portlet refresh.

About Shared Portlets

Use the SHARE PORTLET feature to make a customized or preconfigured version of aTeradata Viewpoint portlet available to other users. When a shared portlet is added to aportal page, all the preferences and settings you selected when you customized the portletare used.



Any user can customize a shareable portlet and submit it for sharing. Depending on yourTeradata Viewpoint system configuration, the portlet is not available to authorized usersuntil the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator approves the request. Only the TeradataViewpoint Administrator can delete the shared portlet entirely. If deleted, existing instancesremain on your portal page. However, a warning message appears if you try to access theportlet.

The Shared Portlets feature allows you to:• Share customized views of a Teradata Viewpoint portlet with other users.• Create different configurations of a portlet for different roles.• Assign a preconfigured portlet to a role as a default instance of the portlet.• Assign a name to the preconfigured portlet.

The portlet name appears in the Shared submenu of the Add Content menu. The Sharedsubmenu only appears when at least one shared portlet is enabled for the user who is loggedon.

Creating a Shared Portlet

Use the SHARE PORTLET feature to customize a Teradata Viewpoint portlet and make itavailable to other users.

1 Add a portlet instance that you want to share to your portal page.

2 From the portlet frame, click to access the PREFERENCES view.

3 Customize the portlet using the available preference settings.

4 Click OK to save the settings.

5 Click to access the SHARE PORTLET dialog box.

6 Enter a name for the custom portlet using up to 25 characters.Depending on your Teradata Viewpoint system configuration, the portlet may or maynot be available to authorized users until the Teradata Viewpoint Administratorapproves your request.

7 Click Save.

8 [Optional] Contact the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator to verify that the portlet hasbeen received for approval.



CHAPTER 2

Profile

ProfileThe Profile portlet provides tabs that allow you to set your personal user settings andmanage your Teradata Database profile information:

Personal Info

Change your name, password, email address, and locale, and select the time zone.

Teradata Accounts

Manage settings for each of your Teradata Database user profiles. Link yourTeradata profile to the Teradata Database systems you are authorized to access.

Access the Profile portlet from the Teradata Viewpoint portal.

About the Personal Info Tab

The Personal Info tab in the Profile portlet allows you to manage your Teradata Viewpointprofile:• Change the first and last name for the profile.• Change your Email address.• Change your Locale.• Select the Time Zone.

Use the Personal Info tab to set your locale. Supported locales include:• Chinese (China and Taiwan)• English (US and UK)• French• German• Japanese• Korean

The locale you select is applied to the entire Teradata Viewpoint session and is maintainedin future sessions.

Changing a Name

You can change the first and last name for a Teradata Viewpoint profile.

1 From the Profile portlet, click the Personal Info tab.


2 Change the name in the First Name field.

3 Change the name in the Last Name field.

4 Click Apply.


Setting a Contact Email Address

You can set your Email address using the Personal Info tab. This email address is used foridentification and communication in the Teradata Viewpoint system, including notificationsand reminders.

The email address cannot contain uppercase letters. Uppercase characters are automaticallyconverted to lowercase.


2 Enter your full address in the Email field.

3 Click Apply.


Managing Passwords

You can manage Teradata Viewpoint profile passwords. A password must be at least 4 andno more than 25 characters.

A user cannot change their password if their profile is externally authenticated. The fieldsrequired to change the password are not available when external authentication is used. Tochange the password for an externally authenticated profile, follow your company policy forpassword management.


2 Enter your current password in the Current Password field.

3 Enter a new password in the New Password field.

4 Confirm your new password by retyping it in the Re-enter New Password field.

5 Click Apply.


Setting the Locale

The locale is used to display the local language with the date, time, and number formatspecific to the country. For example, if the locale is “English (US),” the system uses theEnglish language and displays the day in mm/dd/yy format. May 16, 2012 appears as“5/16/12.” If the locale is “Japanese,” the system uses the Japanese language and displays theday in dd/mm/yy format. May 16, 2012 appears as “16/05/12.”

The locale setting in the Profile portlet overrides the locale set by your Teradata ViewpointAdministrator for your account.


2 Select the locale from the list.

Chapter 2 Profile


The Teradata Viewpoint application server locale is the default.

3 Click Apply.


Setting the Time Zone

You can adjust your local Teradata Viewpoint time zone setting to compensate for differenttime zones. Select the local time zone to display all time and date information in the localdate and time, even if the Teradata Database system you are monitoring is located in adifferent time zone.

The time zone you enter compensates for the time difference between the monitored systemlocation and the Teradata Viewpoint reporting location.


2 Select a time zone from the list.Time zones shown are relative to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and include a referencelocation. The Teradata Viewpoint application server time zone is the default. Use thescroll bar to view more time zones.

3 Click Apply.


About the Teradata Accounts Tab

Use the Teradata Accounts tab in the Profile portlet to manage Teradata Database accountlogon and profile information for each Teradata Database system. Teradata accountinformation is used by the My Queries portlet. For each Teradata Database system, you can:• Add accounts• Edit existing profiles• Delete profiles

System profiles added using the Teradata Accounts tab must already exist on the monitoredsystem. The system validates the USERNAME, PASSWORD, ACCOUNT STRING, andAUTHENTICATION fields prior to confirmation.

Chapter 2 Profile


Adding a User Profile

This task explains how to associate Teradata Database profiles with your Teradata Viewpointprofile.

1 From the Profile portlet, click the Teradata Accounts tab.

2 Under Add Account, select a Teradata Database system from the list.

3 Enter the following information in the appropriate fields:• Username• Password• [Optional] Account string

4 [Optional] Select an authentication mechanism from the list for use on the system.

5 [Optional] Click Test.

The icon appears if the operation is successful. The icon appears if the operationfails; verify that the settings are correct, and try again.

6 Click Add.

Editing a User Profile

This topic explains how to edit a Teradata Database system user profile in TeradataViewpoint.


2 Mouse over the row containing the user profile information for the Teradata Databasesystem you are updating.The row is highlighted, and Edit and Delete appear.

3 Click Edit to the right of the row containing the user profile information.

4 Edit or change any of the following fields:• PASSWORD• ACCOUNT STRING

5 [Optional] Click Test to verify that the logon settings are correct.


6 Click Save to save your changes.


Deleting a User Profile

This task explains how to delete a Teradata Database system user profile from TeradataViewpoint.


2 Mouse over the row containing the Teradata Database user profile information for thesystem you are updating.The row is highlighted, and Edit and Delete appear.

Chapter 2 Profile


3 Click Delete to the right of the row containing the user profile information.If the deletion is successful, a confirmation message appears.

Chapter 2 Profile


Chapter 2 Profile


CHAPTER 3

System Administration

System Administration

Admin Portlets

The Teradata Viewpoint administrative portlets allow the Teradata ViewpointAdministrator to provide access to Teradata Viewpoint resources and information.

You can access these portlets from the Admin menu in the Teradata Viewpoint portal ifyour role has permission. You can access the Profile portlet directly from the TeradataViewpoint portal.

Alert Setup

Configure the alert delivery settings and actions.

Backup

Configure the backup of Teradata Viewpoint server data.

Certificates

Manage trusted certificate authorities and HTTPS certificates.

General

Configure Teradata Viewpoint settings.

LDAP Servers

Configure the LDAP servers for Teradata Viewpoint to authenticate users andassign user roles.

Managed Servers

Configure the servers available to display in the Viewpoint Monitoring portlet.

Portlet Library

View the installed portlets and specify which portlets can be accessed.

Profile

Configure settings for your Viewpoint user account and associate TeradataDatabase accounts.

Query Group Setup

Manage the sets of queries available to users in the Query Groups portlet.


Roles Manager

Manage roles and specify the level of access users are given.

Shared Pages

Manage shared pages and how they are viewed by users.

Teradata Systems

Configure the systems and data collectors that provide data to portlets.

User Manager

Manage user accounts and assign users to roles.

Security and PermissionsThe Teradata Viewpoint administrative portlets allow the Teradata Viewpoint Administratorto control portlet access at different levels by setting permissions for Teradata Viewpointusers.

Global

Enable or disable access to portlets globally using the Portlet Library portlet. Thissetting takes precedence over all other portlet permission levels.

Role

Assign permissions to classes of users called roles using the Roles Manager portlet.Each tab controls access to features.

User

Assign available roles to users and set role precedence using User Manager portlet.Roles assigned higher priority take precedence over lower-priority roles.

BackupThe Backup portlet allows you to enable automatic Teradata Viewpoint system backups andconfigure the data retention settings.

The Backup portlet displays the backup process icon with either a successful completion oran error for the last attempt and lists the last successful backup date and time. Use theBackup portlet to:• Enable and disable the daily backup process• Store the backup files on the local system or at a network location• Select the daily backup time• Select how many days to keep the backup files

Chapter 3 System Administration


About Backup Errors

The BACKUP dialog box displays an out-of-service icon and the status message ANERROR HAS OCCURRED, if an error occurs during the backup process. To investigate theerror, you can view the backup log file: /opt/teradata/dcs/logs/backup.log. Foradditional information, see the Teradata Viewpoint Configuration Guide.

Scheduling Viewpoint Backups

You can configure automatic backups, set a data retention length, and enable or disable thebackup process at any time.

1 [Optional] From the BACKUP view, do one of the following:• Select the Enable backup check box to activate the backup process.• Clear the Enable backup check box to disable the automatic-backup process.

2 Under Location, select one of the following options to set the location of the backupfiles:

Option Description

Local Backs up Teradata Viewpoint databases to the local server.

Network Backs up Teradata Viewpoint databases to a networked file server to prevent data lossin the event of a catastrophic failure.• Enter a Host to specify the host system name.

• Enter a Path to specify the absolute path name where the backups are stored onthe host system.

• [Optional] Click Test to verify that the login settings are correct. The icon appears if the operation is successful. The icon appears if the operation fails;verify that the settings are correct, and try again.

3 From the Daily Backup Time list, select the daily start time of the backup operation.

4 From the Keep Backups For list, select the number of days to retain the backup data.

5 Click Apply.

The changes are saved and backup files are deleted when they are older than theconfigured number of days.

CertificatesThe Certificates portlet allows you to manage certificates on the Viewpoint Server.Certificates are used to help secure communications to and from a Viewpoint server. Youcan install a certificate to secure communication from a browser to the Viewpoint serverand from the Viewpoint server to external servers. You can install a trusted root certificatefor a Certificate Authority to be trusted by the Viewpoint server.



About Certificate Authorities

Certificate Authorities (CA) issue certificates. To initiate secure communications with anexternal server (e.g., a corporate LDAP server), the Viewpoint server must trust the CA thatissued the certificate of the external server.

The root certificates of certain standard CAs are pre-installed on the Viewpoint server andcertificates issued by them are automatically accepted. However, if a non-standard CA issuedthe certificate, then the root certificate of this CA must be installed on the Viewpoint serverfor the certificate to be accepted.

You can install the root certificate of a trusted CA from the Certificate Authority view.

Installing Trusted Root Certificates

1 From the SETUP list, click Certificate Authority.

2 Click Install.

3 Enter an alias for the Certificate Authority, up to 30 characters.

4 Click Browse and select the trusted root certificate.

5 Click Install.

Deleting Trusted Root Certificates

1 From the SETUP list, click Certificate Authority.

2 Click next to the certificate you want to delete.

3 Click Delete.

About HTTPS Connections

HTTPS connections are secure connections between a browser and the Viewpoint server. Toenable HTTPS connections, the Viewpoint server needs an identifying certificate thatprovides the public key used to decrypt the information it sends. This certificate may beeither self-signed or signed by a Certificate Authority (CA).

To install a new certificate from a CA, you must first generate a Certificate Signing Requestand submit it to a CA for signing. Once you receive the signed certificate from the CA youcan install it.

Creating a Self-Signed Certificate

A self-signed certificate can provide security for an internal site or serve as a temporarymeasure while a fully authenticated certificate is obtained from a Certificate Authority.Installing a certificate replaces the existing certificate. Once a certificate is replaced, it cannotbe reinstalled.

1 From the SETUP list, click HTTPS Config.

2 Click Create SSC and enter the certificate information.



Field Description

Common Name Domain name

Organizational Unit Business unit

Organization Company name

City or Locality Company address

State or Province Company address

Country Company address, 2 characters

Expiration Select an expiration period

3 Click Install.

Creating a Certificate Signing Request

A signing request is used to obtain an authenticated certificate for the server. Creating andsaving a new signing request replaces a pending request. If a pending request is replaced, thesigned certificate that comes from the request cannot be installed. Once created, the requestmust be submitted to the Certificate Authority to be signed.


2 Click Create CSR and enter the request information.

Field Description

Common Name Domain name

Organizational Unit Business unit

Organization Company name

City or Locality Company address

State or Province Company address

Country Company address, 2 characters

3 Click Create.

4 Save the file using the browser options.

The file is saved to your download area or to a location that you specify, depending onthe browser settings.

Installing a Signed Certificate

After obtaining an authenticated certificate from a trusted Certificate Authority, you caninstall the certificate to facilitate secure communications to the Viewpoint server. Installinga certificate replaces the active certificate. Once an active certificate has been replaced, itcannot be reinstalled.


2 Click Install.

3 Click Browse.



4 Select the signed certificate.

5 Click Install.

Deleting Installed Certificates

A certificate can only be installed once.


2 Click next to the certificate you want to delete.

3 Click Delete.

GeneralThe General portlet allows a Teradata Viewpoint Administrator to set the locale and sessiontimeout for a Teradata Viewpoint server. Users can choose a different locale in the Profileportlet to override the default locale selection.• The locale is used to localize content in the Viewpoint portal. Dates, times, and numbers

are displayed in Viewpoint portlets in the format used by the selected locale. If thelanguage pack for the selected locale is installed, then all content appears in the selectedlanguage.

For example, the English (US) locale displays content in English and dates in a mm/dd/yy format. If the language pack for the selected locale is not installed, content appears inEnglish and dates, times, and numbers appear in the format for the selected locale.

• The session timeout is the length of time a user account can remain idle before beinglogged out of the system. The default setting is one hour and 30 minutes.

Setting General Options

1 Select a locale from the list.

2 Set a session timeout.

3 Click Apply.

LDAP ServersThe LDAP Servers portlet allows you to configure LDAP servers to authenticate users andassign user roles in Teradata Viewpoint. The LDAP Servers portlet displays the names ofcurrently configured LDAP servers or is empty if an LDAP is not configured.• Use next to SETUPS to add an LDAP server.• Use the order buttons to adjust the evaluation order of the LDAP-server list.• Use next to the server name to delete an LDAP server.



• Use the dialog box to enable and disable an LDAP server, and configure the LDAP toautomatically validate users against the LDAP directory with the auto-provisioningfeature or assign user roles with the role mapping feature.

What Is an LDAP Server?

Teradata Viewpoint uses a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) server to:• Validate new user information by querying the LDAP for authentication. The binding

operation authenticates a username and a password.• Automatically create a Teradata Viewpoint username with the auto-provisioning feature.• Automatically assign users to a Teradata Viewpoint role with the Role Mapping feature.

Adding an LDAP Server

You can add an LDAP server to authenticate and assign roles to Teradata Viewpoint users.

1 Click next to SETUPS.

2 Enter a Nickname for the LDAP server up to 8 characters.

3 [Optional] Select the Enabled check box to activate LDAP upon successfully adding theLDAP server to Teradata Viewpoint.

4 Enter a URL address.One URL address is required. Use to delete, add, and move up or move down inthe evaluation order.

5 Select the Name Matching method from the following options:• Select DN Pattern Bind to specify one or more patterns that represent a

distinguished name (DN) in the LDAP directory.• Select User Search to search for a pattern in the base directory or subdirectories:

• [Optional] Enter a Service account DN and Service account password to searchwith a specific account.

• [Optional] Leave Service account DN and Service account password blank toconnect to the LDAP as an anonymous user.

• Enter a Search pattern.• Enter a Search base to specify a base directory for the search pattern.• [Optional] Select the Search extent Recursive scan check box to include

subdirectories of the base directory in the search.• [Optional] Under Search extent, clear the Recursive scan check box to limit the

search to the specified base directory.

6 Configure Key User Information:• Enter the LDAP first name attribute.• Enter the LDAP last name attribute.• Enter the LDAP email attribute.



Every user has an email address. This default email domain is used if a valid emailaddress is not found in the LDAP directory during auto-provisioning.

7 [Optional] Test your settings:

a Click Test to display the LDAP test panel.

b Enter a Test username and Test password.

c Click Run.


8 [Optional] Configure Auto-Provisioning:

a [Optional] Select the Turn on auto-provisioning check box to automatically validateusers against the LDAP directory.

b Select a role from the Automatically assign these roles menu. You can add orremove roles.

c Enter a Default email domain to provide a notification email address.Every user has an email address. This default email domain is used if a valid emailaddress is not found in the LDAP directory during auto-provisioning.

9 If the group role mapping method is specified, configure Role Mapping:

a Enter a Group search base.

b [Optional] Select the Group search subtree check box to include subtree directoriesduring the binding process.

c Enter a Group attribute name.

d [Optional] Click Add Role Mapping to add attribute or group settings so that youcan assign another role.

10 Click Apply.


About Role Mapping

In Teradata Viewpoint, users are assigned roles to organize and control their access toportlets, metrics, and features. You can use the Roles Manager portlet to assign permissionsto the roles. During the process of adding an LDAP configuration to Teradata Viewpoint, theoptional Role Mapping section in the LDAP Servers portlet allows you to assign a roleautomatically to auto-provisioned users.

Use role mapping to:• Assign roles for a new user.• Add roles that were assigned to the user since the last user login.• Remove roles that were removed since the last user login.



Consider the following:• Only roles already defined using the Roles Manager portlet can be mapped.• The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator can change a role at any time using the Roles

Manager portlet.

Role Mapping Use Cases

In the following use cases, the LDAP value represents the distinguished name (DN) of agroup. When the Type is Attribute, the attribute name field represents the user attributewhere the group DN is stored. When the Type is Group, the group attribute name field isused for mapping and represents the group attribute where the user DN is stored.

The first use case assigns users to a Teradata Viewpoint role based on an attribute of theuser's record in LDAP. Assume you have a user with the following record in LDAP:

dn: cn=User1,ou=Users,dc=teradata,dc=com

memberOf: cn=USA,ou=Groups,dc=teradata,dc=com

In this case, the Group attribute name field is not relevant. To map User1 to the TeradataViewpoint role US Users, create the following role mapping:• Type = Attribute• Attribute name = memberOf• LDAP value = cn=USA,ou=Groups,dc=teradata,dc=com• Viewpoint role = US Users

The second use case assigns users to a Teradata Viewpoint role based on membership inan LDAP group with the following structure:

dn: cn=DBAs,ou=Groups,dc=teradata,dc=com

uniqueMember: cn=User2,ou=Users,dc=teradata,dc=com

In this case, set the Group attribute name field to uniqueMember. To map User2 to theTeradata Viewpoint role DBAs, create the following role mapping:• Type = Group• LDAP value = cn=DBAs,ou=Groups,dc=teradata,dc=com• Viewpoint role = DBAs

Managed ServersA managed server is a server in a Teradata cabinet that is monitored by the same Teradataserver management solution used to monitor TPA nodes. A managed server might be usedfor storage, backup, or housing data collectors that provide portlet information and metricdata. Teradata Viewpoint monitors managed servers for system-level metrics and collectsinformation for Teradata Viewpoint portlets.

The Managed Servers portlet displays the names of currently configured managed servers oris empty if no managed server is configured. Use next to SERVERS to add a managedserver. Use the dialog box to delete, enable, and disable a managed server for use by theTeradata Viewpoint Data Collection Service (DCS).



Adding a Managed Server

You can add a managed server to Teradata Viewpoint. After a managed server is defined inTeradata Viewpoint, you can test the configuration settings and enable the managed serverfor use by the Data Collection Service (DCS).

1 Click next to SERVERS.

2 [Optional] Select the Server enabled check box to activate the managed server for theDCS.

3 Enter values for these required fields:• Managed Server Name up to eight characters.• Hostname is the managed server IP address or domain name.• Login is the user name and password.The default values only need to be changed if you change the login and password settingsduring the installation of TMS Monitor.

4 Do any of the following:• Click Test to verify that the login settings are correct.• Click Apply to update the managed server.

The icon appears if the operation is successful. The icon appears if the operationfails; verify that the settings are correct, and try again. If you are unable to enable ordisable the managed server, contact the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator.

Deleting a Managed Server

You can delete a Teradata Viewpoint managed server. This is a permanent procedure thatdiffers from disabling the managed server from the Data Collection Service.

1 From the SERVERS list, click the managed server name you want to remove.

2 In the dialog box, click Delete Server.


3 Click OK.

Enabling or Disabling a Managed Server

After a managed server is defined in Teradata Viewpoint, you can enable it for use by theData Collection Service (DCS) or disable it.

1 From the SERVERS list, click the managed server name you want to update.

2 Do one of the following:• Select the Server enabled check box to activate a managed server.• Clear the Server enabled check box to disable a managed server.When disabled, the DCS does not use the managed server. Any existing data about themanaged server can still be viewed.



3 Do any of the following:• Click Test to verify that the login settings are correct.• Click Apply to update the managed server.

The icon appears if the operation is successful. The icon appears if the operationfails; verify that the settings are correct, and try again. If you are unable to enable ordisable the managed server, contact the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator.

Portlet LibraryThe Portlet Library allows you to enable or disable portlets globally. This setting takesprecedence over every other portlet permission level.

The Manage Existing Portlets view allows you to manage the installed portlets, which aregrouped by category. Details about portlets are also provided:• Parent portlet name• Version number• Publisher name• Bundle name• Installation date• Whether the portlet is enabled• Whether the portlet can be deleted

Portlets in the Admin category display N/A in the ENABLE column. These portlets cannotbe disabled and are included in the view only to provide version information.

A shared portlet is a user-defined version of a portlet. The Parent Portlet column identifiesthe original portlet before its customization as a shared portlet. Only portlets in the SharedPortlet category can be deleted.

Enabling or Disabling Portlets

The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator can use the Portlet Library to enable or disableinstalled portlets for Teradata Viewpoint user access.

1 In the Manage Existing Portlets dialog box, click a name to expand a category.

2 For each installed portlet, do one of the following:• Enable the portlet by selecting the corresponding check box.• Disable the portlet by clearing the corresponding check box.You can enable all the portlets by clicking the ENABLE column heading. Portlets in theAdmin category display N/A in the ENABLE column. These portlets cannot be disabledand are included in the view only to provide version information.

3 Click Apply.



Deleting a Shared Portlet

The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator can use the Portlet Library to delete a shared portletso Teradata Viewpoint users can no longer access it.

1 In the Manage Existing Portlets dialog box, click Shared to expand the category.

2 Click under the DELETE column that corresponds to the shared portlet you want todelete.


3 Click OK.

The portlet name no longer appears in the Add Content menu in the portal, and theportlet is no longer available to Teradata Viewpoint users. Existing instances of a sharedportlet on a portal page remain on the page. However, a warning message appears if auser tries to access the portlet.

Query Group SetupThe Query Group Setup portlet allows the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator to manage thesets of queries that are available to users in the Query Groups portlet. You can create querygroups based on a set of criteria, assign users that can access the group, and delete querygroups.

Creating a Query Group

Create a query group in the Query Group Setup portlet to allow users to view their mostrelevant queries in the Query Groups portlet. You create a query group to filter the queriesthat are displayed and limit the users that have access to the group.

1 Select a system from the list of enabled systems.A system cannot be changed after you create a query group.

2 Click next to GROUPS.

3 Enter a query group name up to 30 characters.

4 [Optional] Enter a description up to 256 characters.

5 In the Criteria tab, do one of the following:



• Select Every criteria below to match at least one value in each defined sub-tab.Criteria on each sub-tab are joined by AND.

• Select Any criteria below to match at least one value in one or more of the definedsub-tabs. Criteria on each sub-tab are joined by OR.

6 Select a criteria from the Add Criteria list.

7 [Optional] For account string, username, or workload name criteria, do any of thefollowing:• In the Match string box, type a value to dynamically define criteria, and click to

move it to the Selected box. The value can contain ? to match exactly one character inthe position it occupies, * to match zero or more characters, or = at the beginning ofthe string to match alpha and numeric characters literally.

• In the Match string box, type a value to filter the list of available values.• Select a value from the Available box and click to move it to the Selected box.

8 [Optional] For Query Band criteria, do any of the following:• Select a query band name from the list and a value from the Available values box,

and click to move it to the Selected box.• Type a custom query band name and value pair, and then click to move it to the

Selected box.

9 In the Access tab, do any of the following:• In the User list filter box, type a value to filter the list of available users. The value

can contain ? to match exactly one character in the position it occupies, * to matchzero or more characters, or = at the beginning of the string to match alpha andnumeric characters literally.

• In the Available users box, select one or more Viewpoint users and click to moveit to the Selected users box.

• In the Available roles box, select one or more Viewpoint roles and click to moveit to the Selected roles box.



10 [Optional] Click Reset to clear the query group name, description, and the selections onthe Criteria and Access tabs.

11 Click Apply.

Viewing Query Groups

The Query Group Setup portlet allows you to view the query groups that have been createdfor enabled systems. If a system is disabled in the Teradata Systems portlet, it does notappear in the Query Group Setup portlet; however, the defined criteria is retained.

1 Select a system to view query groups related to that system.

2 [Optional] Click a row in the query group list to see the details for that group.

Editing a Query Group

Edit a query group when criteria or users require updating or if a user changes roles.

If a system is disabled in the Teradata Systems portlet, it does not appear in the QueryGroup Setup portlet; however, the defined criteria is retained.

1 Select the system associated with the query group.

2 Click a row in the list for the query group you want to edit.

3 [Optional] Enter a new name or change the description.

4 [Optional] In the Criteria tab, do one of the following:• Select Every criteria below to match at least one value in each defined sub-tab.

Criteria on each sub-tab are joined by AND.• Select Any criteria below to match at least one value in one or more of the defined

sub-tabs. Criteria on each sub-tab are joined by OR.

5 For each criteria you select, do any of the following:• Edit the criteria.• Click to delete the criteria and associated values.• Select unnecessary or obsolete criteria from the Selected box and click Remove.

6 In the Access tab, edit the list of Viewpoint users and roles that can view the querygroup.

7 [Optional] Click Reset to revert the query group name and description, and any changesmade in the Criteria or Access tabs to the previously applied values.

8 Click Apply.

Filter Symbols

Use wildcard characters or symbols in a filter to expand or limit search criteria. Somesymbols are used for string filtering and others are used for numeric filtering. String filtersare not case sensitive and an asterisk wildcard is applied to the end of the filter string.



Wildcard orSymbol Description Example Results

? Use this wildcard character to match alpha or numericcharacters in the position it occupies. Type this wildcardcharacter at the beginning, middle, or end of your search.This wildcard character can be used more than once in thesame search.

This wildcard character can be used in conjunction withany other symbol.

cat?

?cat

cat?l

cat???

p???er

cats, catalog

scat, Scatter

catalog

catalog

packer, parser, proper

* Use this wildcard character to match zero, one, or multiplealpha or numeric characters in the position it occupies.Type this symbol at the beginning, middle, or end of yoursearch. This wildcard character can be used more than oncein the same search.


*cat

cat*l

cat*

*ews*er

*%

cat, cats, catalog, scatter, wildcat

catalog

cat, cats, catalog

newscaster, newspaper

what is 100%?

= Use this symbol at the beginning of your search to matchalpha or numeric characters literally. The search results arecase-sensitive.

This symbol can be used in conjunction with * and ?.

=CAT

=cat?

=Cat*

=Cat_

=Cat\?

CAT

cats

Cat, Cats, Catalog

Cat_

Cat?

\ Use this symbol in front of a wildcard character so thewildcard is interpreted as a regular character and not as awildcard.

This symbol can be used in conjunction with *, ?, and \.

*\?

=cat\*

cat\?

what is 100%?

cat*

cat?, Cat?

Deleting a Query Group

Delete a query group when it is no longer useful.

1 Select a system.

2 Click on the row of the query group you want to delete.

Roles ManagerThe Roles Manager portlet allows the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator to assignpermissions efficiently by creating classes of users called roles.

The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator can perform the following tasks:• Add and configure new roles• Edit the configuration and settings of existing and default roles• Copy roles, saving time in creating new roles• Enable or disable portlets for a role.



• Delete roles that are no longer needed

About Roles

Teradata Viewpoint includes preconfigured roles that cannot be removed from TeradataViewpoint. Change the following roles according to your needs:

Administrator

This role has all permissions and can be assigned to any account. It is recommendedthat this role be used only by the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator.

User

This role is assigned to every Teradata Viewpoint user. It is recommended that thisrole be set with no permissions.

TD_SE (Teradata Solution Engineer)

This role is intended for the Teradata Solution Engineer when they need access tosystem health and metrics. It is recommended that you enable or disable this role,but do not reconfigure it.

TD_TSS (Teradata Technical Support Specialist)

This role is intended for the Teradata Technical Support Specialist when they needaccess to your system SQL. It is recommended that you enable or disable this role,but do not reconfigure it.

It is recommended that you copy Administrator and User to configure new roles withpartial permissions that are appropriate to all users in that role. Each role you create controlsaccess to specific systems, portlets, metrics, preferences, and permissions in portlets.

Example Roles

The following examples show how roles can be defined to manage portlet usage and controlpermissions within Teradata Viewpoint.

AppDBA

The AppDBA role is defined for users that are application DBAs. The rewind feature andsome portlets are enabled for this role so users can review graphs in the Productivityportlet.

AcctDept

The AcctDept role is defined for all users in the Accounting Department. Some portletsare enabled for this role. These users are granted permissions so they can edit all calendarevents in the Calendar portlet and access the My Queries portlet to monitor their queries.

OpDBA

The OpDBA role is defined for users that are operations DBAs. The rewind feature and allportlets are enabled for this role so users can monitor performance trends. Users in the



OpDBA role access the Workload Monitor portlet to track Teradata Database requestarrivals and completions.

About the Roles Manager View

The Roles Manager view allows the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator to manage rolesefficiently, including assigning users to roles, and granting permissions to roles. After a roleis created, you can customize the role using the following tabs:

General

Enable or disable a role, and select the systems available to that role.

Users

Search for users and add them to, or remove them from, the list of users assigned tothe selected role.

Portlets

Enable or disable portlets for a role. This tab can also be used to configure defaultsettings per portlet, per role.

Notifications

Enable or disable notifications for a role. The notifications appear in the TeradataViewpoint portal.

Metrics

Select the metrics to display per metric, per system.

Permissions

Control whether users in this role can set their own preferences and sharecustomized versions of the portlet with other users, and configure which portletfeatures the role can access.

Note: The SET PREFS check box is only available for portlets that have aPREFERENCES view.

Adding a Role

You can add a role and assign one or more Teradata Database systems to the role.

1 From the Roles Manager view, click Add Role.An Add role dialog box appears with the General tab selected (default).

2 Under Name, enter a new name for the role, up to 25 characters.You can use alphanumeric characters and underscore (_), but no space.

3 Under Description, use the default or enter a new description, up to 255 characters.

4 [Optional] Under Role State, do one of the following:• Leave the Role State as is.



• Select Enabled to enable the role for configuration and adding users, and activate therole for use with Teradata Viewpoint.

• Select Disabled to enable the role for configuration and adding users, but disable therole for use with Teradata Viewpoint.

5 [Optional] Under Rewind State, do one of the following:• Leave the Rewind State as is.• Select Enabled to grant permission to this role to use the rewind feature, when

available.• Select Disabled to deny permission for this role to use the rewind feature.

6 [Optional] Under Shared Page Administration State, do one of the following:• Leave Shared Pages Administration State as is.• Select Enabled to grant permission to this role to administer shared pages.• Select Disabled to deny permission for this role to administer shared pages.

7 [Optional] Under Enable Systems For Role, do one of the following:• Leave the currently selected Teradata Database systems as is.• Select new Teradata Database systems the selected role is authorized to access.• Click the Enable Systems For Role column heading to select all check boxes for the

Teradata Database systems.

Note: You can click the column heading again to clear all check boxes.

Editing a Role

You can edit a role, but you cannot change the name of an existing role. To change the name,you must either add a new role or copy the role, and then change the role name.1 From the Roles Manager view, select a role from the list.

A dialog box appears with the current information for the selected role.


3 [Optional] Under Role State, do one of the following:• Leave the Role State as is.• Select Enabled to enable the role for configuration and adding users, and activate the

role for use with Teradata Viewpoint.• Select Disabled to enable the role for configuration and adding users, but disable the

role for use with Teradata Viewpoint.



5 [Optional] Under Shared Page Administration State, do one of the following:• Leave Shared Pages Administration State as is.



• Select Enabled to grant permission to this role to administer shared pages.• Select Disabled to deny permission for this role to administer shared pages.

6 [Optional] Under Enable Systems For Role, do one of the following:• Leave the currently selected Teradata Database systems as is.• Select new Teradata Database systems the selected role is authorized to access.• Click the Enable Systems For Role column heading to select all check boxes for the

Teradata Database systems.


Copying a Role

When a role is copied, all settings on all tabs are inherited from the original role, except forthe Name field on the General tab. When the Administrator role is copied, all informationon all tabs is copied. However, the copied role does not have administrative privileges anddoes not have an Admin menu on the portal.

1 From the Roles Manager view, select a role from the list.

2 Click Copy Role.A dialog box appears with the General tab selected.

3 Under Name, enter a new name for the role, up to 25 characters.You can use alphanumeric characters and underscore (_), but no space.


5 [Optional] Under Role State, do one of the following:• Leave the Role State as is.• Select Enabled to enable the role for configuration and adding users, and activate the

role for use with Teradata Viewpoint.• Select Disabled to enable the role for configuration and adding users, but disable the

role for use with Teradata Viewpoint.



7 [Optional] Under Shared Page Administration State, do one of the following:• Leave Shared Pages Administration State as is.• Select Enabled to grant permission to this role to administer shared pages.• Select Disabled to deny permission for this role to administer shared pages.

8 [Optional] Under Enable Systems For Role, do one of the following:• Leave the currently selected Teradata Database systems as is.• Select new Teradata Database systems the selected role is authorized to access.



• Click the Enable Systems For Role column heading to select all check boxes for theTeradata Database systems.


Deleting a Role

You can delete a role. After a role is deleted, it cannot be restored. This action affects all usersassigned to the role.


2 Click Delete Role.


3 Click OK.The deleted role is removed from the list.

Assigning Users to a Role

You can search for users and assign them to a role.

If auto-provisioning is in use, a default role is automatically assigned to new users the firsttime they log on. User is generally the default assignment.


2 Click the Users tab.The users list appears and includes two panes. The left pane lists all Teradata Viewpointsystem users. The right pane lists users already assigned to the selected role. In the leftpane, the names of users already assigned to the selected role are dimmed.

3 [Optional] Search for a user:

a Select a filter from the list.

b Enter the search criteria in the contains field.

c Click Find.

The AVAILABLE USERS list displays only users meeting the search criteria.

4 Select one or more users from the left pane.Press Ctrl while selecting additional names to select multiple users.

5 Click .

The selected users are assigned to the role. Selected user names are copied to the rightpane and are dimmed in the left pane.

6 Click Apply.



Removing Users from a Role

You can remove users from a role.


2 Click the Users tab.The users list appears and includes two panes. The left pane lists all Teradata Viewpointsystem users. The right pane lists users already assigned to the selected role. In the leftpane, the names of users already assigned to the selected role are dimmed.

3 Select one or more users from the right pane.You can select multiple users by holding the CRTL key and clicking additional names.

4 Click .

The selected users are removed from the role. The names no longer appear in the rightpane and are no longer dimmed in the left pane.

5 Click Apply.

Portlet Preferences and Permissions

The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator can set permissions for a role to access portlets,preferences, and tabs. Higher level permissions override lower level permissions.

Portlet Access

This option is the highest permission level for portlet access and gives this roleaccess to the entire portlet. To grant a role access to this portlet from the AddContent menu, select the ENABLE FOR ROLE check box from the Portlets tab.

Preferences Access

This option is the highest permission level for preferences and gives this role accessto change all preferences in this portlet. To grant a role access to thePREFERENCES view, select the SET PREFS check box from the Permissions tab.

Note: The SET PREFS check box is only available for portlets that have aPREFERENCES view.

Tab Access

This option is the lowest permission level for preferences and denies this role accessto tabs in the PREFERENCES view. To deny a role from using any tab in thePREFERENCES view, select the Disable User Preferences for tab name globallycheck box from the Portlets tab by clicking under CONFIGURE DEFAULTS.

Enabling Portlets for a Role

You can enable portlets for a role so they appear in the Add Content menu.


2 Click the Portlets tab.



3 For the selected role, do one of the following:• Select the portlets to enable in each category.• Click the ENABLE FOR ROLE column heading to enable all portlets for the role.

4 Click Apply.

Enabling Notifications for a Role

Teradata Viewpoint uses notifications to communicate the status of Viewpoint operations.Notifications are displayed in the Teradata Viewpoint portal for 72 hours from the last statuschange.

You can enable notifications to provide status of data migration and cluster setup. Datamigration notifications may display after a major upgrade when data is migrated to a newformat. Migration begins with the newest data. Cluster setup notifications may display whenthe Teradata System Administrator sets up or recovers a Teradata Viewpoint cluster after apromotion.

You can enable notifications for any role. The User role has data migration notificationenabled by default. The Administrator, TD_SE, and TD_TSS roles have data migration andcluster setup notifications enabled by default. These notifications are not enabled by defaultfor any other roles.

The data migration notification displays information about:• Percentage of migration completed• Earliest available date for migrated data• If the migration failed or completed

The cluster setup notification displays information about:• Percentage of cluster setup completed• If the setup failed or completed


2 Click the Notifications tab.

3 For the role, do one of the following:• Select the notifications to enable individually.• Click the ENABLE FOR ROLE column heading to enable all notifications for the

role.

4 Click Apply.

Configuring Default Portlet Settings

You can configure default portlet settings for a role. The settings you configure become thedefault settings in the PREFERENCES view for each portlet. You can disable userpreferences if you do not want the PREFERENCES view to appear in a portlet, requiring theusers to accept the default settings you configured.



If a user is assigned to multiple roles, the role with the highest priority determines whichsettings are applied to a portlet. For example, if a user is assigned the roles of Administratorthen User, the Administrator settings apply to each instance of the portlet.

Shared portlets are preconfigured using an instance of a portlet and cannot be configuredusing the Roles Manager portlet.


2 Click the Portlets tab.

3 Click for the portlet you want to configure.

4 Click Apply.

Granting Metric Permissions for a Role

You can grant permissions for metrics by role. The metric permissions granted to a roleapply to the following portlets only:• Capacity Heatmap• Metrics Analysis• Metrics Graph• Todays Statistics


2 Click the Metrics tab.

A dialog box appears displaying the metrics categories and each Teradata Databasesystem name.

3 Select the metrics for each available Teradata Database system that you want users in theselected role to see by doing any of the following:• Click the top check box in a column to select or clear all check boxes for a category

for all systems.• Click the system name at the left of the row to select or clear all check boxes for that

system.• Click a check box to select or clear that category for that system.

4 Click Apply.

Granting Portlet Permissions for a Role

You can enable specific features of a portlet by system and role.


2 Click the Permissions tab.

3 Select a portlet from the Select portlet list.

The Permissions dialog box displays a list of the available systems and options.



4 Select the permissions you want to grant to the selected role for each available TeradataDatabase system by doing any of the following:• Select the SET PREFS check box to allow users to set their own preferences.• Select the SHARE PORTLET check box to allow users to share customized versions

of the portlet with other users.• Click the top check box in a column to select or clear all check boxes for a category for

all systems.• Click the system name at the left of the row to select or clear all check boxes for that

system.• Click a check box to select or clear that category for that system.

5 Click Apply.

Portlet Permissions

The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator can grant access to portlet views using thePermissions tab. You must select the parent view setting for dependent child views todisplay.

Permission Name Description Dependency Portlets Displaying Setting

SET PREFS Enables role access to set their ownpreferences in this portlet. Afterthis setting is enabled, the user canclick in the portlet.

The SET PREFS check box is onlyavailable for portlets that have aPREFERENCES view.

SHARE PORTLET Enables role to share customizedversions of the portlet with otherusers. After this setting is enabled,the user can click in the portlet.

The SHARE PORTLET check box isonly available for portlets that can beshared.

ABORT HOST Enables role access to the AbortHost console utility.

Remote Console

ABORT QUERY Enables role access to the menuin the summary view to abortqueries.

My Queries, Query Groups, QueryMonitor, Workload Monitor

ACCOUNT Enables role to select By AccountString in the SELECT REPORTdialog box.

• VIEWSUMMARY

Query Monitor

ACCOUNTDRILLDOWN

Enables role access to a table of allsessions for each account.

• VIEWSUMMARY

• ACCOUNT

Query Monitor

ADD SPACE Enables role to reallocatepermanent disk space from oneTeradata Database to another.

Space Usage

ALL SESSIONSREPORT

Enables role to select By Session >All in the SELECT REPORTdialog box for Teradata Database.

Query Monitor




Enables role to select By Sessionin the SELECT REPORT dialogbox for Teradata Aster.

ALLOCATION GRID Enables role access to the CylinderAllocation by Temperature andGrade view.

TVS Monitor

CHANGE PRIORITY Enables role access to the menuin the summary view allowing roleto change the priority of a query orsession.


CHANGE STATE Enables role to change a state. Application Health, Ecosystem Health,Process Health, Table Health

CHANGE WORKLOAD Enables role access to the menuin the summary view to change theworkload of a query or session.


CHECKTABLE Enables role access to the CheckTable console utility.

Remote Console

CLEAR ALERT Enables role to clear an alert for acomponent, process, or resource.

Ecosystem Health, Log Viewer, ProcessHealth

CLEAR SYNCCONDITION

Enables role to clear the synccondition.

Table Health

CONFIGURE Enables role access to theConfigure console utility.

Remote Console

CREATE EVENT Enables role to create calendarevents.

Calendar

CURRENTDISTRIBUTION

Enables role access to the CylinderDistribution by Grade view.

TVS Monitor

DATABASE Enables role to select By Databasein the SELECT REPORT dialogbox for Teradata Aster.

• VIEWSUMMARY

Query Monitor

DATABASEDRILLDOWN

Enables role access to session bydatabase details for TeradataAster.

• VIEWSUMMARY

• ASTERDATABASE

Query Monitor

DBS CONTROL Enables role access to the DBSControl console utility.

Remote Console

EDIT ANY EVENT Enables role to edit any events,including events created by otherusers.

Calendar

EDIT OWN EVENT Enables role to only edit their owncalendar events.

Calendar

EDIT RULESETS Enables role to edit rulesets. Workload Designer




ENABLE PARTIALSIZE

Enables role access to run SQLqueries on the system to retrieveand calculate the precise size of apartial table, a table with aWHERE clause. Affects partialtable size only.

Data Mover

FERRET Enables role access to the Ferretconsole utility.

Remote Console

GATEWAY GLOBAL Enables role access to the GatewayGlobal console utility.

Remote Console

GET EXPLAIN FROMDB

Enables a single query refreshoption. Allows the user to view thelatest Explain steps retrieved fromthe database.

Query Groups, Query Monitor

HISTORICALDISTRIBUTION

Enables role access to theHistorical Cylinder Distributionby Grade view.

TVS Monitor

LOCK DISPLAY Enables role access to the LockDisplay console utility.

Remote Console

MY CRITERIA Enables role to select By Session >My Criteria in the SELECTREPORT dialog box.

Query Monitor

OPERATOR CONSOLE Enables role access to the OperatorConsole console utility.

Remote Console

PARTITIONDRILLDOWN

Enables role to select a utility fromthe NAME column in the utilityview to see all sessions for theselected utility.

• VIEWSUMMARY

• UTILITY

Query Monitor

PRIORITYSCHEDULER

Enables role access to the PriorityScheduler console utility.

Remote Console

QUERYCONFIGURATION

Enables role access to the QueryConfiguration console utility.

Remote Console

QUERY SESSION Enables role access to the QuerySession console utility.

Remote Console

RECOVERYMANAGER

Enables role access to the RecoveryManager console utility.

Remote Console

RELEASE QUERY Enables role access to the menuin the summary view to release aquery that is in the delay queueand waiting to run.


SESSION DRILLDOWN Enables role to view details of eachsession from the Account String,Session, User, or Utility reports.

• VIEWSUMMARY

• ACCOUNT

Query Monitor




• ACCOUNTDRILLDOWN

• ALL• MY CRITERIA• USER• USER

DRILLDOWN• UTILITY• PARTITION

DRILLDOWN

SHOW LOCKS Enables role access to the ShowLocks console utility.

Remote Console

SPACE BY DATABASE Enables role to select By Databasein the SELECT REPORT dialogbox.

Space Usage

SPACE BY NODE Enables role to select By Node inthe SELECT REPORT dialog boxfor Teradata Aster.

Space Usage

SPACE BY TABLE Enables role access to the detailsview with a list of tables in eachdatabase.

Space Usage

SPACE BY VPROC Enables role to select By Vproc inthe SELECT REPORT dialog boxfor Teradata Database.

Space Usage

TERADATA DWM Enables role access to the TeradataDWM Dump console utility.

Remote Console

UPDATE SPACE Enables role access to the UpdateSpace console utility.

Remote Console

USER Enables role to select By User inthe SELECT REPORT dialog box.

• VIEWSUMMARY

Query Monitor

USER DRILLDOWN Enables role access to sessiondetails for that user.

• VIEWSUMMARY

• USER

Query Monitor

UTILITY Enables role to select By Utility inthe SELECT REPORT dialog boxfor Teradata Database.

• VIEWSUMMARY

Query Monitor

VIEW ALERT DETAIL Enables role access to the detailsview.

Alert Viewer

VIEW BLOCK Enables role to see that a query isblocked. The Blocked By tab isvisible, but contains no details.

• VIEWSUMMARY

SQL Scratchpad

VIEW BLOCKDETAILS

Enables role access to the contentof the Blocked By tab.

• VIEWSUMMARY

SQL Scratchpad




• VIEW BLOCK

VIEW BLOCKED BY Enables role access to the BlockedBy tab.

• VIEWSUMMARY

• SESSIONDRILLDOWN

My Queries, Query Groups, QueryMonitor, Query Spotlight, WorkloadMonitor

VIEW CANARYQUERY

Enables role to view canaryqueries in the summary view.

Canary Response Times, Productivity

VIEW DBQL METRICS Enables role to view the QueriesPer Hour metrics.

Productivity

VIEW DELAY Enables role access to the Delaytab.

• VIEWSUMMARY



VIEW DETAIL Enables role access to the detailsview.

• VIEWSUMMARY

Aster Completed Processes, Aster NodeMonitor, My Queries, Query Groups,Query Spotlight, System Health,Workload Health, Workload Monitor

VIEW EXPLAIN Enables role access to the Explaintab containing the confidence levelindicator.

• VIEWSUMMARY


Aster Completed Processes, My Queries,Query Groups, Query Monitor, QuerySpotlight, Workload Monitor

VIEW EXPLAINSIMPLE

Enables role access to the Explaintab.

• VIEWSUMMARY

SQL Scratchpad

VIEW NODES Enables role access to thesummary view to see nodes.

Node Resources

VIEW NODE DETAIL Enables role access to the detailsview to see nodes.

• VIEWSUMMARY

• VIEW NODES

Node Resources

VIEW QUERY BAND Enables role access to the QueryBand tab.

• VIEWSUMMARY


My Queries, Query Groups, QueryMonitor, Query Spotlight, WorkloadMonitor

VIEW RULESETS Enables role to view rulesets. Workload Designer

VIEW SKEW Enables role to view the Skew tab. • VIEWSUMMARY


Query Monitor

• VIEWSUMMARY

• VIEWDETAIL

My Queries, Query Groups, WorkloadMonitor




VIEW SQL Enables role access to the SQL tab. • VIEWSUMMARY


Aster Completed Processes, My Queries,Query Groups, Query Monitor, QuerySpotlight, Workload Monitor

VIEW STATISTICS Enables role access to see statisticsin the TODAYS STATISTICSview.

Todays Statistics

VIEW SUMMARY Enables role access to thesummary view.

Aster Completed Processes, Aster NodeMonitor, Canary Response Times, DataLabs, Data Mover Elastic Performance,Lab Group Setup, Lock Viewer, MyQueries, Node Resources, Productivity,Query Groups, Query Monitor, QuerySpotlight, Remote Console, Space Usage,SQL Scratchpad, System Health, TVSMonitor, Viewpoint Monitoring,Workload Health, Workload Monitor

VIEW VPROCS Enables role access to thesummary view to see vprocs.

Node Resources

VIEW VPROC DETAIL Enables role access to the detailsview to see vprocs.

• VIEWSUMMARY

• VIEWVPROCS

Node Resources

VPROC MANAGER Enables role access to the VprocManager console utility.

Remote Console

Shared PagesThe Shared Pages portlet provides an overview of the shared pages for a role and allows youto configure and delete shared portal pages. As the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator, youcreate one or more shared pages that contain the portlets, systems, and settings the role usesmost frequently. A shared page can only be assigned to one role and inherits the permissionsof the role. Multiple shared pages can be assigned to a role. You can copy and rename anexisting shared page and assign it to a different role than the original.

You determine how the portlets appear on the user portal page. If no restrictions are put ona shared page, a user can perform all the same page functions as a normal page. If youdesignate a shared page as read-only or mandatory, you restrict the user to the way youcreated the page.

When you enable the Shared Pages Administration State for a role in the Roles Managerportlet, that role can create, select, and preview shared pages for any role of which they are amember. The Administrator role is an exception and can create, select, and preview sharedpages for all roles.



About Shared Page Controls

You can access shared page controls from several locations.

The shared page controls, accessed by clicking , are listed below.

Control Description

Publish Adds the page to the Shared Pages portlet.

When an enabled page is published, it is made available to the users in therole assigned to the page.

Properties Opens the PROPERTIES dialog box.

Copy Creates an exact copy of the shared page and opens the PROPERTIESdialog box so the page can be uniquely named.

Edit Unlocks the read-only and mandatory shared page for editing. You canchange the portlets and systems.

Close Removes the shared page and tab from the portal. The page can be addedagain from the Add Content menu.

The PROPERTIES dialog box controls, accessed by clicking and selecting Properties or for a new shared page, are listed below.

Control Description

Enable page Adds the non-mandatory page to the Add Content menu.

Read-only Prevents the user from adding portlets, or making changes to the content,layout or page name of the shared page. The shared page can be addedfrom the Add Content menu and deleted from the portal.

Mandatory Same as read-only, except the shared page is present in the user portal at alltimes. The shared page cannot be added from the Add Content menu ordeleted from the portal.

Show first time userlogs in

Displays the page when a new Viewpoint user logs on for the first time as amember of the role.



Control Description

If selected, the shared pages display alphabetically as a group for each roleif a user has multiple roles. For example, the first group displays pages 1, 2,and 3 for role A. the next group displays pages 1, 2, and 3 for role B.

The Shared Pages portlet controls, accessed from the Shared Pages portlet, are listed below.

Control Description

Edit Click a page name to edit the shared page. You can edit the page name,description, tooltip, and other property controls. You cannot change rolesor portlets.

Delete Deletes the page from the Shared Pages portlet. Removes the page fromthe Add Content menu for users in this role, and removes the mandatorypage from the portal when the user logs on or refreshes the page.

About Read-Only and Mandatory Shared Pages

You can restrict what a user can do by making a shared page read-only or mandatory.

Read-only prevents a user from adding portlets, or making changes to the content, layout orname of the shared page. However, the user can add a page from the Add Content menuand delete the page from the portal. Read-only pages can only be added once to the portal.

Mandatory pages are present in the user portal at all times. The restrictions are the same asread-only pages, except the user cannot add a mandatory shared page from the AddContent menu or delete the page from the portal.

When you update a read-only or mandatory shared page, the change is visible in the userportal after the page is refreshed. Any changes the user made to the page are overwritten.

When a user is removed from a role, a read-only shared page remains in the portal until theuser deletes it. However, a mandatory shared page is removed from the portal when the userlogs on or refreshes the page.

Creating a Shared Page

Create a shared page when you want a role to use specific portlets, systems, and settings. Thepage content displays with the permissions of the assigned role. You can add portlets andchange settings any time after you create a shared page. You must publish the shared pagefor the user to see your changes.

1 In the portal task bar, click and select Add Shared Page.

2 Enter the new page name up to 30 characters.Page names must be unique.

3 Select a role to assign to the page from the menu.A role cannot be changed after you create a page. Only roles that you have permission tosee are displayed in the menu.

4 [Optional] Add a description up to 500 characters.



The description appears in the Shared Pages portlet.

5 [Optional] Add a tooltip up to 100 characters.

The tooltip appears when the user mouses over the page name in the tab.

6 [Optional] Clear the Enable page check box to prevent users in this role from accessingthe non-mandatory page from the Add Content menu.The Enable page check box is selected by default which adds the non-mandatory page tothe Add Content menu for this role after the page is published.

7 [Optional] Select the Read-only check box to prevent users in this role from addingportlets, or making changes to the content, layout or page name of the shared page.

8 [Optional] Select the Mandatory check box to make the shared page present in the userportal at all times.

9 [Optional] Select the Show first time user logs in check box to display the page the firsttime a new Viewpoint user logs on.

10 Click OK.The new page appears and becomes the active page.

11 Select one of the following:

Option Description

Role: role name Preview how the page appears to the user in the role for which the page wascreated. You must publish with this option selected.

All my roles Preview how the page appears to a user with all my roles.

12 [Optional] Add portlets or change the portlet settings and preferences.

13 [Optional] Click in the page tab and select Publish to distribute your changes and addthe page to the Shared Pages portlet.

14 [Optional] Select the shared page from the Add Content menu to see a preview of howthe page appears to the user in the role.

15 [Optional] Click in the page tab and select Close to close the preview.

Copying a Shared Page

Copy a shared page when the majority of the page characteristics are applicable to anotherrole. For example, you can copy a shared page and change the portlet types, add moreportlets, and change systems or preferences for users in another role.

To change the role, you must copy a shared page, and then delete the old shared page.

1 Click the page name to make it the active page.

2 Click in the page tab and select Copy.

3 Enter the new page name up to 30 characters.Page names must be unique.

4 Select a role to assign to the page from the menu.



Only roles that you have permission to see are displayed in the menu.

5 [Optional] Add a description up to 500 characters.

The description appears in the Shared Pages portlet.

6 [Optional] Add a tooltip up to 100 characters.

The tooltip appears when the user mouses over the page name in the tab.

7 [Optional] Do one of the following:• Select the Enable page check box to add the non-mandatory page to the Add

Content menu for users in this role after the page is published.• Clear the Enable page check box to prevent users in this role from accessing the non-

mandatory page from the Add Content menu.

8 [Optional] Select the Read-only check box to prevent users in this role from addingportlets, or making changes to the content, layout or page name of the shared page.

9 [Optional] Select the Mandatory check box to make the shared page present in the userportal at all times.

10 [Optional] Select the Show first time user logs in check box to display the page the firsttime a new Viewpoint user logs on.

11 Click OK.The new page appears and becomes the active page.


Option Description







Editing Portlets on a Shared Page

Edit a shared page to add portlets or change portlet settings and preferences.

1 [Optional] If the shared page is not already in your portal, add the page from the AddContent menu.

2 Click the page name to make it the active page.




Option Description




5 [Optional] Click in the page tab and select Properties, and then enable the page.




Viewing All Shared Pages

You can view all the shared pages that have been created, including the page names, theportlets on a shared page, the role the page is assigned to, the date when the page wascreated, the date when the page was last modified, the page description, and whether thepage is read-only, mandatory, first log on, or enabled.

1 From the Shared Pages portlet, view the specific attributes of a shared page.

2 [Optional] Click anywhere in the row to see the details for the page.

Deleting a Shared Page

Delete a shared page when there are many changes in portlets or systems for a role or whenthe page is no longer useful.

Deleting a non-mandatory page removes the page from the Add Content menu for users inthis role. Deleting a mandatory shared page removes the page from the portal when the userlogs on or refreshes the page.

1 From the Shared Pages portlet, click located on the row of the page you want todelete.

Teradata SystemsThe Teradata Systems portlet allows the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator to add,configure, enable, and disable systems using specific dialog boxes:

General

Configure the system nickname, TDPID, site ID, host ID, login credentials,authentication method, and access to Teradata Database or Teradata Aster systems.Test the connection and add or delete logins.



Data Collectors

Enable, disable, and configure data collectors to capture and retain portlet, diskusage, and resource data.

System Health

Enable metrics for the System Health and Productivity portlets. Configuredegraded and critical thresholds for each metric. Create customized status andtooltips.

Canary Queries

Configure canary queries used to test Teradata Database system response times. TheSYSTEM HEARTBEAT canary query cannot be removed.

Alerts

Add, delete, copy, and configure alerts, or migrate existing Teradata Manager alerts.

Monitor Rates

Set Teradata Database internal sample rates for sessions, node logging, and vproclogging.

Log Table Clean Up

Select Teradata Database system log tables to clean up.

Clean Up Schedule

Schedule clean up of Teradata Database system log tables.

You can view the amount of disk space used:

Disk usage

View the percentage of total disk space being consumed by collected data on theTeradata Database managed server.

Twelve hour change

View the percentage of Teradata Database disk space used or has become availableover the past twelve hours. Positive indicates the amount of space used hasincreased. Negative indicates the amount of space used has decreased.

General

General system settings help you define the logins used to perform tasks on the system, suchas data collection, canary queries, cleanup, and TASM ruleset management. For certainsystems you can define character sets and select authentication options.

Adding a Teradata Database System

You can add a Teradata Database system to Teradata Viewpoint. The system must be addedand the logins created before you can configure the data collectors to monitor the database.The default authentication mechanism is set up by your Teradata Database SystemAdministrator.



1 Click next to SYSTEMS and select Add Teradata System.

2 Enter a SYSTEM NICKNAME, up to 8 characters.

3 [Optional] Select the System enable check box to activate the Teradata Database systemfor monitoring.

4 Enter the TDPID of the Teradata Database system.

5 [Optional] Enter the SITE ID assigned by Teradata Customer Services.You must enter the SITE ID for the Teradata system if you are using Elastic Performanceon Demand.

6 Enter a LOGIN name and password.You also have the option to specify an account string, authentication, add more logins,test that the login settings are correct, and grant access to a Teradata Database system.



8 [Optional] Select an AUTHENTICATION OPTIONS check box to specify whichauthentication mechanisms will be available in the portlets that require them.

9 [Optional] In the CHARACTER SET section, select default character sets and enter aJDBC Flag value.• [Optional] Select a character set from the Session menu.• [Optional] Select a character set from the Monitor menu.• [Optional] Enter a JDBC Flag value.

10 [Optional] Select the COLLECTORS check box to activate all data collectors exceptElastic Limit, Elastic Usage, and Virtual Storage so they can collect data points on thissystem.The data collectors can be enabled and configured individually in Data Collectors. TheElastic Performance portlet uses the Elastic Limit and Elastic Usage data collectors todisplay data. The TVS Monitor portlet uses the Virtual Storage data collector to displaydata.

11 Select the ENHANCED TASM FUNCTIONS check box to activate the workloadmanagement features available with your TASM license in SLES 11.Once enabled, the (For SLES 11 systems only) comment no longer displays.

12 Click Apply.


Adding a Teradata Aster System

You can add a Teradata Aster system to Teradata Viewpoint. The system must be added andthe logins created before you can configure the data collectors to monitor the database.

1 Click next to SYSTEMS and select Add Aster System.

2 Enter a SYSTEM NICKNAME, up to 8 characters.



3 [Optional] Select the Enable system check box to activate the system for monitoring.

4 Enter the HOST ID of the Teradata Aster system.

5 [Optional] Enter the SITE ID assigned by Teradata Customer Services.

6 Enter a LOGIN name and password.



8 [Optional] Select the COLLECTORS check box to activate Aster data collectors so theycan collect data points on this system.The data collectors can be enabled and configured individually in Data Collectors.

9 Click Apply.


Disabling a System

Disabling a system makes the system inaccessible in other Teradata Viewpoint portlets,while maintaining the configured settings. You can enable the system as needed.

1 From the SYSTEMS list, click the name of the system you want to update.

2 From the SETUP list, click General.

3 Clear the Enable system check box.

4 Click Apply.


Deleting a System

Deleting a system removes all information configured for that system, such as datacollectors, alerts, and canary queries.



3 Click Delete System.


4 Click OK.

Adding a Login Account

An unlimited number of login credentials can be configured for use in the TeradataSystems portlet dialog boxes.

The tdwm login is required to load and activate Workload Designer rulesets. The tdwmlogin and authentication cannot be removed or renamed, but you can enter a password, anaccount string, and test the tdwm login settings.





3 Under LOGIN, click .

4 Enter a LOGIN name and password.You also have the option to specify an account string, select an authenticationmechanism, add more logins, test that the login settings are correct, and grant access to aTeradata Database system.

5 Click Apply.


Granting Privileges

Granting privileges provides Viewpoint data collectors with access to Teradata Databasesystem resources.



3 In the LOGIN section, click Grant for the user to be granted privileges.

4 Select a Version, if no Teradata Database system version is found.Listed privileges may vary depending on version selected.

5 [Optional] Copy the SQL.You can execute the SQL using an external tool.

6 Click Continue.

7 Enter login information to authenticate the Teradata user.The user must be authorized to grant privileges.

8 Click Run.

9 Review results and click OK.

Deleting a Login Account

At least one login account must be configured for a system. You cannot remove the last loginaccount or the tdwm login.



3 Under LOGIN, click on the login row to be removed.

The row disappears. The login is removed permanently.

Adding Portlet Authentication Options

Some Viewpoint portlets require authentication to access Teradata Database to change thepriority of a query. You can enable authentication options for Viewpoint portlets in additionto the default Teradata Database logon option.




2 Select the AUTHENTICATION OPTIONS check box to specify which authenticationmechanisms to make available in the portlets that require them.

3 Click Apply to apply the settings.

Character Set Definitions

When you configure a Teradata Database system, the CHARACTER SET section of theGENERAL setup allows you to define the charset that the system uses to communicate withTeradata Viewpoint. The character set definitions are optional. If you do not define them,Teradata Viewpoint uses the Teradata Database system settings.

CHARACTERSET Fields

Character Set Definition Suggestions

Session The UTF8 session character set is strongly recommended for the Teradata Viewpoint session to ensureend-to-end fidelity of character data by avoiding conversion between character sets. However, theUTF8 session character set does not support the KANJI1 server character sets, which are used forstoring data dictionary data in Teradata V2R6.x Japanese systems. For these systems, Japanese usersmust specify the Kanji session character set.

Monitor The UNICODE session character set is not currently supported for the Teradata Performance Monitorand Console Partition. To create Teradata Viewpoint object names that connect Monitor and ConsolePartitions, use Non-Unicode session character sets such as LATIN1252_0A, KANJISJIS_OS, andKANJIEUC_OU.

JDBC Flag The JDBC Flag setting is a legacy-support feature to assist the transition away from the unsupported useof Teradata Database to store non-Latin characters in a Latin column, and the unsupported access ofnon-ASCII in an ASCII session character set. The JDBC Flag option specifies the CLIENT_CHARSETconnection parameter, which can be used to override the Teradata JDBC Driver fixed-mapping of theTeradata session character set to the Java character set. The valid values are the actual Java character setnames. Here are two examples of valid JDBC Flag settings:• Windows-936 from Chinese (PRC)• Windows-950 for Chinese (Taiwan)

The default Teradata Database system settings are listed below.

TeradataDatabase

Language SupportMode

Data DictionaryCharset

TeradataViewpoint SessionCharset

TeradataViewpointMonitor Charset Limitations

12.00 andlater

Standard UNICODE UTF8 ASCII orLATIN1252_0A

ASCII session onlysupports the limited 7-bitASCII characters

12.00 andlater

Japanese UNICODE UTF8 KANJISJIS_OS Unknown

V2R6.x Standard LATIN UTF8 ASCII orLATIN1252_0A

Unknown

V2R6.x Japanese KANJI1 KANJISJIS_OS orKANJIEUC_OU

KANJISJIS_OS orKANJIEUC_OU

Use either KANJISJIS_OSor KANJIEUC_OU, forboth settings. Do not mixcharacter sets.



Viewing System Status

You can investigate the details of a system that is disabled or functioning with errors. Eachlevel provides additional icons that represent system status.

1 From the SYSTEMS list, click the system whose name appears with one of the followingicons:

Icon Description

Error Appears next to a system name or data collector name when one of these errors hasbeen detected:• Processing exception• Incorrect system privileges• Configuration errors, such as an incorrect password• System is offline

Disabled Appears next to a system name or data collector name if it is currently disabled.

Data Collectors

The Teradata Viewpoint Data Collection Service (DCS) is used to monitor systems. After asystem has been configured in Teradata Viewpoint, data collectors can be configured tomonitor the system. Data collectors gather information from different sources and make thedata available to Teradata Viewpoint portlets. Each data collector has a sample rate, orfrequency, used to collect data from the system and a retention rate used to keep thecollected data for a time period or up to a certain size.

Most data collectors have similar behaviors as described in the data collector catalog, but afew are unique:• Alert Request has no retention rate because this data collector does not store data.• Sessions collects SQL and Explain data when thresholds are met in the session.• Sessions defines values to use when a Lower Priority action executes for an alert in the

session.• Elastic Usage can automatically upload usage data to Teradata Service Connect.

Configuring Data Collectors

After a system has been configured in Teradata Viewpoint, data collectors can be configuredto monitor the database. Sessions and Elastic Usage data collectors have other options toconfigure.

The login values used by data collectors are established in the General view.


2 From the SETUP list, click Data Collectors.

3 Click the data collector name you want to configure.

4 [Optional] Select the Enable data collector name Collector check box to enable the datacollector to begin processing data.

5 Under LOGIN, select the login you want to use to run the system task.



6 Under SAMPLE RATE, select one of the following options:

Option Description

Recommended sample rate Uses the default sample rate for a data collector.

Custom sample rate Adjusts the recommended sample rate to your systemrequirements.

7 Under DELETE DATA, select one of the following options:

Option Description

Date a. Select the After check box to set the calendar retention period.b. Enter a number and select a calendar value.

Size a. Select the Over check box to set the file size retention period.b. Enter a number and select a file size restriction.

8 Click Apply.

Configuring Elastic Usage with Automatic Uploading

The Elastic Usage data collector can be enabled to collect usage data for the ElasticPerformance portlet if you are using Elastic Performance on Demand. The collector can beconfigured to automatically upload usage data for billing purposes using Teradata ServiceConnect.1 From the SYSTEMS list, click the name of the system you want to update.


3 Click the Elastic Usage data collector.

4 Under TERADATA SERVICE CONNECT, select the automatic uploading check boxand enter the connection information:

Field Description

Host Host name or IP address of the SWS server or CMIC where TeradataService Connect is hosted.

Port Port number on which the SSH server is listening.

Username andpassword

Login credentials that have the necessary permissions to upload usagedata using the SWS server.

The public key is used by Teradata Corporation to verify the integrity of your usage data.

5 Click Apply.

Configuring Sessions with Lower Priority Actions

In a Teradata Database system, the Sessions data collector can define a value to use when aLower Priority action executes for an alert in the session.1 From the SYSTEMS list, click the name of the system you want to update.




3 Click the Sessions data collector.

4 Under New priority for Lower Priority action, enter one of the following values:• $L is for low (default)• $M is for medium• $H is for high• $R is for rushWhen the Lower Priority action executes for an alert, the session that met the alert ruleshas its priority changed to the value you enter.

5 Click Apply.

Configuring Sessions with SQL and Explain Tabs

The Sessions data collector collects all details for a session and the currently running request.SQL and Explain text is only collected when SQL and Explain thresholds are met. The SQLand Explain thresholds can be set high or low and corresponding SQL and Explain textappears in the SQL and Explain tabs in query details views. The SQL associated with a querycan help you target and optimize the query. The Explain text shows a query's progressthrough the Explain plan so you can optimize the query and change the Explain plan.

The Teradata Viewpoint system is configured to collect longer-running queries when SQLand Explain collection is enabled. Set the threshold lower to include shorter running queries,which may increase performance overhead.

If you want the Explain plan progress to update more frequently than the Sessions collectionrate, you can fetch the latest Explain steps directly from Teradata Database. The GETEXPLAIN FROM DB check box controls the Teradata Database access requests for theQuery Monitor and Query Groups portlets on the Permissions tab of the Roles Managerportlet. You can enable this feature for the users and roles that you want, but increasedaccess requests directly to Teradata Database increases performance overhead.



3 Click the Sessions data collector.

4 Under SQL and Explain Thresholds, set one or more thresholds:• Elapsed seconds• Total CPU secondsWhen a threshold is exceeded, SQL and Explain text is collected for the session and theSQL and Explain tabs appear in query details views.

5 Click Apply.

Data Collector Sample Rates

Teradata Viewpoint uses a sample rate to collect data from the system and uses a retentionrate to keep the collected data for a time period or up to a certain size. The sample rate andretention rate vary for each data collector and can be adjusted as needed.



Alert Request has no retention rate because this data collector does not store data. SQLExplain data is dependent upon Session collector and cannot be adjusted.

Teradata Data Collector Recommended Sample Rate Initial RetentionRate

Account Info 12 hours 1 week

Alert Request 5 minutes Not applicable

AWT Info 60 seconds 1 year

Database Space 1 day 10 GB

Disk Space 1 hour 1 year

Elastic Limit 60 seconds 1 year

Elastic Usage 1 hour 1 year

Lock Info 1 hour 10 GB

Query Count DBQLFlushRate value from the DBSControl utility display command, otherwise1 hour

10 GB

Resource Usage Node/Vproc logging rate as set in MonitorRates, otherwise 1 hour

Note: In Teradata Database 13.00 and earlier,logging rates can be set individually. Whenthe node and vproc logging rates aredifferent, the lowest is used.

10 GB

Sessions Session sampling rate as set in MonitorRates, otherwise 30 seconds

10 GB

SQL Explain Sample and retention rates based on Sessionscollector and availability of SQL and Explaindata

Not applicable

System Config 12 hours 1 week

System Stats Depending on your Teradata Databaseversion, the node/vproc collection (14.00) ornode/vproc sampling rate (13.10 and earlier)as set in Monitor Rates, otherwise 30seconds

1 year

Table Space 1 day 10 GB

TASM Config 10 minutes None (both disabled)

TASM Distribution 60 seconds 1 year

TASM Exception Sample rate returned by PM/API TDWMSummary, otherwise 60 seconds

1 year

TASM State 60 seconds 1 year

TASM Summary Sample rate returned by PM/API TDWMSummary, otherwise 60 seconds

1 year



Teradata Data Collector Recommended Sample Rate Initial RetentionRate

Virtual Storage 12 hours 1 year

Aster Data Collector Recommended Sample Rate Initial RetentionRate

Cluster Status 10 seconds 1 year

Component Stats 30 seconds 1 year

Nodes 5 minutes 1 year

Processes 10 seconds 10 GB

Space Usage 1 day 10 GB

Workloads 1 hour 1 year

Data Collector Catalog

Data collectors gather information from different sources and make the data available toTeradata Viewpoint portlets.

TeradataDatabaseDataCollector

Description Portlets Displaying Data

AccountInfo

Collects and retains available account strings fromthe DBC.AccountInfo table. The Queries portletsuse this data for the Change Priority function.

My Queries, Query Monitor

AlertRequest

Monitors the dbcmngr.AlertRequest anddbcmngr.MonitorRequest tables on the TeradataDatabase system and collects data for further actionby Teradata alerts.

Alert Viewer

AWT Info Collects AMP worker task (AWT) relatedinformation through the AMP Load (ampload)Teradata Database utility. In Teradata Database14.00, the collector executes the MONITOR AWTRESOURCE request of PM/API instead of AMPLoad (ampload).

Capacity Heatmap, MetricsAnalysis, Metrics Graph, SystemHealth

DatabaseSpace

Collects and retains database-space metrics fromthe DBC.DataBaseSpace and DBC.DBase tables.

Capacity Heatmap, MetricsGraph, Space Usage, SystemHealth

Disk Space Collects and retains disk-space and database-spacemetrics from the DBC.DiskSpace view of the DBCdatabase.

Capacity Heatmap, MetricsGraph, System Health

Collects the perm space data and skew percentagefor the DBC.TransientJournal table.

Alert Viewer

ElasticLimit

Collects and retains the system CPU limit set in theSchmon utility or Workload Designer portlet.

Elastic Performance





ElasticUsage

Collects and retains the overall node CPU usagefrom the DBC.ResUsageSPMA table.

Elastic Performance

Lock Info Collects and retains snapshots of lock informationfrom Locking Logger, a Teradata Database utility.

Lock Viewer

QueryCount

Collects and retains Teradata Database querycounts and DBQL query log data recorded for eachlogin from the tables DBC.DBQLogTbl andDBC.DBQLSummaryTbl.

Capacity Heatmap, Productivity,Todays Statistics, Metrics Graph

ResourceUsage

Collects and retains node and vproc resource usagedata from the DBC.ResUsageSPMA table for nodedata and DBC.ResUsageIPMA table for vproc data.

Metrics Analysis

Sessions Collects and retains Teradata Database sessionsnapshots for each login from the Teradata Monitorpartition by using the Teradata PerformanceMonitor API. The Sessions collector retains utilitydata for the Query Monitor utility view.

Capacity Heatmap, MetricsGraph, My Queries, QueryMonitor, Query Spotlight, SQLScratchpad, System Health,Todays Statistics, WorkloadMonitor

SQLExplain

Collects and retains Teradata Database session SQLand Explain data for current sessions on the system.Querying this data can take a long time and impactsystem performance.

Capacity Heatmap, MetricsGraph, My Queries, QueryMonitor, Query Spotlight, SQLScratchpad, System Health,Todays Statistics, WorkloadMonitor

SystemConfig

Collects and retains Teradata system configurationdata used by portlets and collectors. The collectorretrieves the Teradata version from DBC.DBCInfo.To gather physical system configuration data, thecollector also uses the MONITOR PHYSICALCONFIG request of the PM/API and executesSTATUS PDE of the Vproc Manager consolepartition utility. This collector cannot be disabled.In Teradata Database 14.00, the collector does notcall VprocManager console partition utility.

Alert Viewer, Canary ResponseTimes, Lock Viewer, MetricsAnalysis, My Queries, NodeResources, Productivity, QueryMonitor, Query Spotlight, SpaceUsage, System Health, TVSMonitor, Todays Statistics,Viewpoint Monitoring;Workload Designer, WorkloadHealth, Workload Monitor;Capacity Heatmap, MetricsGraph

System Stats Collects and retains system, node, and vprocstatistics information from Teradata Database.System statistics data is collected from the TeradataMonitor partition by using the PM/API. Physicaland virtual resource statistics are collected fromTeradata Database system memory. For systemsrunning Teradata Database 12.00 and earlier, theSystem Statistics collector executes awtmon -sthrough the Teradata Console partition to collect

Capacity Heatmap, MetricsAnalysis, Metrics Graph, NodeResources, System Health,Todays Statistics, WorkloadHealth, Workload Monitor





AMP Worker Task (AWT) usage on MP-RASsystems. AWT usage data is not available onWindows and Linux systems. For systems runningTeradata Database 12.00 and later, the SystemStatistics collector queries the Teradata Monitorpartition to collect AWT usage information.

Table Space Collects and retains data about the space used byTeradata Database system tables from theDBC.Dbase, DBC.TVM, DBC.Indexes, andDBC.DataBaseSpace tables.

Capacity Heatmap, MetricsGraph, Space Usage, SystemHealth

TASMConfig

Collects and retains all rule set information fromthe tdwm database.

My Queries, Query Monitor,Workload Health, WorkloadMonitor

TASMDistribution

Collects information about the average percentageof CPU consumption used by each workload foreach node in the Teradata Database system. TheTASM Distribution data collector executes schmon-M -p -P in the Teradata Console partition to collectinformation for the CPU Consumption pie chartgraph in the Distribution view. In TeradataDatabase 14.00, the collector executes theMONITOR WD request of PM/API instead ofschmon.

Workload Monitor

TASMException

Collects and retains data from the DBC exceptionlog.

Workload Monitor

TASM State Collects and retains system regulation data forsystems running Teradata Database 12.00 and later.For systems running Teradata Database 12.00 andearlier, the Workload State collector gathers andretains period information.

Workload Monitor

TASMSummary

Collects and retains active workload data from thetdwm database.

Workload Health, WorkloadMonitor

VirtualStorage

Collects and retains data on cylinder temperatureand storage grade from space types managed by theTeradata Virtual Allocation Manager (TVAM)utility.

TVS Monitor

TeradataAster DataCollector


ClusterStatus

Collects and retains cluster status and node statusinformation for each node.

Aster Node Monitor, SystemHealth



TeradataAster DataCollector


ComponentStats

Collects and retains statistics for each node, such asCPU, disk in and out, net in and out, and memoryutilization.

Aster Node Monitor, CapacityHeatmap, Metrics Analysis,Metrics Graph, System Health

Nodes Collects and retains basic node and node virtualworker information.

Aster Node Monitor, SpaceUsage, System Health

Processes Collects and retains session and processinformation.

Aster Completed Processes,Query Monitor

Space Usage Collects and retains database, table, and nodestorage information.

Aster Node Monitor, SpaceUsage, System Health

Workloads Collects and retains workload and workload serviceclass information.

Aster Completed Processes,Query Monitor

Viewing Data Collector Status

You can investigate the details of a data collector that is disabled or functioning with errors.1 From the SYSTEMS list, click the system that has one of the following icons:

Icon Description

Error Appears next to a system name or data collector name when one of these errorshas been detected:• Processing exception• Incorrect Teradata system privileges• Configuration errors, such as an incorrect password• Teradata system is offline

Disabled Appears next to a system name or data collector name if it is currently disabled.


The DATA COLLECTORS list refreshes the condition of each collector, identifyingcollectors that are disabled or have errors.

3 Do one of the following:• Click next to the collector name of the log you want to view.• Click next to the name of the collector you want to enable.

System Health

You can customize system status and tooltips and configure metrics and thresholds. Thethresholds are settings for the data collected by canary queries and the disk space, sessions,and system statistics data collectors.• For Teradata Database systems, the system status, tooltips, metrics, and thresholds

appear in the System Health and Productivity portlets.• For Teradata Aster systems, the system status, tooltips, metrics, and thresholds appear

only in the System Health portlet.



Configuring System Health Values

You can define threshold values for your system status calculation.

1 From the SYSTEMS list, click a system name.

2 From the SETUP list, click System Health.

3 Under THRESHOLDS, select one of the following options for each metric:

Option Description

Enabled Makes the metric visible in the System Health portlet. Uses the threshold values inthe system status calculation.

Disabled Omits the metric in the System Health portlet. Does not use threshold values in thesystem status calculation.

View Only Makes the metric visible in the System Health portlet. Does not use thresholdvalues in the system status calculation.

4 Adjust the degraded or critical thresholds for each metric.

5 [Optional] If CPU or I/O skew metrics are Enabled, do one of the following:• Select the CPU or I/O skew qualification check box and specify a threshold.

If the system CPU is below the defined threshold, the skew metric is excluded fromthe system health calculation. The metric displays in the System Health portlet asView Only.

• Clear the CPU or I/O skew qualification check box to include the skew metric in thesystem health calculation, regardless of system CPU.

6 Click Apply.

System Health Metrics

You can enable the metrics and thresholds that appear in the System Health andProductivity portlets. Available metrics and the portlets in which the data appears differsdepending on the type of system you choose.

Teradata Database System Metrics

System Metrics

Metric Description

Active Sessions Number of sessions with active queries

AMP CPU Skew Comparison of CPU use on the busiest AMP to the average AMP

AMP I/O Skew Comparison of disk use on the busiest AMP to the average AMP

AMP Worker Tasks Average number of AMP worker tasks in use on each AMP

Component Down Number of components, such as BYNETs or AMPs, that are down

(CPU) System Average percentage of CPU time spent in system (kernel) mode

(CPU) User Average percentage of CPU time spent in user mode



Metric Description

CPU Utilization Average node CPU use. CPU is calculated as the sum of the user CPUand system CPU usage percentages.

(CPU) Wait I/O Average percentage of CPU time spent waiting for I/O

DBC Disk Space Available DBC disk space in use

Max Disk by AMP Available disk space currently in use

Max Spool by AMP Available spool space in use

Memory Failures Memory failures across all nodes

Memory Used Largest amount of memory used by a single node in kilobytes

Node CPU Skew Comparison of CPU use on the busiest node to the average node

Node I/O Skew Comparison of disk use on the busiest node to the average node

System Heartbeat Canary query showing the response time of the most recent systemheartbeat in milliseconds

Total Disk Space Percentage of total disk space currently in use

Additional Canaries Additional canary queries that are defined for the system and used aspart of the monitoring of system health

Teradata Aster System Metrics

System Metrics

Metric Description

Active Sessions Number of users and applications currently connected to database

Component Down Number of nodes that are not available

Component Passive Number of nodes not processing queries but can be made ready toprocess queries when needed

CPU Average node CPU use

Max Disk by Node Largest percentage of used disk space on a node

Memory Average node memory use


Node I/O Skew Comparison of I/O use on the busiest node to the average node

Queen Disk Space Percentage of used disk space on the queen node

Replication Factor Number of copies of the user data

Total Space Percentage of used space to overall storage capacity

Configuring Custom Status and Tooltips

You can change the default definitions of status and tooltips by enabling and definingcustom status and tooltips for your system. For Teradata Database systems, these changes



appear in the System Health and Productivity portlets. For Teradata Aster systems, thesechanges appear only in the System Health portlet.

1 From the SYSTEMS list, click the system name.

2 From the SETUP list, click System Health.

3 Under Status and Tooltips, select Enable custom status.

4 Change the status and tooltip definitions for your system.

5 [Optional] Click at the end of the tooltip to restore the default definition.

6 Click Copy.

Copying System Health Settings Between Systems

You can copy the custom status, tooltips, and threshold settings to other compatible systems.You cannot copy canary query threshold settings to other systems.

Note: All copied settings overwrite the target system settings.

1 From the SYSTEMS list, click the source system name.

2 From the SETUP list, click next to System Health.

3 [Optional] Select Copy status and tooltips check box to copy your custom status.

4 [Optional] Select Copy thresholds check box to copy your threshold settings, exceptcanary queries.

5 Select target systems.

6 Click Copy.

Canary Queries

After a Teradata Database system is configured in Teradata Viewpoint, the System Heartbeatcanary query checks the responsiveness of the system. You can also create user-definedcanary queries that gather and retain data to display in the Canary Response Times,Productivity, and System Health portlets. Canary queries are not data collectors.

Adding or Copying a Canary Query

1 From the SYSTEMS list, click the name of the Teradata Database system you want toupdate.

2 From the SETUP list, click Canary Queries.

3 Do one of the following:

Option Description

Add Click to add a canary query.

Copy Click in the row of the canary query you want to copy.

4 Enter a name for the canary query.

5 [Optional] Select the Enabled check box to enable the canary query.



6 Under SQL, enter or modify the query SQL code.

7 Under DEFAULT DATABASE, specify the default database.

8 Under LOGIN, select the login you want to use to run the system task.

a [Optional] Select the Log in each time the query executes check box to force a newlogon connection to the Teradata system each time that the query runs.

b [Optional] Enter a timeout value. The value indicates the number of seconds beforeabandoning the attempt to log on to the Teradata system.Enter a value only if you selected the Log in each time the query executes check box.You cannot add an alert action for a logon timeout for a System Heartbeat canaryquery.

9 Under COLLECT DATA, specify the data collection frequency in seconds.The recommended sample rate is 2 minutes. The retention rate is one year.

10 Under EXECUTE, select one of the following options:

Option Description

24/7 a. Select 24/7 to execute the query 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Custom a. Select Custom to execute the query during a time range.b. Specify the start time and end time.c. Specify the start day and end day.

11 Under DELETE DATA, select one of the following options:

Option Description

Date a. Select the After check box to set the calendar retention period.b. Enter a number and select a calendar value.

Size a. Select the Over check box to set the file size retention period.b. Enter a number and select a file size restriction.

12 Click Apply.


Deleting a Canary Query

SYSTEM HEARTBEAT is a canary query that cannot be deleted. It is used to checkwhether the Teradata Database system is responsive.1 From the SYSTEMS list, click the name of the system you want to update.

2 From the SETUP list, click Canary Queries.

3 Click in the row of the canary query you want to delete.


4 Click OK.



The canary query row disappears.

Alerts

Alerts monitor the performance of a system and automatically take action when eventsoccur. You can add, copy, and configure alerts, as well as migrate Teradata Manager alerts.

You can activate alert actions that send a notification, or take some other type of action,when a metric exceeds a threshold.

After you add alert action sets in the Alert Setup portlet, they appear in the TeradataSystems portlet.

The types of alert actions you can choose are:

Send an Email

Choose a defined email address and text message. Event information, such as date,time, event name, threshold, and actual value, is automatically added to the body ofthe email message.

Run a Program

Choose a program to execute (.exe).

Run a BTEQ Script

Choose a BTEQ script.

Run a SQL Query

Choose a SQL query.

Notify SNMP System

Choose an SNMP trap.

You can also choose one of the following alert actions for Teradata Database session alert-types:

Abort Session

Abort the session for which an alert was detected. This action is only available forsessions.

Lower Priority

Set the priority of the session for which an alert was detected to the one specified inthe New priority for lower priority action text box, located under Data Collectorssetup for Sessions.

Alert Types

You can set alerts that take place when performance or database space events occur on oneor more systems.



TeradataDatabase SystemAlert Type

Description

System Set an alert to occur when the performance on a Teradata Database reaches thespecified threshold.

Node Set an alert to occur when the performance on a Teradata Database reaches thespecified threshold at the node level.

Vproc Set an alert to occur when the performance on a Teradata Database reaches thespecified threshold at the vproc level.

Database Space Set an alert to occur when the space used on any resource, such as an AMP,exceeds the specified percentage.

Session Set an alert to occur when the performance on a Teradata Database reaches thespecified threshold at the session level.

Canary Queries Set an alert to occur when the response time for a canary query exceeds thethreshold.

System Health Set an alert to occur when the system health of a Teradata Database reaches thespecified level.

Data Collectors Set an alert to occur when any errors are encountered by the DCS for thespecified data collectors.

Teradata AsterSystem Alert Type

Description

System Set an alert to occur when the performance on Teradata Aster reaches thespecified threshold.

Node Set an alert to occur when the performance on Teradata Aster reaches thespecified threshold at the node level.

Process Set an alert to occur when the performance on Teradata Aster reaches thespecified threshold at the process level.

System Health Set an alert to occur when the system health of Teradata Aster reaches thespecified level.

Data Collectors Set an alert to occur when any errors are encountered by the DCS for thespecified data collectors.

Teradata Database Alert Metrics and Properties

These metrics are available for Teradata Database alerts. The associated property namesallow you to customize alert actions in the Alert Setup portlet.

The metrics that you can specify in the System dialog box for alerts are listed below.

Metric Description Property Name

Node CPU Usage Average percent of CPU usage of all online nodesin the configuration

aveNodeCpuUsage

Node Disk Usage Average percent of disk usage of all online nodesin the configuration

aveNodeDiskUsage




Net A Usage Total BYNET utilization (average of the onlineBYNETs)

netAUse

AMP CPU Usage Average percent of CPU usage of all onlineAMPs in the configuration

aveAmpCpuUsage

PE CPU Usage Average percent of CPU usage of all online PEsin the configuration

avePeCpuUsage

Node CPU Skew Comparison of CPU use on the busiest node tothe average node

nodeCpuSkew

AMP CPU Skew Comparison of CPU use on the busiest AMP tothe average AMP

ampCpuSkew

Total Sessions Total number of logged on sessions totalSessions

Blocked Sessions Total number of blocked sessions blockedSessions

The metrics that you can specify in the Node dialog box and Vproc dialog box for alerts arelisted below.


Id ID of the process

Note: Not available in the dialog box.

procId

Node ID ID of the node


nodeId

Vproc Number Number of the vproc


vprocNo

Status Status of the node, where U means the resource isup and D means the resource is down

status

CPU Usage Percent of CPU usage that is not idle (includessystem CPU and user CPU)

cpuUse

Disk Usage Percent of disk usage for this resource diskUse


netAUse

CIC Usage Percent of Channel Interface Controller usage forthis resource

cicUse

Disk Out Req Avg Average number of outstanding disk requests forthis resource

diskOutReqAvg

Disk I/O Number of disk I/Os diskIO

Host I/O Number of host I/Os hostIO

Swaps Total number of swap reads and swap writes swaps

Mem Failures Segment allocation attempts that failed memFailures




Node CPU Usage Average percent of CPU usage of all online nodesin the configuration

aveNodeCpuUsage

Node Disk Usage Average percent of disk usage of all online nodesin the configuration

aveNodeDiskUsage

Net A Use Total BYNET utilization (BYNET receiver usage) systemNetAUse


nodeCpuSkew

Total Sessions Number of sessions logged on to the PE sessLogCount

Available AWT Total available AMP worker tasks availableAWTCount

Message Count Messages waiting on the vproc msgCount

AMP CPU Usage Average percent of CPU usage of all online AMPsin the configuration

aveAmpCpuUsage

PE CPU Usage Average percent of CPU usage of all online PEs inthe configuration

avePeCpuUsage

AMP CPU Skew Comparison of CPU use on the busiest AMP tothe average AMP

ampCpuSkew

The metrics that you can specify in the Database Space dialog box for alerts are listed below.


Database Name Name of the database


databaseName

Current Perm % Percentage of the total permanent disk space thedatabase is currently using (Current Permdivided by Max Perm)

spaceUsedPct

Current Perm Max % Current Perm Max * Number of Vprocs / MaxPerm

maxSpaceUsedPct

The metrics that you can specify in the Table Space dialog box for alerts are listed below.


Current Perm Amount of permanent disk space theDBC.TransientJournal table is currently using

totalSize

Skew Percentage of uneven distribution of disk spaceused for the DBC.TransientJournal table acrossall AMPs

skewPct

The metrics that you can specify in the Session dialog box for alerts are listed below.


Session Number Number of the session


sessionNo




User User of the session


userName

Host ID Host ID or LAN ID associated with the PE thatprocessed the logon request for the session

hostId

Account Account from which a query was submitted userAccount

CPU Skew CPU skew during the last sample cpuSkew

CPU delta Total CPU usage time consumed, in seconds,since the last sample

deltaCPU

AMP CPU Current elapsed CPU time, in seconds, used onall AMPs by the associated session for executingrequests

ampCPUSec

AMP I/O Current number of logical Reads and Writesissued across all AMPs by the associated session

ampIO

Request AMP CPU Current elapsed CPU time, in seconds, used onall AMPs by the current request

requestAmpCPU

Request AMP I/O Current number of logical Reads and Writesissued across all AMPs by the current request

requestAmpIO

Hot AMP CPU CPU time of the highest CPU utilized AMPduring the collection interval

hotAmp1CPU

Connection Time How long the session has been connected timeLoggedOn

Blocked Time How long the query has been blocked blockedTime

Idle Time How long the query has been idle idleTime

Sessions Per User Number of sessions logged on under thisusername

sessionsForUser

Partition Partition to which the session is connected (SQL,CONSOLE, MONITOR)

partName

Utility Session Session from one of the Teradata utilities,indicated by True and False

utility

Blocked SessionNumber 1

Session ID of the first blocked query blk1SessNo

Blocked User Name 1 Name of the user running the first blocked query blk1Username


Session ID of the second blocked query blk2SessNo

Blocked User Name 2 Name of the user running the second blockedquery

blk2Username


Session ID of the third blocked query blk3SessNo

Blocked User Name 3 Name of the user running the third blockedquery

blk3Username



The metrics that you can specify in the Canary Queries dialog box for alerts are listed below.


Canary ID ID of the canary query canaryId

Query Name Name of the query queryName

Login TimeoutOccurred

Timeout for the login, indicated by True andFalse

loginTimeoutOccurred

Response Time Number of milliseconds it took for the canaryquery to return a response

responseTime

The metrics that you can specify in the System Health dialog box for alerts are listed below.


Health Name of the system health state health

Teradata Aster Alert Metrics and Properties

These metrics are available for Teradata Aster alerts. The associated property names allowyou to customize alert actions in the Alert Setup portlet.

The metrics that you can specify in the System dialog box for alerts are listed below.


CPU Average node CPU use cpu

Memory Available amount of memory used by node memory


nodeCpuSkew

Node I/O Skew Comparison of I/O use on the busiest node to theaverage node

nodeIoSkew

Replication Factor Number of copies of user data replicationFactor

Active Processes Number of processes with active queries activeSessions

The metrics that you can specify in the Node dialog box for alerts are listed below.


State State of the node status

Type Values for node types as follows:• Worker nodes hold the data and process the

queries• Queen nodes manage the process, including

the performance of the other nodes anddelegation of queries

• Loader nodes transfer data in and out ofvirtual workers

type

CPU Amount of available processing power used bythe node

cpuUse




Memory Memory used on the node memUse

Network In Rate of network traffic into the node in bytes persecond

netIn

Network Out Rate of network traffic out of the node in bytesper second

netOut

Disk In Rate of disk traffic into the node in bytes persecond

diskWrite

Disk Out Rate of disk traffic out of the node in bytes persecond

diskRead

% Disk Full Percent of used disk space on the node. Includesuser data, replica data, and system data

percentFull

The metrics that you can specify in the Process dialog box for alerts are listed below.


User Name of the user who submitted the process userName

Database Name of the database on which the process ran dbName

Duration How long the process ran processExecutionTime

Migrating Alerts

After a Teradata Database system has been configured in Teradata Viewpoint, all of the alertsexcept event alerts can be migrated from Teradata Manager to Teradata Viewpoint.Configured rates cannot be migrated. You must configure data collection rates in TeradataViewpoint.

Alerts can only be migrated when there are no alerts in Teradata Viewpoint for a TeradataDatabase system; therefore, migrate existing Teradata Manager alerts before adding andcopying alerts.


2 From the SETUP list, click Alerts.

3 From the ALERT TYPES list, click an alert type.

4 Under ALERTS, click Migrate Alerts.

5 Enter the log on information for an account that has permission to read data from themigrating database.

6 Select an Authentication Mechanism for the migrating database.

7 [Optional] Under SNMP Config, select the SNMP configuration that you assigned to anymigrated action sets containing an SNMP action.This is required when the alert actions being migrated contain any SNMP actions. TheSNMP configurations are defined in the Alert Setup portlet.

8 Click Apply.

A message appears in the dialog box with the number of alerts that were migrated.



Adding and Copying Alerts

After you configure a system in Teradata Viewpoint, you can add an alert. Available alerttypes differ depending on the type of system you choose.

Because you can only migrate alerts when no alerts currently exist in Teradata Viewpointfor a Teradata Database system, migrate existing Teradata Manager alerts before adding andcopying alerts.




4 From the ALERTS list, do one of the following:• Click to add an alert.• Click in the row of the alert you want to copy.• Click the name of the alert you want to edit.

5 Enter a name for the alert.

6 [Optional] Select the Enabled check box to enable the alert.

7 Under Alert Rules, do the following:

Alert Type Trigger

• System• Node• Process• Vproc• Canary

Queries

a. Select a scope to apply to the defined rules.• All applies all of the defined alert rules.

• Any applies one defined alert rule, depending on which rule firstmeets criteria in the definition.

b. Select a metric from the list and enter a threshold value.You can add or remove rules.

c. [Optional] Enter the number of minutes in the Only trigger if alertrule(s) are met for box.

The alert triggers if the rule is true for the number of minutes that youentered.

• Session a. Select a scope to apply to the defined rules.• All applies all of the defined alert rules.

• Any applies one defined alert rule, depending on which rule firstmeets criteria in the definition.

b. Select a metric from the list and enter a threshold value.If you set up an alert rule whose only condition is Sessions per User, onlyuserName and sessionsForUser metrics are available when customizingTeradata Alerts alert actions.

You can add or remove rules.c. [Optional] Enter the name of one or more users to exclude from

receiving the alert.



Alert Type Trigger

You can add or remove users.

• DatabaseSpace

a. [Optional] Select the scope of databases that the alert rule applies to.• All databases includes all databases.

• All databases except excludes one or more databases that you specify.

• Only include databases includes one or more databases that youspecify.

You can add or remove databases from the scope.b. Select a metric from the menu and enter a threshold value.

The alert triggers if the metric exceeds the value that you enter.

• Table Space a. [Optional] Enable and enter a value for one or more of the following forthe DBC.TransientJournal table:• Current Perm is the amount of total permanent disk space the table

is currently using.

• Skew is the percentage of uneven distribution of disk space used forthe table across all AMPs.

The alert triggers if the metric exceeds the value that you entered.

• SystemHealth

a. Select a health level from the Trigger if system health is this level orworse list.

b. [Optional] Enter the number of minutes in the Only trigger if alertrule(s) are met for box.

The alert triggers if the rule is true for the number of minutes that youentered.

• DataCollectors

a. Select one or more data collectors from the Available box.b. Click to move them to the Selected box.

The alert triggers if any errors are encountered by the DCS for theselected data collectors.

8 Under Alert Action, do the following:

a Select an alert action from the list.

b Enter a limit for Do not run twice in a number of minutes.The alert action does not run twice during the minutes that you entered. The alertaction does not run more frequently than the data collector SAMPLE RATE.

c [Optional] For session alerts only, select one of the following check boxes:• Abort Session

This aborts the Teradata Database session after performing the selected alertaction.

• Lower Priority



This modifies the priority level for the Teradata Database session whileperforming the selected alert action. The priority level is configured in the Sessiondata collector under New priority for Lower Priority action.

9 Under Severity, select a severity from the menu.

10 [Optional] Under Message, enter a message that appears when the alert action executes.

11 Click Apply.


Copying Alerts Between Systems

You can copy all alerts, except canary query alerts, from one system to another compatiblesystem.

Note: Alerts with duplicate names are overwritten in the target system.

1 From the SYSTEMS list, click the system from which you want to copy alerts.

2 From the SETUP list, click next to Alerts.

3 Do one of the following:• Select a target system.• Select multiple target systems with Shift or Ctrl.

4 Click Copy.

Deleting Alerts

An alert can be deleted any time after it has been added to a system.




4 Under ALERTS, select the alert name.

5 Click in the row of the alert you want to delete.


6 Click OK.

The alert row disappears.

Monitor Rates

After a Teradata system has been configured in Viewpoint, you can set Teradata Databaseinternal sample rates for sessions, node/vproc collection, and node/vproc logging. Theserates determine how often PM/API data are refreshed. Note the following when settingrates:



TeradataDatabase

Monitor Rate Description

12.00, 13.00,13.10

• The rates are based on the numbers set in Teradata Database.• The sample rates for node/vproc sampling and node/vproc logging must be an

integer divisor of 3600.• The sample rate is valid when the new rate is an integer divisor of both current

logging rates.• The logging rate is valid when the new rate is an integer multiple of the current

sample rate.• The sample rate is applied before the logging rates are applied. When setting all

three values at the same time, the sample rate must be a divisor of the old and thenew logging rates. The logging rates must be a multiple of the old and newsample rate.

14.00 • The rates are based on the numbers set in Teradata Database.• The sample rates for node/vproc collection and node/vproc logging must be an

integer divisor of 3600.• The logging rate is independent of the sample rate.

Setting Monitor Rates

You can set Teradata Database internal sample rates for sessions, system statistics, andresource usage. The sample rate you set becomes the recommended sample rate for eachcollector. Enabling the monitoring and logging process allows each collector to begincollecting data.


2 From the SETUP list, click Monitor Rates.

3 Enable and set collector rates for the following:

TeradataDatabase

Description

12.00, 13.00,13.10

a. Under Session Sampling, select the check box and enter the session samplerate in the text box for the Sessions collector.

b. Under Node/Vproc Sampling, select the sample check box and sample ratefor the System Statistics collector.

c. Under Node/Vproc Sampling, select the logging check box and logging ratefor the Resource Usage collector.

14.00 a. Under Session Sampling, select the check box and enter the session samplerate in the text box for the Sessions collector.

b. Under Node/Vproc Collection, select the check box and collection rate forthe System Statistics collector.

c. Under Node/Vproc Logging, select the check box and logging rate for theResource Usage collector.

4 Click Apply.



Log Table Clean Up

You can configure log table clean up to remove unnecessary information and reallocatespace in Teradata Database. After you enable the clean up process for a table and configurethe retention period, you must set the time of the clean up schedule. The clean up processpermanently deletes data and does not archive it.

Configuring Log Table Clean Up


2 From the SETUP list, click Log Table Clean Up.

3 From the TABLES list, click a table.

4 [Optional] Under Settings for table name , do one of the following:• Select the Enabled check box to activate clean up and include the table in the clean

up schedule.• Clear the Enabled check box to disable clean up and exclude the table from the clean

up schedule.

5 Under LOGIN, select the user you want to run the clean up task.

6 Under CLEAN UP, set the retention period using a number and calendar value.

7 Click Apply.

Clean Up Tables

The following clean up processes delete the associated system log tables:

Clean Up Process Name System Log Table Name

DBQ Log • DBC.DBQLSummaryTbl• DBC.DBQLStepTbl• DBC.DBQLogTbl• DBC.DBQLObjTbl• DBC.DBQLExplainTbl• DBC.DBQLSqlTbl

Resource Usage • DBC.ResUsageSpma• DBC.ResUsageSvpr• DBC.ResUsageShst• DBC.ResUsageIpma• DBC.ResUsageIvpr• DBC.ResUsageScpu• DBC.ResUsageSldv• DBC.ResUsageSawt (12.0 and later)• DBC.ResUsageSps (12.0 and later)• DBC.ResUsageSpdsk (12.0 and later)• DBC.ResUsageSvdsk (12.0 and later)• DBC.ResUsageSobj (V2R6 only)

Event Log • DBC.EventLog



Clean Up Process Name System Log Table Name

TDWM • DBC.TDWMSummaryLog• DBC.TDWMEventLog• DBC.TDWMExceptionLog

SW Event Log • DBC.SW_Event_Log

Access Log • DBC.AccLogTbl

Clean Up Schedule

After the log table clean up has been configured for Teradata Database, you can set aschedule. The schedule sets the time to delete all log tables that have been enabled for theclean up process. The clean up process permanently deletes data and does not archive it.

Scheduling Log Table Clean Up


2 From the SETUP list, click Clean Up Schedule.

3 [Optional] Under Clean Up Scheduler, do one of the following:• Select the Enabled check box to activate the clean up schedule.• Clear the Enabled check box to disable the clean up schedule.

4 Under LOGIN, select the user you want to collect the current time and TeradataDatabase version.

5 Under DELETE TIME, enter a time at which the clean up task is run on the Viewpointserver by the DCS.Current Teradata Time shows your information, or Unknown shows that a connectionto Teradata Database cannot be made.

6 Click Apply.

Disk Usage

You can view disk usage over time and the distribution of data on the Teradata Viewpointserver. The sparkline and graph provide different aspects of the data.

Graphics Description

Sparkline Shows 3 months of data. Information balloons show detailed data abouta point in time.

Graph Shows how the space used by the Teradata Viewpoint server is dividedamong systems and their data collectors. Mouse over or click the systemboxes in the graph to see detailed disk space and data collectorinformation. If a system contains a region that is not associated with acollector, the information balloon displays Unknown and the amount ofdata space.



Viewing Disk Usage

1 Under SYSTEMS, click Disk usage.

2 [Optional] Mouse over the sparkline and graph to activate the information balloons andsee detailed information.

3 [Optional] Click a system box in the graph to view the disk usage for each data collectoron that system.

4 [Optional] Click the collector name in the graph to see the corresponding configurationdialog box.

User ManagerThe User Manager portlet allows the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator to view andmanage Teradata Viewpoint user accounts so that you can add usernames, modify useraccounts, assign roles, reset passwords, and export data. Each portal username must beunique. You must have Teradata Viewpoint Administrator permission to access the UserManager portlet.

About the User List View

The User List view displays a list of all Teradata Viewpoint system users by FIRST NAME,LAST NAME, PORTAL USER NAME, EMAIL, and LAST LOGIN for each user.

You can view, select, and search for individual user details; add Teradata Viewpoint useraccounts, and export data. You can resize the column width or sort the contents of a columnalphabetically.

Searching for a User

You can search for an existing Teradata Viewpoint user, resize columns, and sort theinformation in the columns.

1 From the User List view, click the Find Users list.

2 Select a search method from the list.

3 In the contains field, enter the search criterion.

4 Click Find.

Users with information matching the search criterion are listed in the search results.

5 [Optional] Drag the column border in either direction to resize the column.

6 [Optional] Sort on a column by clicking the column header.

Adding a User

Each portal username must be unique to avoid being logged off when someone logs on withthe same username, such as Administrator.



If your Teradata Viewpoint portal is configured to use auto-provisioning, a user account iscreated automatically the first time a user logs on. Auto-provisioning validates portalusernames with the LDAP directory and assigns the default role and email domain.

1 From the User List view, click Add User.

2 Enter the portal username for the user account.

3 Enter the first name, last name, and email address for the user account.

4 Choose an authentication method:• Select the Externally Authenticated check box to authenticate the selected user from

an external source, such as LDAP.• Clear the Externally Authenticated check box to authenticate the selected user from

the Teradata Viewpoint internal database.

5 [Optional] In the Password field, enter a preliminary password for the user account.Externally authenticated passwords are stored in the external source, such as LDAP, andvalidated from that source.

6 In the Re-enter Password field, enter the password again, exactly as it was enteredpreviously.

7 Click Apply.

Exporting Table Data

You can export data to a .csv file for further analysis and formatting. The exported .csv filecontains all available data. If filters are used, only filtered data is exported. The format for thetime, date, and some numeric values differs in the view and exported .csv file.

1 Click in the table header and select Export.



About the User Details View

The user details view allows you to delete a user, edit Teradata Viewpoint user accounts, andmanage roles assigned to users.

The following tabs are available in this view:

General

Displays the selected portal username, first name, last name, email address, whetherthe user is externally authenticated, and the last time the user logged into Viewpoint.

Roles

Displays the available and assigned roles with role precedence for the selected user.



Assigning User Roles

A role must be defined in the Roles Manager portlet before it can be assigned to a user. TheRoles tab provides a list of available roles. Roles can be selected and assigned to the currentuser account.

You can assign roles to an existing Teradata Viewpoint user account. If your TeradataViewpoint portal is configured to use auto-provisioning, a user account is createdautomatically the first time a user logs on to Teradata Viewpoint. By default, auto-provisioned accounts are authenticated externally and assigned a default role. Theauthentication source (for example, LDAP) and default role are set during configuration.

1 From the User List view, browse the list of users or click Find Users to perform asearch.

2 Click a user's name.

The General tab appears and displays information about the selected user.

3 Click the Roles tab.

Available roles are listed in the AVAILABLE PORTAL ROLES pane. Roles assigned tothe user are shown in the ROLES FOR <User> pane.

4 Select a role from the AVAILABLE PORTAL ROLES list or select multiple roles bypressing Shift or Ctrl.

5 Click .

The selected roles appear in the ROLES FOR <User> pane. In the AVAILABLEPORTAL ROLES pane, the assigned roles are dimmed.

6 Click Apply.

Setting Role Priority

You can set role priority for existing Teradata Viewpoint roles. Roles assigned higherpriority take precedence over lower-priority roles.




3 Click the Roles tab.

4 Select a role from the ROLES FOR <User> pane to change the role's priority.

5 Change the role priority by doing one of the following:• Click Up to increase the selected role priority. Roles at the top of the list have higher

priority.• Click Down to decrease the selected role priority. Roles at the bottom of the list are

lower in priority.

6 Click Apply.



Editing a User

You can edit a Teradata Viewpoint user account, except the portal username. The usernameis defined when the user account is created using the User Manager portlet or it is stored inLDAP when the user is externally authenticated.

1 From the User List view, browse the list of users or click Find Users to perform a search.



3 [Optional] Change the first name, last name, or email address for the user account.

4 Choose an authentication method:• Select the Externally Authenticated check box to authenticate the selected user from

an external source, such as LDAP.• Clear the Externally Authenticated check box to authenticate the selected user from

the Teradata Viewpoint internal database.

5 [Optional] Change the password:

a Select the Change Password check box.

b In the Password field, enter the password.

c In the Re-enter Password field, enter the password exactly as it was enteredpreviously.

If Externally Authenticated is selected, the Change Password check box and relatedpassword fields are unavailable, and the password must be changed in the externalsource.

6 Click Apply.

Changing a User Password

You can change a Teradata Viewpoint user password except if Externally Authenticated isselected. When the Change Password check box and related password fields are unavailable,and the password must be changed in the external source.

1 From the User List view, browse the list of users or click Find Users to perform a search.



3 Select the Change Password check box.The Password and Re-enter Password fields change color.

4 In the Password field, enter a password.

5 In the Re-enter Password field, enter the password again, exactly as it was enteredpreviously.

6 Click Apply.



Deleting a User

You can delete a Teradata Viewpoint user account, except if you are logged on under theuser account you want to delete.




3 Click Delete User.A confirmation message appears.

4 Click OK.





CHAPTER 4

Aster Completed Processes

Aster Completed ProcessesThe Aster Completed Processes portlet allows you to view the final status of processes thatran on a Teradata Aster system. Use the portlet to analyze the performance of longer-running queries, to investigate processes that did not complete successfully, and to see howthe system is being used in general.

Each process is a SQL query, SQL command, or a block of SQL statements. The statementsmight originate from Teradata Database or contain Teradata Aster SQL-MapReducefunctions.

Monitor multiple Teradata Aster systems by opening additional instances of the AsterCompleted Processes portlet.

Aster Completed Processes View

The ASTER COMPLETED PROCESSES view displays summary information about thecompleted processes on a Teradata Aster system so you can monitor and locate issues.

Selection Menus

Show the name of the system and the time frame currently displayed. Click thesystem name to select another system. Click the time frame to select another timeperiod.

State Filter Bar

Displays a count of the processes in each state. Click a state to show only theprocesses in that state.

Filters

Control displayed data by showing only rows that match your filter criteria. Sort onthe column headers to group data in ascending or descending order.

Summary Table

Displays summary information for all processes. The table is configured in theColumns dialog box. Click a row in the table to see details.

Table Actions

Clear Filters removes any content in the filter boxes.Configure Columns allows you to choose the columns to display.


Export creates a .csv file containing all available data. If filters are used, only filtereddata is exported.

Selecting a System to Monitor

You can use selection menus to choose a system and time frame to monitor in the portlet,starting with the highest level menu on the far left.

1 In the selection menu, click the currently selected system name to display a list ofavailable systems.

2 Select a system from the menu.

3 Click Next.

4 Select a time frame from the menu.

5 Click Next.

About the State Filter Bar

The state filter bar allows you to display specific states in the view.

Chapter 4 Aster Completed Processes


The state filter buttons provide, in near-real-time, a count of processes in each state.

All

Number of processes that finished running

Completed

Number of processes that ran successfully

Error

Number of processes that encountered a problem when running

Canceled

Number of processes that were stopped

About Filters and Sorting

Filters allow you to display only rows that match your filter criteria. You can narrow thesearch further by filtering on multiple columns. Use greater than or less than symbols whenfiltering columns with numeric values. When using these symbols, exact matches may notproduce the expected results due to rounding of numbers containing decimals.

Sorting allows you to change the order of rows in a table based upon criteria in a columnand applies across all pages of the table. Sort on a column by clicking the column header. Asecond click toggles the sort order. You can sort on two columns consecutively using Ctrl+Click in the column header. Primary sort order is indicated by a single arrow, andsecondary sort order is indicated by a double arrow.

Filter Symbols





cat?

?cat

cat?l

cat???

p???er

cats, catalog

scat, Scatter

catalog

catalog







*cat

cat*l

cat*

*ews*er

*%


catalog

cat, cats, catalog


what is 100%?



=CAT

=cat?

=Cat*

=Cat_

=Cat\?

CAT

cats

Cat, Cats, Catalog

Cat_

Cat?



*\?

=cat\*

cat\?

what is 100%?

cat*

cat?, Cat?

> Use this symbol to match any number that is greater thanthe specified value. This symbol is only used to performmathematical comparisons.

For columns containing percentages, avoid using % in thefilter. Type only > and the number.

>60 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth

>= Use these symbols in conjunction to match values greaterthan or equal to the specified number.

For columns containing percentages, avoid using % in thefilter. Type only >= and the number.

>=60 60, 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth

< Use this symbol to match any number that is less than thespecified value. This symbol is only used to performmathematical comparisons.

For columns containing percentages, avoid using % in thefilter. Type only < and the number.

<60 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth

<= Use these symbols in conjunction to match values less thanor equal to the specified number.

For columns containing percentages, avoid using % in thefilter. Type only <= and the number.

<=60 60, 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth

! Use this symbol at the beginning of your search to matchalpha or numeric characters that do not contain the alphaor numeric characters.

This symbol can be used in conjunction with any othersymbol or wildcard character.

!cat33 cat32, cat34, and so forth



Clearing Filters

You can clear the filter box values from the table.


Option Description

Clearindividualfilter boxes

a. Click on the filter box.

Clear allfilter boxes

a. Select Clear Filters at the bottom of the portlet.

Configuring Columns to Display

Use the Columns dialog box to select, lock, and order columns. You can resize columns inthe table.

1 Click in the table header and select Configure Columns.

2 In the Columns dialog box, select the check boxes of columns to display.Mouse over the name to see the complete name.

3 [Optional] Click next to the column name.The columns at the top of the list can be locked in the table to remain on the left whenscrolling horizontally.

4 [Optional] Click and drag the row to reorder the column.

5 Click Apply to save the changes.

6 [Optional] In the table, drag the column heading border in either direction to resizethe column.






State Icons

The following symbols appear in the Aster Completed Processes portlet:



Symbol Name Definition

Canceled Process was stopped

Completed Process finished running

Error Error encountered during processing

Aster Completed Processes View Metrics

Metric Description

User Name of user that submitted the process

State Process state, such as error, canceled, completed

State Icon Symbol of the process state

Type Values for process types are as follows:• SQL-MR• SQL• Teradata Import• Teradata Export

Duration How long the process ran

Process ID Unique identifier for the process

Session ID Unique identifier for the session

Start Time the process began running

End Time the process stopped running

Workload Name of the workload in which the process ran

Database Name of the database against which the process ran

About Details View

The details view displays statistics and information about the selected process. This view isaccessed by clicking a process row in the summary table.

Tabs

Provides important process details about the Overview, SQL, and Explain tabs.

Process Details

Displays details of the selected process in sections that are specific to each tab.

Previous/Next

Allows you to move through processes without returning to the summary table.



About the Overview Tab

The Overview tab displays detailed information about key metrics for the selected process.The metric values show the status of a Teradata Aster process.

Query Information Description

State Process state, such as error, canceled, completed

Duration How long the process ran, displayed as hh:mm:ss

Start Time the process began running

End Time the process stopped running

State Details Additional information about errors in operating condition

Workload Information Description

Workload Policy Name of the workload policy used to manage the process. Definesa set of related queries, and allows them to be prioritized in asimilar manner.

Service Class Name of the service class used by the workload policy. Specifies theshare of system resources allocated to a workload as a function ofthe class's priority and weight values.

Priority Indicates the importance of the process.• High• Medium• Low

Weight Number ranging from 1 to 100 that indicates the precedence of theprocess within the priority level, increasing the resources that canbe allocated for the process. A higher value indicates a greater levelof precedence.



Session Information Description

Session ID Unique ID for the session

User Name of user that submitted the query

Database Name of the database against which the process ran

IP Address IP address of the user

About the SQL Tab

The SQL tab displays the SQL for the selected query. This information is read-only. Click to export the SQL as a .txt file.

About the Explain Tab

The Explain tab displays each Explain step of the query. Click to export the Explain dataas a .csv file.

To view all steps and phase details, click Show all. Alternatively, click Show summary toview a shortened version of the Explain data.

Step Information Description

Step Status Icon Indicates the status of each Explain step. In the Aster CompletedProcesses portlet, the icon is always black, indicating completed.

Time Duration of the step

Type Category of step such as Command, CommitPreparedTransaction,DataTransfer, Import, PrepareTransaction, and Query.

Phase/Detail Summarized or full explanation of query that executes in this step.Can be used to diagnose the cause of the failure or slowness.



CHAPTER 5

Aster Node Monitor

Aster Node MonitorThe Aster Node Monitor portlet allows you to monitor nodes on a Teradata Aster system.The portlet displays the operation and status of worker, loader, and queen nodes as well asthe amount of data stored on the node.

You can view details such as status and type for each node on the system. Hardwarestatistics including CPU and Memory are available for selected time intervals.

Aster Node Monitor View

The ASTER NODE MONITOR view displays summary information about the nodes on aTeradata Aster system so you can monitor node performance and identify issues.

Selection Menu

Shows the name of the system currently displayed. Click the system name to selectanother system.

State Filter Bar

Displays a count of the nodes in each state. Click a state to show only the nodes inthat state.

Filters

Filters allow you to change displayed data by showing only rows that match yourfilter criteria. Sort on the column headers to group data in ascending or descendingorder.

Summary Table

Displays summary information for all nodes. The table is configured in theColumns dialog box. The view is refreshed every 30 seconds. Click a row in the tableto see details.

Table Actions

Clear Filters removes any content in the filter boxes.Configure Columns allows you to choose the columns to display.Export creates a .csv file containing all available data. If filters are used, only filtereddata is exported.





3 Click Next.


The state filter bar allows you to display specific states in the view.

The state filter buttons provide a count of nodes in each state.

All

Number of nodes on the selected Teradata Aster system

Active

Nodes that are online and available for work

Failed

Nodes that are not participating in the nCluster

Prepared

Nodes that are ready to be incorporated in the nCluster and able to host a virtualworker

Passive

Nodes that contain copies of virtual worker data and that can be made active with arebalance operation

Chapter 5 Aster Node Monitor





Filter Symbols





cat?

?cat

cat?l

cat???

p???er

cats, catalog

scat, Scatter

catalog

catalog




*cat

cat*l

cat*

*ews*er

*%


catalog

cat, cats, catalog


what is 100%?



=CAT

=cat?

=Cat*

=Cat_

=Cat\?

CAT

cats

Cat, Cats, Catalog

Cat_

Cat?



*\?

=cat\*

cat\?

what is 100%?

cat*

cat?, Cat?


>60 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth







>=60 60, 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth



<60 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth



<=60 60, 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth




Clearing Filters

You can clear the filter box values from the table.1 Do one of the following:

Option Description






Use the Columns dialog box to select, lock, and order columns. You can resize columns inthe table.1 Click in the table header and select Configure Columns.













State Icons

The following icons appear in the ASTER NODE MONITOR portlet:

Icons Name Definition

Active Node is online and available to process data

Cleaning Node is being cleared of all data

Failed Node is offline and not participating in the nCluster

Installing Node is being added to a cluster

New Node recently added to the system

Passive Node holds copies of virtual worker data

Prepared Node is ready to be incorporated in the cluster andcan host a virtual worker

Preparing Node is preparing to host a virtual worker

Stopped Node is powered down

Unknown Node is not registered

Aster Node Monitor Metrics

Metric Description

% Full Percent of disk space used on the node

CPU Node CPU use

Disk In Rate of disk writes in bytes per second



Metric Description

Disk Out Rate of disk reads in bytes per second

IP Address IP address of the node

Name Name of the node

Network In Rate of network traffic into the node in bytes per second

Network Out Rate of network traffic out of the node in bytes per second

Node ID Unique ID for the node

State Process state, such as active, installing, passive

State Icon Symbol of the process state

Type Values for node types as follows:• Worker nodes hold the data and process the queries• Queen nodes manage the process, including the performance

of the other nodes and delegation of queries• Loader nodes transfer data in and out of virtual workers

About the Details View

The details view displays statistics and information about the selected node. This view isaccessed by clicking on a node row in the summary table.

Tabs

Provides important query details on the Overview and Hardware Statistics tabs.

Node Details

Displays details of the selected node in sections that are specific to each tab.

Previous/Next

Allows you to move through nodes without returning to the summary table.




The Overview tab displays detailed information about the selected node. The metric valuesprovide a snapshot of Teradata Aster system status.

Node Information Description

IP Address IP address of the node

Rack ID User-defined name that specifies the physical location of the node

State State of the node

Type Values for node types as follows:• Worker nodes hold the data and process the queries• Queen nodes manage the process, including the performance

of the other nodes and delegation of queries• Loader nodes transfer data in and out of virtual workers

Up Since Date and time the node came online

Virtual Workers Number of virtual workers on the node

Virtual Worker Information Description

Data Size Amount of data on the virtual worker

Index The partition number corresponding to a virtual worker

Nodes with Replicas List of nodes that contain a copy of the virtual worker data

Status Current operating condition of the virtual worker

Type Values for virtual worker types as follows:• Primary is the virtual worker in which the first copy of data is

inserted by Teradata Aster



Virtual Worker Information Description

• Replica is the virtual worker in which a copy of the data isinserted by Teradata Aster

About the Hardware Statistics Tab

The Hardware Statistics tab displays CPU, memory, and IO metrics for the node in aselected time period. You can view statistics for the last hour, 12 hours, or 24 hours andexport the statistics for a node. The metrics in the list are the current values. The plot lines onthe graph represent values collected over the selected time period. Select a metric name to seethe plot line highlighted and surrounded by the performance envelope in the graph.

List Metrics Description

CPU Node CPU use

Disk In Rate of disk writes in bytes per second

Disk Out Rate of disk reads in bytes per second

Memory Memory used on the node

Network In Rate of network traffic into the node in bytes per second

Network Out Rate of network traffic out of the node in bytes per second

Setting the Time Period

You can set the time period that is used to plot the graph.

1 In the toolbar, click and select a time period from the list.

The portlet refreshes, and the graph is redrawn.

Removing Metrics from the Graph

You can disable a metric plot line to remove it from the graph and the metric remains in thelist.

1 Clear a colored checkbox in the metric list.

Exporting Metrics

You can export data to a .csv file for further analysis and formatting. The exported .csv filecontains data for the time period selected on the Hardware Statistics tab.

1 Click and select a time period from the list.

2 Click .





CHAPTER 6

Calendar

CalendarThe Calendar portlet allows you to schedule and communicate events that might impactone or more Teradata Database systems. You must have appropriate permissions to managesystem events. A single instance of the Calendar portlet can be added to a TeradataViewpoint portal page. Each instance is identical, displaying the same information.

The Calendar portlet provides the following views:

Week View

The Week view displays all events between Sunday and Saturday of the selectedweek. In this view, only one day of the week is expanded at a time and eventindicators on other days of the week are displayed at the scheduled time in theappropriate day column.

Month View

The Month view displays all events with start times falling between Sunday prior tothe start of the selected month and Saturday after the end of the month. In this view,event indicators are color-coded squares.

An event cannot last longer than 24 hours. You can define a time and priority to an eventand, when you save it, an event indicator (a colored box) appears in the Week view orMonth view. A blue indicator means normal and a red indicator means high priority events.Mouse over an event indicator to display details about the event. All times shown are for thetime zone defined in the user profile.

About the Calendar Week View

The Week view displays all events falling between Sunday and Saturday of the selected week.In this view, only one day of the week can be expanded at a time. The selected day caninclude one or more event summaries. The summary shows the event start and end times,and the event title. The remaining days are collapsed into narrow columns. Click in any daycolumn to expand and display a different day of the week. Today's date is shaded darker if itfalls within the selected week.


From the Week view, you can see event details by clicking anywhere in the event summaryor event indicator. Events scheduled on other days of the week are indicated by a vertical linelocated at the scheduled time in the appropriate day column.

Add Event Opens the Add Event dialog box to add an event to the calendar.

Today Opens the weekly calendar that includes today.

Displays the Week view. If you click the date (number), the selected day isexpanded in the Week view.

Displays the Month view.

Displays the previous week.

Displays the next week.

About the Calendar Month View

The Month view displays all events with start times that occur during the selected month.Events shown in the selected month that start either in the previous or following month areindicated by a lighter color. Today is shaded darker if it falls within the selected month.

Chapter 6 Calendar


From the Month view, you can see event details by clicking on a date (number) or an eventindicator.

Add Event Opens the Add Event dialog box to add an event to the calendar.

Today Opens the monthly calendar that includes today.

Displays the Week view. If you click the date (number), the selected day isexpanded in the Week view.

Displays the Month view.

Displays the previous month.

Displays the next month.

About the Calendar Event Details View

The Event Details view displays the details of the selected event, including event priority,who created it (the author), whether it was modified, and when it is scheduled to occur. Theevent title and description are also included in this view.

Chapter 6 Calendar


From this view, you can manage the calendar and scheduled events.

Back Return to the last displayed calendar view.

Edit Open the Edit Event dialog box to edit the event details.

Delete Delete this event.

Display the Week view containing the event.

Display the Month view containing the event.

Display the previous event.

Display the next event.

Adding an Event

Adding an event changes the system event calendar and affects all users. By default, newevents are added to the currently selected day.

1 From either the Calendar Week or Month view, click Add Event.The ADD EVENT dialog box appears with the current date in the START and END datefields.

Chapter 6 Calendar


2 Set the START date:

a Click inside the START date field.

A pop-up calendar appears.

b Click or to navigate to the appropriate month.

c Select the date from the pop-up calendar.

3 Set the END date.

4 Select the event START and END times from the list.

5 Select AM (morning) or PM (afternoon) from the list.

6 Select a priority:• Normal• High

7 Enter the EVENT TITLE.

8 [Optional] Enter the event DESCRIPTION.

9 Click OK.

Editing an Event

Editing an event changes the event instance affecting all users.

1 From either the Calendar Week or Month view, select the event you want to edit.The event details view appears.

2 Click Edit.The EDIT EVENT dialog box appears, showing event details.

3 Set the START date:

Chapter 6 Calendar


a Click inside the START date field.

A pop-up calendar appears.

b Click or to navigate to the appropriate month.

c Select the date from the pop-up calendar.

4 Set the END date.

5 Select the event START and END times from the list.

6 Select AM (morning) or PM (afternoon) from the list.

7 Select a priority:• Normal• High

8 Enter the EVENT TITLE.

9 [Optional] Enter the event DESCRIPTION.

10 Click OK.

Deleting an Event

Deleting an event removes the event instance from the database and affects all users.

1 From either the Calendar Week or Month view, select the event you want to delete.

2 In the Event Details view, click Delete.


3 Click OK.

Chapter 6 Calendar


CHAPTER 7

Canary Response Times

Canary Response TimesThe Canary Response Times portlet allows you to analyze trends in single-systemperformance over a 60-minute or a 120-minute period using canary queries. Canary queriesmeasure the time in milliseconds it takes for a user-defined query to run to completion. Thesame query is run repeatedly at a preselected interval to compare system workload overtime. The longer the query takes to complete, the heavier the system workload at that time.

Canary response times can help you plan maintenance activities or schedule your workloadsappropriately. For example, you can use this portlet to identify heavy workload periods on aTeradata Database system so that you can avoid assigning tasks when system performance ismarginal. You can also use canary response times to compare current performance withaverage performance measured across one or more weeks of historical data. Additionally,you can monitor and compare the performance of multiple Teradata Database systems byadding a Canary Response Times portlet to the portal page for each monitored system.

The summary view displays a graphic overview of selected canary query metrics monitoredover the previous 60-minute or 120-minute period. Samples are taken once every minute,and a data point is added to the graph for each selected canary query metric.

Use the PREFERENCES view to select and organize canary query metrics to display, changethresholds, and adjust the vertical axis range for each metric. The Teradata ViewpointAdministrator defines default metrics for the Canary Response Times portlet in theTeradata Systems portlet. If enabled for your profile, you can set metrics that override thedefaults.

The Canary Response Times portlet also gives you a means for comparing current andhistorical data by displaying past performance as an average of metric data points collectedover time. The duration over which the averages are calculated can be changed using thePast Averages tab.

About the Canary Response Times View

The Canary Response Times portlet monitors the workload of a single Teradata Databasesystem over time. The summary view shows current and historical performance data usingsparklines. The sparkline is a horizontal graph, showing the time (in milliseconds) a querytakes to complete.

You can monitor the performance of multiple systems by adding a Canary Response Timesportlet instance for each Teradata Database system you want to monitor. Canary responsetimes, such as SYSTEM HEARTBEAT, are represented by a data point that is added to the


sparkline once every 60 seconds. Mouse over a sparkline to see an information ballooncontaining detailed information about the data point.

The sparkline types are:

Current Data

Shows the time (in milliseconds) that a query takes to complete. Each data pointshown on the sparkline is the average of all response times recorded during a 120-second interval, by default. The result is a curve sparkline. A large dot at the NOWpoint on the sparkline indicates the value of the last data point captured. A numberto the right of the sparklines also indicates the NOW data-point value.

The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator sets the default data collection rate.

Past Average

Presents the averages for a user-selected number of weeks. The sparkline is shown asa skyline chart with flat, solid data points. Use this sparkline to compare the currentperformance from the previous 60-minute or 120-minute period with the systemperformance during the same 60-minute or 120-minute period 1 or more weeks inthe past. Use the past-average data shown from NOW to 30 minutes or 60 minutesin the future to estimate system workload and enhance decision-making regardingworkload assignments and resource allocation.

The summary views are:

Normal

The skyline shows 90 minutes of the average-workload data values from a user-selected number of weeks in the past. The curve sparkline shows the actual data forthe past 60 minutes using 1-minute data points.

Maximized

The skyline shows 180 minutes of the average-workload data values from a user-selected number of weeks in the past. The curve sparkline shows the actual data forthe past 120 minutes using 1-minute data points.

Toggle between the normal and maximized summary views using the (maximize) and (minimize) portlet buttons.

Canary Response Times Metrics

The metrics available for display are canary queries.

Chapter 7 Canary Response Times


MetricDefaultSparkline

Past AverageLine Description

System Heartbeat Curve Yes The predefined metric that is available for all systems. This isthe default canary query.

canary query name CQ Curve Yes Canary queries defined by the Teradata ViewpointAdministrator appear on the Metrics tab.

About the Preferences View

The PREFERENCES view allows you to customize the portlet to monitor key metric trendsthat are important to efficient operation of the system. You can select only one system tomonitor for each portlet instance.

From the portlet frame, click to access the PREFERENCES view and then use one ormore of the following tabs to customize your preferences.

System

Select a system to monitor.

Metrics

Select and organize metrics to monitor in the summary view. Drag metrics from alist of all available metrics to the Preview pane where you can preview the results asyou go.

Settings

Define settings for the metrics selected for display. Set thresholds to highlight metricvalues that are outside normal operating ranges. Set maximum vertical-axis rangesto limit the range of values displayed for selected metrics.

Past Averages

Adjust the number of weeks of data points used to calculate the average value foreach displayed metric.


Use the System tab in the PREFERENCES view to select a Teradata Database system tomonitor. Only one system can be selected for each portlet instance.


2 Click the System tab.

3 [Optional] Click Clear Defaults to clear all user-defined default settings created for thisportlet.

4 Select a system from the list.

5 [Optional] Select the Use these settings as defaults check box to use the current settingsin all PREFERENCES tabs as the default configuration each time you add this portlet toa portal page.

6 Click OK.



Selecting Metrics to Monitor

Use the Metrics tab in the PREFERENCES view to select and organize the metrics shown inthe summary view.



The Preview pane uses sample data to show how metric rows are displayed in thesummary view.


4 Do any of the following to change the way metric rows are displayed:• Add a metric row. Drag a metric from the Select metrics for display list to the

Preview pane.• Remove a metric row. Click located on the metric row.• Change metric row order. Drag a metric already in the Preview pane to a new

location in the pane (up or down).Adding or removing metrics affects only the system currently selected, provided that themetrics are available on that system.


6 Click OK.

Setting Metric Thresholds

Use the Settings tab in the PREFERENCES view to set the THRESHOLD and VERTICALAXIS RANGE values for the metrics selected for display. Only metrics selected using theMetrics tab appear in the list of available metrics. Changes to the metrics affect only thesystem currently selected, provided that the metrics are available on that system.


2 Click the Settings tab.


4 [Optional] Enter the THRESHOLD setting for each available metric.

The threshold line does not appear in the view when the value entered is zero or blank.

5 [Optional] Enter the VERTICAL AXIS RANGE for each available metric.The sparkline scales automatically when the value entered is zero or blank.


7 Click OK.



Setting Past Averages

Use the Past Averages tab in the PREFERENCES view to specify the number of weeks ofdata points used to calculate the average values displayed in metric graphs.


2 Click the Past Averages tab.


4 Enter the number of weeks (1 to 99 weeks).The default is 2 weeks.


6 Click OK.





CHAPTER 8

Capacity Heatmap

Capacity HeatmapThe Capacity Heatmap portlet allows you to analyze resource usage trends on a system toidentify periods when a system is either over-utilized or under-utilized. You can use thisinformation to schedule resource-intensive jobs with minimal impact to other users.

The Capacity Heatmap portlet displays a grid with days on the horizontal axis and hours onthe vertical axis. The metric and system are selected using selection menus. Time-rangebuttons on the toolbar allow you to select 1-month or 3-month periods. Each color-codedsquare represents an hour and provides a visual indication of the metric value during a 1-hour period.

The PREFERENCES view allows you to set the work week and shift specifications.

About the Capacity Heatmap View

The CAPACITY HEATMAP view displays a graph of variations and trends in systemresource usage. The graph plots days on the horizontal axis and hours along the vertical axis.Customize the view using the menus, toolbar, and date-range slider to select metrics anddate ranges.

The following list describes the features in this view:

Selection Menus

Shows the selections that define the metric currently being displayed. You canchange the metric by changing the selections.

Toolbar

Contains the time-range buttons. Select a time-range button to change the graph.The time-range start and end dates are displayed on the toolbar next to the time-range buttons. You can use the Display and threshold buttons to define how thecells are shaded. Export creates a .csv file containing selected data.

Date-Range Slider

Controls the amount of historical data displayed in the view and adjusts to displayfrom 1 week to approximately 4 months of historical data. Dates outside the date-range slider timeline are shaded lighter. The darker-shaded area between the sliderhandles represents the current date range being displayed.


Cell

Contains data about an hour on a specific date in the graph. Mouse over any cell todisplay an information balloon containing the date, hour, and metric value for the1-hour block.

Work Week and Shift Indicator

Highlights times when most users are normally accessing system resources with abox around the work week and work shift hours. Specify work day and shift hoursusing the PREFERENCES view.

Trend-Reporting Metrics for Teradata Database

Database Metrics

Metric Description Type

Current Perm Sum of the current amount of permanent space (disk space)used across all vprocs

Number

Current Perm Max Maximum permanent space used on a single vproc Number

Current Perm Min Minimum permanent space used on a single vproc Number

Current Spool Sum of the current amount of spool space (disk space) usedacross all vprocs

Number

Current Spool Max Maximum spool space used on a single vproc Number

Chapter 8 Capacity Heatmap



Current Spool Min Minimum spool space used on a single vproc Number

Current Temp Sum of the current amount of temporary space (disk space)used across all vprocs

Number

Current Temp Max Maximum temporary space used on a single vproc Number

Current Temp Min Minimum temporary space used on a single vproc Number

Peak Perm Sum of the largest amount of permanent space used across allvprocs since the last reset of the peak perm value

Number

Peak Perm Max Maximum of the largest amount of permanent space used ona single vproc since the last reset

Number

Peak Perm Min Minimum of the largest amount of permanent space used on asingle vproc since the last reset

Number

Peak Spool Sum of the largest amount of spool used across all vprocssince the last reset of the peak perm value

Number

Peak Spool Max Maximum of the largest amount of spool used on a singlevproc since the last reset

Number

Peak Spool Min Minimum of the largest amount of spool used on a singlevproc since the last reset

Number

Peak Temp Sum of the largest amount of temporary space used across allvprocs since the last reset of the peak perm value

Number

Peak Temp Max Maximum of the largest amount of temporary space used on asingle vproc since the last reset

Number

Peak Temp Min Minimum of the largest amount of temporary space used on asingle vproc since the last reset

Number

Perm Limit Maximum space available for permanent space storage of allindex tables, data tables, subtables, stored procedures, triggers,and permanent journals

Number

Spool Limit Maximum space available for storage of spool database objects Number

Temp Limit Maximum space available for storage of temporary databaseobjects

Number

Performance Metrics


Blocking Duration Total time the heartbeat query is blocked Number

Concurrency Average number of active tasks running on TeradataDatabase while the heartbeat query is running

Number

Response Time Average response time of the selected canary query Number

Retrieve Time Average time to retrieve all results Number

Rows Returned Average number of rows returned by the selected canaryquery

Number




Total Time Combined response time and retrieve time Number

Query Metrics


Abort Total Number of aborted queries Number

Active AMPs Avg Average number of active AMPs Number

Active AMPs Max Maximum number of active AMPs Number

Active AMPs Min Minimum number of active AMPs Number

Active AMPs Stddev Standard deviation of active AMPs Number

AMP CPU Skew Avg Average percent of AMP CPU skew Percent

AMP CPU Skew Max Maximum percent of AMP CPU skew Percent

AMP CPU Skew Min Minimum percent of AMP CPU skew Percent

AMP CPU Skew Stddev Standard deviation percent of AMP CPU skew Percent

AMP I/O Skew Avg Average percent AMP I/O skew Percent

AMP I/O Skew Max Maximum percent AMP I/O skew Percent

AMP I/O Skew Min Minimum percent AMP I/O skew Percent

AMP I/O Skew Stddev Standard deviation of AMP I/O skew Percent

Cache Total Number of queries found in step cache Number

Concurrency Average number of queries executing simultaneously duringthe hour

Number

Delay Time Avg Average query delay time Number

Delay Time Max Maximum query delay time Number

Delay Time Min Minimum query delay time Number

Delay Time Stddev Standard deviation of query delay time Number

First Response TimeAvg

Average time it takes to receive the first response Number

First Response TimeMax

Maximum time it takes to receive the first response Number

First Response TimeMin

Minimum time it takes to receive the first response Number

First Response TimeStddev

Standard deviation of time it takes to receive the first response Number

Max Steps inParallelism Avg

Average number of level-2 query steps executed in parallel Number

Max Steps inParallelism Max

Maximum number of level-2 query steps executed in parallel Number




Max Steps inParallelism Min

Minimum number of level-2 query steps executed in parallel Number

Max Steps inParallelism Stddev

Standard deviation of number of level-2 query steps executedin parallel

Number

Number of Steps Avg Average number of query steps Number

Number of Steps Max Maximum number of query steps Number

Number of Steps Min Minimum number of query steps Number

Number of StepsStddev

Standard deviation of number of query steps Number

Query Count Queries logged in dbc.QryLog, or the sum of Querycountfrom dbc.QryLogsummary during the sample period

Number

Query Seconds Avg Average query run time Number

Query Seconds Max Maximum query run time Number

Query Seconds Min Minimum query run time Number

Query Seconds Stddev Standard deviation of query run time Number

Result Rows Avg Average number of result rows for the query Number

Result Rows Max Maximum number of result rows for the query Number

Result Rows Min Minimum number of result rows for the query Number

Result Rows Stddev Standard deviation of number of result rows for the query Number

Spool Usage Avg Average amount of spool the query used Number

Spool Usage Max Maximum amount of spool the query used Number

Spool Usage Min Minimum amount of spool the query used Number

Spool Usage Stddev Standard deviation of amount of spool the query used Number

Steps with ParallelismAvg

Average number of query steps with parallel steps Number

Steps with ParallelismMax

Maximum number of query steps with parallel steps Number

Steps with ParallelismMin

Minimum number of query steps with parallel steps Number

Steps with ParallelismStddev

Standard deviation of number of query steps with parallelsteps

Number

Total CPU Time Avg Average CPU time. CPU time is calculated as the total AMPCPU time plus the total parser and dispatcher CPU time forthe query.

Number

Total CPU Time Max Maximum CPU time. CPU time is calculated as the total AMPCPU time plus the total parser and dispatcher CPU time forthe query.

Number




Total CPU Time Min Minimum CPU time. CPU time is calculated as the total AMPCPU time plus the total parser and dispatcher CPU time forthe query.

Number

Total CPU Time Stddev Standard deviation of CPU time. CPU time is calculated as thetotal AMP CPU time plus the total parser and dispatcher CPUtime for the query.

Number

Total I/O Count Avg Average I/O count for the query Number

Total I/O Count Max Maximum I/O count for the query Number

Total I/O Count Min Minimum I/O count for the query Number

Total I/O Count Stddev Standard deviation of I/O count for the query Number

Warning Total Total number of queries with warnings Number

System Metrics


Active Sessions Number of sessions with active queries Number

AMP CPU Skew Comparison of CPU use on the busiest AMP to the averageAMP

Percent

AMP I/O Skew Comparison of disk use on the busiest AMP to the averageAMP

Percent

Average OutstandingDisk Reqs

Outstanding disk requests (disk queue size) Number

AWT Average number of AMP worker tasks in use on each AMP Number

Components Down Number of components, such as BYNETs or AMPs, that aredown

Number

CPU Average node CPU use. CPU is calculated as the sum of theuser CPU and system CPU usage percentages.

Percent

CPU AWT Processing CPU resources spent processing an AMP worker task.Normalized by multiplying the value returned from TeradataDatabase by the number of physical CPUs on the associatednode of the AWT.

Percent

CPU/Disk Ratio Ratio of CPU use to disk use. Calculated as the node CPUtime divided by the physical disk usage.

Percent

CPU DispatcherProcessing

CPU resources spent in PE Dispatcher processing Percent

DBC Disk Space Available DBC disk space in use Percent

Disk I/O Number of disk I/Os Number

Disk Reads Total physical disk reads per system during the sample period Number

Disk Usage Disk use on the system Percent




Disk Writes Total physical disk writes per system during the sample period Number

FSG Cache Miss Percentage of FSG cache misses. Calculated as physical I/Osdivided by logical I/Os.

Number

Host Block Reads Total message blocks (one or more messages sent in onephysical group) received from all clients

Number

Host Block Writes Total message blocks sent to all hosts Number

Index Ratio The percentage of index hits. Calculated as the index I/Osdivided by the data block I/Os.

Number

Logical MB/Sec Logical I/O of the system in megabytes per second Number

Max Disk Space ByAMP

Available disk space currently in use Percent

Max Spool Space ByAMP

Available spool space in use Percent

Memory Failures Total memory failures across all nodes Number

Memory Resources Total segments allocated to memory resources Number

Net A Usage Percent of BYNET A usage (BYNET receiver usage) Percent

Net Reads Total reads from the BYNET during the sample period Number

Net Writes Total messages written to the BYNET during the sampleperiod

Number

Node CPU Skew Comparison of CPU use on the busiest node to the averagenode

Percent

Node CPU Usage Average percent of CPU usage of all online nodes in theconfiguration

Percent

Node I/O Skew Comparison of disk use on the busiest node to the averagenode

Percent

Nodes Down Number of system nodes down Number

Parallelism Percentage of parallelism, calculated as the average CPUusage / maximum CPU usage x 100

Percent

Parser Usage Percent of CPU time the parser uses. It might exceed 100%.Normalized by multiplying the value returned from TeradataDatabase by the number of physical CPUs on the associatednode of the parser.

Percent

PE CPU Usage Average CPU usage of the PEs. Calculated as the averageusage of the parser and the dispatcher (both normalizedvalues). Normalized by multiplying the value by the numberof physical CPUs on the associated node of the PE.

Percent

Read I/O Percent of I/O that are reads Percent

Session Login Count Sessions currently logged on to the system Number




Swap Drops Total pages or segments dropped from memory during thesample period due to swapping

Number

Swap Reads Total pages or segments read into memory from the disk aftera prior write or drop during the sample period

Number

Swap Writes Total pages or segments written into swap area from memoryduring the sample period

Number

System CPU Average CPU time spent in System mode Percent

Total AMP CPU Total AMP CPU use Percent

Total Disk Space Total disk space currently in use Percent

Total Node CPU Total node CPU use Percent

User CPU Average CPU time spent in User mode Percent

Vproc CPU Usage Average percent of the CPU usage of all online vprocs in theconfiguration. Normalized by multiplying the value returnedfrom Teradata Database by the number of physical CPUs inthe associated vproc.

Percent

Wait I/O CPU Average CPU time spent waiting for I/O Percent

Table Metrics


Index Count Total number of indexes Number

Table Size Table size in bytes, including index, fallback, and journalsubtables

Number

Trend-Reporting Metrics for Teradata Aster

System Metrics


Active Processes Number of processes that are currently running Number

Components Down Number of nodes that are not available Number

Components Passive Number of nodes not processing queries but can be madeready to process queries when needed

Number

CPU Average node CPU use Percent

Disk I/O Data transfer rate, in bytes per second Number

Disk In Rate of disk writes, in bytes per second Number

Disk Out Rate of disk reads, in bytes per second Number

Max Disk By Node For the node with the most used disk space, the amount ofused disk space on the node

Percent

Memory Average node memory use Percent




Network In Rate of network traffic into the node, in bytes per second Number

Network Out Rate of network traffic out of the node, in bytes per second Number


Percent

Node I/O Skew Comparison of I/O use on the busiest node to the averagenode

Percent

Queen Disk Space Amount of used disk space on the queen node Percent

Session Login Count Number of sessions currently logged on to the system Number

Total Space Amount of used disk space on the system Percent

About the Capacity Heatmap Menus and Toolbar

The menus and toolbar allow you to specify the display attributes of the CAPACITYHEATMAP view.

Use the selection menus to define a metric to monitor by selecting a:• System• Category• Metric• Source or Variant

The first time you add the portlet to the page, the first available metric that you havepermission to view is displayed. However, if you only have permission to view Tablemetrics, no data appears in the portlet until you select a metric using the selection menus.

The 1 mo and 3 mo buttons allow you to adjust the time range displayed. As you adjust thetime range, the toolbar refreshes automatically to display the new time range in the toolbar.

The Display button allows you to show or hide cell values and adjust high and low valuesthat determine cell shading. The Display cell values check box is only available when themetric displayed is a percentage. If the selected time range results in narrow cells, cell valuesare not displayed even though the Display cell values check box is selected.

The threshold button displays the current threshold value and allows you to set thethreshold slider and adjust the threshold. The threshold button and slider only appear whenthe metric displayed is a percentage.



If the threshold value is within the gray-scale range defined in the DISPLAY OPTIONSmenu, the cells are displayed in a shade of the exception color equivalent to thecorresponding gray-scale shade for that cell value.

The Export button allows you to create a .csv file containing selected data.

Selecting Metrics and Systems to Monitor

You can use selection menus to choose a metric and system to monitor in the portlet,starting with the highest level menu on the far left. Menus choices are available based on theprevious menu, so not all menus apply to all metrics.

You are not required to make a selection from every menu each time you modify a metricselection.



3 Click Next.

4 Select a category from the menu.

5 Click Next.

6 Select a metric from the menu.

7 Click Next.

8 [Optional] Select a source or variant from the menu.The menu for source or variant (sum, average, minimum, maximum, standard deviationof that metric) is only available for certain metric categories.

9 Click Next.

Adjusting the Date Range

Use the toolbar to set the range of dates to display for the selected metric and system.

1 Mouse over the date-range slider to activate the start-date and end-date handles.

2 Drag the start-date handle until the intended start date is displayed in the toolbar.

3 Drag the end-date handle until the intended end date is displayed in the toolbar.

4 [Optional] Drag the date-range slider left or right to move the start-date and end-datehandles in unison.



5 [Optional] Click 1 mo.

One month of historical data is displayed ending at the current end date.


Slightly more than three months of historical data is displayed ending at the current enddate.

Setting Cell Values and Shading

The DISPLAY OPTIONS dialog box allows you to display cell values and to set metricthresholds for applying cell shading for each system monitored. The shading provides avisual overview by highlighting interesting values.

You must repeat this procedure for each available metric to ensure appropriate shading isapplied when the metric is selected.

1 From the CAPACITY HEATMAP view, click Display.

The DISPLAY OPTIONS dialog box appears.

2 Do one of the following:• Select the Display cell values check box to display cell values.• Clear the Display cell values check box to display cells without values.The Display cell values check box is only available when the metric displayed is apercentage. If the selected date range results in narrow cells, cell values are not displayedeven though the Display cell values check box is selected.

3 Set the lower and upper threshold values in the Apply shading to values between boxes.

4 Click OK.

Values below the defined range appear in a very light shade of gray, while values above therange have a very dark shade. Values within the defined range appear in three shades ofgray.

Setting the Threshold Value

The threshold button displays the current threshold value. Use the threshold button toaccess the threshold slider and adjust exception highlighting to show when the system isover-utilized or under-utilized.

The threshold button and slider only appear when the metric displayed is a percentage.

1 In the toolbar, click the threshold button.

The threshold slider appears.



2 Do one of the following:• Click to set an upper threshold, highlighting all values greater than the selected

value in shades of red.• Click to set a lower threshold, highlighting all values less than the selected value in

shades of gray.

3 Drag up or down to adjust the threshold value.

The CAPACITY HEATMAP view highlights change to reflect values above or below thethreshold setting.

4 Click anywhere off the threshold slider to close the slider and return to the portlet.

Exporting Metrics

You can export data to a .csv file for further analysis and formatting. The exported .csv filecontains up to the last 8 months of data, regardless of the selected date range. One variant(Avg, Max, or Min) is exported for the selected metric.

1 In the selection menu, select a system, category, metric, and variant.

2 Click .



4 [Optional] Reformat exported data to match the format in the view.


The PREFERENCES view allows you to specify the work days and hours that are outlinedwith a border in the CAPACITY HEATMAP view. This setting helps to visually emphasizethe days and hours during which most users are using system resources.

From the portlet frame, click to access the PREFERENCES view.



Configuring the Work Week and Shift

Use the Work week and shift tab in the PREFERENCES view to outline specific work daysand hours with a dark gray border in the CAPACITY HEATMAP view. The work-week-and-shift-border helps you easily identify the days and hours when system resources areused most.


2 Click the Work week and shift tab.


4 Select the number of shifts (work days) per week from the Total number of shifts perweek list.

A single row displays for each shift.

5 For each shift, click the appropriate arrow, and then select the following:• Start day• Start time• Shift duration


7 Click OK.

Example with Overlapping Shifts

When multiple shifts are defined on the same day and the hours you specify overlap, they arecombined into one shift and are enclosed in one set of shift-indicator lines. The first shift starts at 6AM and lasts for 8 hours, and the second shift starts at 1 PM and lasts for 8 hours. After you savethese settings, the work-week lines and shift-indicator lines show a single shift from 6 AM to 9PM. The Work week and shift tab counts the combined Total number of shifts per week and theShift duration indicates a longer single shift.





CHAPTER 9

Elastic Performance

Elastic PerformanceThe Elastic Performance portlet allows you to view your Teradata system usage and identifyperiods where usage exceeds licensed capacity. You can export data to assist in verifying thatpay per use charges reflected in the billing invoice from Teradata Corporation are accurate.This portlet is disabled by default and must be enabled using the Portlet Library portlet.

The PREFERENCES view allows you to set the capacity baseline that is specified in yourTPERF Capacity on Demand Order Addendum. If you need additional information orassistance, contact your Teradata Customer Service Representative.

About the Elastic Performance View

The ELASTIC PERFORMANCE view provides a graph of system usage over different timeperiods for each node type on the Teradata system, allowing you to see when usage exceedsbaseline. The Elastic Usage collector must be enabled to see data in the view.


Selection Menus

Shows and allows you to change the system and the graph type being displayed. Usethe selection menus to select the following graph types:Average CPU per hour: Displays bars with the average CPU usage per hour. Thepercentage of CPU usage above baseline is highlighted in the graph.CPU seconds above baseline: Displays CPU seconds above baseline per day in themonth graph or per week in the quarter graph.

Toolbar

Displays the date range. The dates and times represent system usage displayed in thegraph. The Export button allows you to create a .csv file containing data for acustomized date range.

System Usage

Displays the actual system usage with one graph for each node type on the system.As you mouse over the bars in the graph, information balloons display details aboutthe data for the time period. The bar at the right side of the CPU seconds abovebaseline graph will be shorter when the entire time period is not completed anddata is still being gathered.


System CPU Limit: The CPU limit set on the Teradata system which displays afterthe Elastic Limit data collector is enabled. You can set the CPU limit using theWorkload Designer portlet or the Schmon utility.Capacity Baseline: The capacity baseline is set in the PREFERENCES view.Licensed capacity is shown below the line. Usage above the line, displayed in red, issubject to pay per use charges.Data Gap: A period of time when no usage data was available. Bars containing datagaps are represented by a lighter color. The total amount of time where data was notavailable is shown in the information balloon as you mouse over the bar.Information Balloon: The information balloon for the CPU seconds abovebaseline graph displays the following:• CPU seconds above baseline: The total number of CPU seconds used above the

baseline in the day or week period.• Hours above baseline: The count of all hours in the day or week period that had

an average CPU usage above the baseline.• Average CPU when above baseline: The average CPU usage for all hours in the

day or week period that had an average CPU usage above the baseline.

Following is an example of the Average CPU per hour graph, where the bars represent theaverage percent of CPU usage per hour.

Following is an example of the CPU seconds above baseline graph, where the bars representthe CPU seconds above baseline for a month.

Chapter 9 Elastic Performance


Selecting a System

You can use selection menus to choose a system and graph type, starting with the highestlevel menu on the far left. Menu choices are based on the previous menu.


2 Select a system from the menu.Only systems that have the Elastic Usage collector enabled are included in the systemselection.

3 Click Next.

4 To select a graph type, do one of the following:• Select Average CPU per hour.• Select CPU seconds above baseline, click Next, and then select Month or Quarter.

5 Click Next.

Exporting Usage Data

You can export usage data for further analysis. The date range shown in the toolbar is thedefault period for which data is exported. Start and end dates are inclusive. The time zoneused for the export date range is the Teradata system time zone.

1 In the selection menu, select a system and graph type.

2 Click .

3 [Optional] Change the start and end date.

4 Select one of the following export options:

Export File Type Description

Summary Data (CSV) Exports aggregate data from the graph for viewing.

Summary Data (ZIP) Exports aggregate data from the graph for billing purposes.



Export File Type Description

All Data (ZIP) Exports all available data points from the selected time period forbilling purposes.

5 Click Export.

6 Save the file to the desired location.


The PREFERENCES view allows you to set the capacity baseline which should be based onyour TPERF Capacity on Demand Order Addendum.

Setting Capacity Baseline

Use the General tab in the PREFERENCES view to set the capacity baseline. The percentageyou enter is the capacity that you paid for and is displayed in the ELASTICPERFORMANCE view.


2 Enter the capacity baseline as specified in your TPERF Capacity on Demand OrderAddendum.

3 Click OK.



CHAPTER 10

External Content

External ContentThe External Content portlet allows you to access your company browser-based tools fromwithin the Teradata Viewpoint portal. Upon opening the External Content portlet, the webpage appears, as set by the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator. If you have the appropriatepermissions, you can use the PREFERENCES view to change the URL.

Caution: Any valid web URL can be used. However, the portlet does not validate page content.Accessing some URLs might display the page outside the portlet or redirect the portal pageentirely.


The PREFERENCES view allows you to customize the URL that appears when the ExternalContent portlet is opened. You must have the appropriate permissions to change the URL.

Changing the URL

Use the PREFERENCES view to change the URL set by the Teradata ViewpointAdministrator.


2 Enter the URL of your choice.

3 Press Enter.


4 Click Save.

The new URL is saved.

Setting the Default URL

Use the PREFERENCES view to change the default URL set by the Teradata ViewpointAdministrator.



The URL reverts to the default URL set by the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator.


3 Select the Use these settings as defaults check box to use the current settings in allPREFERENCES tabs as the default configuration each time you add this portlet to aportal page.

4 Enter the URL of your choice.

5 Click OK.


6 Click Save.

The new URL is saved as the default URL.

Chapter 10 External Content


CHAPTER 11

Lock Viewer

Lock ViewerThe Lock Viewer portlet allows you to view the lock data such as transaction identifiers,session identifiers, lock object identifiers, and global deadlocks. Viewing lock informationhelps you determine whether system performance has been degraded by a database lock.

Locate locks:• In a specific database• In a specific time frame• Caused by a specific user• That are blocking a specific user

About the Lock Viewer View

The LOCK VIEWER view displays a report containing information about the databaselocks that have occurred in the last 5 minutes, hour, day, or week. Lock data is displayed inthe report only after the lock contention is resolved. Real-time lock contention data is notavailable. The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator must enable the appropriate collectors todisplay data in the LOCK VIEWER view.


Selection Menus

Shows the system and time frame for which the lock information is collected. Youcan choose a different system and time frame.You can use the rewind feature with any time frame selection to retrieve lock dataand compare it to data for a different date and time. You can only use the 5 minutestime frame with the rewind feature, and it is typically used to troubleshoot lockcontentions.

Filters

Changes the displayed data to only show rows that match your filter criteria. Youcan use the filters to search for locks in a specific database, caused by a specific user,or that are blocking a specific user.

Lock Log Report

Shows lock data for transaction identifiers, session identifiers, lock object identifiers,and global deadlocks.


Table Actions

Clear Filters removes any content in the filter boxes.Configure Columns allows you to choose the columns to display and setthresholds.Export creates a .csv file containing all available data. If filters are used, only filtereddata is exported.

Selecting a System and Time Frame

You can use selection menus above the filter to choose a system and time frame, starting withthe highest level menu on the far left.



3 Click Next.

4 Select a time frame from the SELECT TIME FRAME dialog box.

5 Click Next.

The report appears in the summary view.

Viewing the Lock Log Report

Use the Lock Log Report to view the lock data, such as transaction identifiers, sessionidentifiers, lock object identifiers, and global deadlocks. Lock data is displayed in the reportonly after the lock contention is resolved. Real-time lock contention data is not available.

1 In the selection menu, choose a system and a time frame.

Chapter 11 Lock Viewer


The Lock Log Report appears with the database locks that occurred within the period oftime you specified.

2 [Optional] Drag the column border in either direction to resize the column.

Summary Locks

This topic describes the information that appears in the Lock Log Report.

Column Description Type

Blocking Host Logical host ID of the transaction that imposed the lock Number

Blocking Level Lock level of the transaction that imposed the lock. Thefollowing values indicate the level:• Database Locked at the database level

• Table Locked at the table level

• RowHash Locked at the row level

• RowRange Locked for a range of rows

Alpha

Blocking Mode Lock level mode of the transaction that imposed the lock.The following values indicate the mode:• Ac Access

• Ex Exclusive

• Rd Read

• Wr Write

Alpha

Blocking Session Session number of the transaction that imposed the lock.The following session numbers are used to indicatedatabase internal sessions:• 0 System User

• 1 System Accounting

• 2 System Recovery

• 3 Archive/Restore

Number

Blocking User Username that is blocking the query of another user Alpha

Blocktime Date and time at which the block occurred, displayed asMM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS

Number

Database Database name on which the lock was requested Alpha or Number

Deadlock Indicates whether the lock contention results in a deadlock.The following values indicate the type of deadlock:• N No deadlock

• Y Local deadlock

• G Global deadlock

Alpha

Delay Total time, in seconds, the transaction waited for the block Number

Host Logical host ID of the transaction that was waiting for thelock

Number




Level Lock level of the transaction that was waiting for the lock.The following values indicate the level:• Database Locked at the database level

• Table Locked at the table level

• RowHash Locked at the row level

• RowRange Locked for a range of rows

Alpha

Mode Lock level mode of the transaction that was waiting for thelock. The following values indicate the mode:• Ac Access

• Ex Exclusive

• Rd Read

• Wr Write

Alpha

Multiple Blocker Indicates whether more than one transaction encounteredthe same lock contention. The following values indicate thestatus:• Y Two or more blocked transactions

• N One blocked transaction

Alpha

Processor ID Unique identifier of the AMP where the lock was requested Number

Session Session number of the transaction that was locked. Thefollowing session numbers are used to indicate databaseinternal sessions:• 0 System User

• 1 System Accounting

• 2 System Recovery

Number

Table Table name on which the lock was requested Alpha or Number

User Username whose query is blocked by another user Alpha or Number



Sorting allows you to change the order of rows in a table based upon criteria in a column andapplies across all pages of the table. Sort on a column by clicking the column header. Asecond click toggles the sort order. You can sort on two columns consecutively using Ctrl+Click in the column header. Primary sort order is indicated by a single arrow, andsecondary sort order is indicated by a double arrow.

The filtering, sorting, and page number settings that you choose for the default or minimizedview are not used when you switch to the maximized view.



Filter Symbols





cat?

?cat

cat?l

cat???

p???er

cats, catalog

scat, Scatter

catalog

catalog




*cat

cat*l

cat*

*ews*er

*%


catalog

cat, cats, catalog


what is 100%?



=CAT

=cat?

=Cat*

=Cat_

=Cat\?

CAT

cats

Cat, Cats, Catalog

Cat_

Cat?



*\?

=cat\*

cat\?

what is 100%?

cat*

cat?, Cat?



>60 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth



>=60 60, 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth


<60 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth







<=60 60, 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth




Clearing Filters



Option Description






Use the Columns dialog box to set thresholds and select, lock, and order columns. You canresize columns in the table. The thresholds and column selection, order, and lock settingsthat you choose are applied to the minimized and maximized views separately.




4 [Optional] Click Set, type a threshold value, and click OK.

Values exceeding the threshold are highlighted and displayed in the table.















CHAPTER 12

Metrics Analysis

Metrics AnalysisThe Metrics Analysis portlet allows you to analyze resource usage trends for one or moresystems. Trends are graphed according to metrics such as CPU, memory, and throughputwithin a specified time range. The information is refreshed every 60 seconds.

The METRICS ANALYSIS view displays a graph with time on the horizontal axis, metricvalues on the vertical axis, and a different color for each metric plot line. Plot lines show theaverage metric values as a line and have enhanced interactive features, such as performanceenvelopes and information balloons that show the actual, minimum, and maximum metricvalues. Time-range buttons allow you to monitor current usage within the last hour or viewusage trends over the last day, week, month, 3 months, or 6 months.

The PREFERENCES view allows you to select and organize metrics to display, setthresholds, and adjust the vertical axis range for each metric.

About the Metrics Analysis View

The METRICS ANALYSIS view displays a graph that represents system resource usage.One or more systems can be monitored in the time range using the same or differentmetrics. Metrics can be selected with different thresholds and vertical axis ranges.


Toolbar

Contains the time-range buttons. Select a time-range button to change the graph.Export creates a .csv file containing selected data.

Line Graph

Plots the time range on the horizontal axis and the metric values on the vertical axis.The plot line is a colored line that represents the average metric values. Click a plotline to see the highlighted plot line and performance envelope in a lighter shade ofthe assigned color. The performance envelope represents the upper and lower metricvalues.

Time Range

Shows the range of time selected with the time-range button on the toolbar. Forexample, if one hour is selected, times from the previous hour appear across thebottom of the graph.


Metrics

Lists up to 10 metrics that are defined in the PREFERENCES view. Each listposition is assigned a color and a check box. The metric name appears along withthe name of the system being monitored, if there is more than one system enabled.Select a metric name to highlight the plot line and see the performance envelope inthe graph.

About Metric Thresholds

Set thresholds to highlight metric values that are outside normal operating ranges. Setmaximum vertical-axis ranges to limit the range of values displayed for selected metrics.After a metric threshold is set in the PREFERENCES view, the threshold line is displayedacross the graph with the threshold value to the right of the graph when you select a metricplot line. As you mouse over the selected plot line, information balloons display the datapoint value and the minimum and maximum performance envelope values. The plot line andinformation balloons change to red when the threshold is exceeded during the time range.Threshold settings are optional and can be set any time after the metric has been configured.

Chapter 12 Metrics Analysis


Setting the Time Range

You can set the time range that is used to plot the graph.

1 In the toolbar, click a time-range button.





About the Toolbar

The toolbar allows you to choose the time range to display in the graph. The graph displaysthe oldest data on the left and the most recent data on the right. For each metric, data iscollected every 15 seconds and averaged according to the time range chosen.

Button Description

1 hour Displays the metric values for the last hour, plotted by minute

1 day Displays the metric values for the last 24 hours, plotted by 15-minute periods

1 week Displays the metric values for the last week, plotted by hour

1 mo Displays the metric values for the last month, plotted by 4-hour periods

3 mo Displays the metric values for the last 3 months, plotted by 12-hour periods

6 mo Displays the metric values for the last 6 months, plotted by day

Clicking a different time-range button causes the portlet to immediately recalculate andupdate the graph based on the data points collected for the metrics.




Exporting Metrics

You can export data to a .csv file for further analysis and formatting. The exported .csv filecontains data for the selected time period. The minimum, average, and maximum is exportedfor all metrics configured in the PREFERENCES view.


Option Frequency

1 hour Data points at 2 minute intervals

1 day Data points at 15 minute intervals

1 week Data points at 1 hour intervals

1 mo Data points at 4 hour intervals


6 mo Data points at a 1 day interval

2 Click .




Analysis Metrics for Teradata Database

The following metrics are available to analyze resource usage for a Teradata Database system.




Percent


Percent




Components Down Number of components, such as BYNETs or AMPs that aredown

Number


Percent


Percent





Percent








FSG Cache Miss Percentage of FSG cache misses. Calculated as the physical I/Os divided by the logical I/Os.

Number

Host Block Reads Message blocks (one or more messages sent in one physicalgroup) received from all clients

Number

Host Block Writes Message blocks sent to all hosts Number

Index Ratio Index I/Os divided by the data block I/Os Number


Max Disk By AMP Available disk space currently in use Percent

Max Spool By AMP Available spool space in use Percent

Memory Failures Memory failures across all nodes Number

Memory Resources Segments allocated to memory resources Number


Net Reads Reads from the BYNET during the sample period Number

Net Writes Messages written to the BYNET during the sample period Number


Percent


Percent


Percent



Percent


Percent




PE CPU Usage Average CPU usage of the PEs, calculated as the average usageof the parser and the dispatcher (both normalized values).Normalized by multiplying the value by the number ofphysical CPUs on the associated node of the PE.

Percent



Swap Drops Pages or segments dropped from memory during the sampleperiod due to swapping

Number

Swap Reads Pages or segments read into memory from the disk after aprior write or drop during the sample period

Number

Swap Writes Pages or segments written into swap area from memoryduring the sample period

Number



Total Disk Space Total disk space in use Percent



Vproc CPU Usage Average percent of the CPU usage of all online vprocs in theconfiguration

Percent


Analysis Metrics for Teradata Aster

The following metrics are available to analyze resource usage for a Teradata Aster system.





Number






Percent








Percent


Percent






In this view, you can:• Add metrics to monitor and display.• Delete metrics that you do not want to monitor or display.• Select the ENABLE check box to plot the metric in the graph.• Clear the ENABLE check box to remove the metric from the graph, but still list it below

the graph.• Reorder metrics to change their position and color.• Select systems to monitor and display.• Set a threshold that helps you track the performance of each metric.• Set a vertical axis range to limit the maximum value to display.

Adding Metrics

You can add metrics that are plotted in the graph.


2 [Optional] Select the ENABLE check box to enable the metric for display.

3 [Optional] Select a system from the list.The SYSTEM list is available when more than one Teradata Viewpoint server is enabledfor the Data Collection Service.

4 Select a metric from the list.You can add or remove metrics. Up to 10 metrics can be listed.

5 [Optional] Enter a THRESHOLD value.

6 [Optional] Enter a VERTICAL AXIS RANGE value.

7 [Optional] Click and drag the row to reorder the metrics for display.


9 Click OK.



Changing the Metrics Display Order

You can change the order of the metrics that are listed below the graph. Reordering themetric list affects which color is assigned to the metric.




4 On the metric row, click and drag the row to its new location.


6 Click OK.

Enabling and Disabling Metrics

You can enable and disable metrics from the graph. When a metric is disabled, the metricplot line is not displayed in the graph; however, data points are still being collected, so themetric is included in the list under the graph and can be reactivated at a later time.



3 Do one of the following:• Clear ENABLE on the metric line to disable the metric.• Select ENABLE on the metric line to enable the metric.


5 Click OK.

Deleting Metrics

You can delete metrics from the graph. When a metric is deleted in the PREFERENCESview, the metric plot line is not displayed in the graph, and the metric is not included in thelist.


2 Select the Metrics tab.


4 Click on the metric row of the metric you want to delete.

The metric row disappears.




6 Click OK.





CHAPTER 13

Metrics Graph

Metrics GraphThe Metrics Graph portlet allows you to analyze resource usage trends on a system within aspecified time range to help identify daily or weekly periods when a system is either over-utilized or under-utilized. You can use this information to determine when to scheduleresource-intensive jobs with minimal impact to other users.

The METRICS GRAPH view displays a graph with time on the horizontal axis and metricvalues on the vertical axis. The metric and system are selected using selection menus. Time-range buttons on the toolbar allow you to select 1-month or 3-month periods. The daterange displayed can be adjusted dynamically using the date-range slider. The vertical scalefor the metric values can be expanded or compressed by dragging the number up or down.Each point on the graph represents the value collected for the selected metric during thepreceding 1-hour period.

About the Metrics Graph View

The METRICS GRAPH view displays a graph of variations and trends in system resourceusage. The graph plots the time range on the horizontal axis and the metric values on thevertical axis. Customize the view using the menus, toolbar, and date-range slider to selectmetrics and date ranges.


Selection Menus

Shows the selections that define the metric currently being displayed. You canchange the metric by changing the selections.

Toolbar

Contains the time-range buttons. Select a time-range button to change the graph.The time-range start and end dates are displayed on the toolbar next to the time-range buttons. Export creates a .csv file containing selected data.

Date-Range Slider

Controls the amount of historical data displayed in the view and adjusts to displayfrom 2 days to approximately 4 months of historical data. Dates outside the date-range slider timeline are shaded lighter. The darker-shaded area between the sliderhandles represents the current date range being displayed.


Line Graph

Shows the numerical value of metric on the vertical axis. Mouse over a number anddrag it up or down to expand or compress the vertical scale.

Plot Line

Displays metric data values in the graph. Mouse over a plot line to see aninformation balloon containing the date and time the value was collected and themetric value.

Trend-Reporting Metrics for Teradata Database

Database Metrics


Current Perm Sum of the current amount of permanent space (disk space)used across all vprocs

Number

Current Perm Max Maximum permanent space used on a single vproc Number

Current Perm Min Minimum permanent space used on a single vproc Number

Current Spool Sum of the current amount of spool space (disk space) usedacross all vprocs

Number

Current Spool Max Maximum spool space used on a single vproc Number

Current Spool Min Minimum spool space used on a single vproc Number

Chapter 13 Metrics Graph



Current Temp Sum of the current amount of temporary space (disk space)used across all vprocs

Number

Current Temp Max Maximum temporary space used on a single vproc Number

Current Temp Min Minimum temporary space used on a single vproc Number

Peak Perm Sum of the largest amount of permanent space used across allvprocs since the last reset of the peak perm value

Number

Peak Perm Max Maximum of the largest amount of permanent space used ona single vproc since the last reset

Number

Peak Perm Min Minimum of the largest amount of permanent space used on asingle vproc since the last reset

Number

Peak Spool Sum of the largest amount of spool used across all vprocssince the last reset of the peak perm value

Number

Peak Spool Max Maximum of the largest amount of spool used on a singlevproc since the last reset

Number

Peak Spool Min Minimum of the largest amount of spool used on a singlevproc since the last reset

Number

Peak Temp Sum of the largest amount of temporary space used across allvprocs since the last reset of the peak perm value

Number

Peak Temp Max Maximum of the largest amount of temporary space used on asingle vproc since the last reset

Number

Peak Temp Min Minimum of the largest amount of temporary space used on asingle vproc since the last reset

Number

Perm Limit Maximum space available for permanent space storage of allindex tables, data tables, subtables, stored procedures, triggers,and permanent journals

Number

Spool Limit Maximum space available for storage of spool database objects Number

Temp Limit Maximum space available for storage of temporary databaseobjects

Number

Performance Metrics


Blocking Duration Total time the heartbeat query is blocked Number

Concurrency Average number of active tasks running on TeradataDatabase while the heartbeat query is running

Number

Response Time Average response time of the selected canary query Number

Retrieve Time Average time to retrieve all results Number


Number

Total Time Combined response time and retrieve time Number



Query Metrics


Abort Total Number of aborted queries Number

Active AMPs Avg Average number of active AMPs Number

Active AMPs Max Maximum number of active AMPs Number

Active AMPs Min Minimum number of active AMPs Number

Active AMPs Stddev Standard deviation of active AMPs Number

AMP CPU Skew Avg Average percent of AMP CPU skew Percent

AMP CPU Skew Max Maximum percent of AMP CPU skew Percent

AMP CPU Skew Min Minimum percent of AMP CPU skew Percent

AMP CPU Skew Stddev Standard deviation percent of AMP CPU skew Percent

AMP I/O Skew Avg Average percent AMP I/O skew Percent

AMP I/O Skew Max Maximum percent AMP I/O skew Percent

AMP I/O Skew Min Minimum percent AMP I/O skew Percent

AMP I/O Skew Stddev Standard deviation of AMP I/O skew Percent

Cache Total Number of queries found in step cache Number


Number

Delay Time Avg Average query delay time Number

Delay Time Max Maximum query delay time Number

Delay Time Min Minimum query delay time Number

Delay Time Stddev Standard deviation of query delay time Number


Average time it takes to receive the first response Number


Maximum time it takes to receive the first response Number


Minimum time it takes to receive the first response Number


Standard deviation of time it takes to receive the first response Number

Max Steps inParallelism Avg

Average number of level-2 query steps executed in parallel Number

Max Steps inParallelism Max

Maximum number of level-2 query steps executed in parallel Number

Max Steps inParallelism Min

Minimum number of level-2 query steps executed in parallel Number




Max Steps inParallelism Stddev

Standard deviation of number of level-2 query steps executedin parallel

Number

Number of Steps Avg Average number of query steps Number

Number of Steps Max Maximum number of query steps Number

Number of Steps Min Minimum number of query steps Number

Number of StepsStddev

Standard deviation of number of query steps Number


Number

Query Seconds Avg Average query run time Number

Query Seconds Max Maximum query run time Number

Query Seconds Min Minimum query run time Number

Query Seconds Stddev Standard deviation of query run time Number

Result Rows Avg Average number of result rows for the query Number

Result Rows Max Maximum number of result rows for the query Number

Result Rows Min Minimum number of result rows for the query Number

Result Rows Stddev Standard deviation of number of result rows for the query Number

Spool Usage Avg Average amount of spool the query used Number

Spool Usage Max Maximum amount of spool the query used Number

Spool Usage Min Minimum amount of spool the query used Number

Spool Usage Stddev Standard deviation of amount of spool the query used Number

Steps with ParallelismAvg

Average number of query steps with parallel steps Number

Steps with ParallelismMax

Maximum number of query steps with parallel steps Number

Steps with ParallelismMin

Minimum number of query steps with parallel steps Number

Steps with ParallelismStddev

Standard deviation of number of query steps with parallelsteps

Number

Total CPU Time Avg Average CPU time. CPU time is calculated as the total AMPCPU time plus the total parser and dispatcher CPU time forthe query.

Number

Total CPU Time Max Maximum CPU time. CPU time is calculated as the total AMPCPU time plus the total parser and dispatcher CPU time forthe query.

Number

Total CPU Time Min Minimum CPU time. CPU time is calculated as the total AMPCPU time plus the total parser and dispatcher CPU time forthe query.

Number




Total CPU Time Stddev Standard deviation of CPU time. CPU time is calculated as thetotal AMP CPU time plus the total parser and dispatcher CPUtime for the query.

Number

Total I/O Count Avg Average I/O count for the query Number

Total I/O Count Max Maximum I/O count for the query Number

Total I/O Count Min Minimum I/O count for the query Number

Total I/O Count Stddev Standard deviation of I/O count for the query Number

Warning Total Total number of queries with warnings Number

System Metrics




Percent


Percent




Components Down Number of components, such as BYNETs or AMPs, that aredown

Number


Percent


Percent


Percent








FSG Cache Miss Percentage of FSG cache misses. Calculated as physical I/Osdivided by logical I/Os.

Number




Host Block Reads Total message blocks (one or more messages sent in onephysical group) received from all clients

Number

Host Block Writes Total message blocks sent to all hosts Number

Index Ratio The percentage of index hits. Calculated as the index I/Osdivided by the data block I/Os.

Number


Max Disk Space ByAMP

Available disk space currently in use Percent

Max Spool Space ByAMP

Available spool space in use Percent

Memory Failures Total memory failures across all nodes Number

Memory Resources Total segments allocated to memory resources Number


Net Reads Total reads from the BYNET during the sample period Number

Net Writes Total messages written to the BYNET during the sampleperiod

Number


Percent


Percent


Percent



Percent


Percent

PE CPU Usage Average CPU usage of the PEs. Calculated as the averageusage of the parser and the dispatcher (both normalizedvalues). Normalized by multiplying the value by the numberof physical CPUs on the associated node of the PE.

Percent



Swap Drops Total pages or segments dropped from memory during thesample period due to swapping

Number

Swap Reads Total pages or segments read into memory from the disk aftera prior write or drop during the sample period

Number




Swap Writes Total pages or segments written into swap area from memoryduring the sample period

Number



Total Disk Space Total disk space currently in use Percent



Vproc CPU Usage Average percent of the CPU usage of all online vprocs in theconfiguration. Normalized by multiplying the value returnedfrom Teradata Database by the number of physical CPUs inthe associated vproc.

Percent


Table Metrics


Index Count Total number of indexes Number

Table Size Table size in bytes, including index, fallback, and journalsubtables

Number

Trend-Reporting Metrics for Teradata Aster

System Metrics





Number






Percent





Percent





Percent




About the Metrics Graph Menus and Toolbar

The menus and toolbar allow you to specify the display attributes of the METRICS GRAPHview.

Use the selection menus to define a metric to monitor by selecting a:• System• Category• Metric• Source or Variant

The first time you add the portlet to the page, the first available metric that you havepermission to view is displayed. However, if you only have permission to view Tablemetrics, no data appears in the portlet until you select a metric using the selection menus.

The 1 mo and 3 mo buttons allow you to adjust the time range displayed. As you adjust thetime range, the toolbar refreshes automatically to display the new time range in the toolbar.


Selecting Metrics and Systems to Monitor

You can use selection menus to choose a metric and system to monitor in the portlet,starting with the highest level menu on the far left. Menus choices are available based on theprevious menu, so not all menus apply to all metrics.

You are not required to make a selection from every menu each time you modify a metricselection.



3 Click Next.



4 Select a category from the menu.

5 Click Next.


7 Click Next.

8 [Optional] Select a source or variant from the menu.The menu for source or variant (sum, average, minimum, maximum, standard deviationof that metric) is only available for certain metric categories.

9 Click Next.


Use the toolbar to set the range of dates to display for the selected metric and system.

1 Mouse over the date-range slider to activate the start-date and end-date handles.

2 Drag the start-date handle until the intended start date is displayed in the toolbar.

3 Drag the end-date handle until the intended end date is displayed in the toolbar.

4 [Optional] Drag the date-range slider left or right to move the start-date and end-datehandles in unison.


One month of historical data is displayed ending at the current end date.


Three months of historical data is displayed ending at the current end date.

Exporting Metrics

You can export data to a .csv file for further analysis and formatting. The exported .csv filecontains up to the last 8 months of data, regardless of the selected date range. One variant(Avg, Max, or Min) is exported for the selected metric.

1 In the selection menu, select a system, category, metric, and variant.

2 Click .






CHAPTER 14

My Queries

My QueriesThe My Queries portlet allows you to view and manage your queries across multipleTeradata Database systems. You can see if queries are queued or blocked, and you can seetheir impact on system resources.

Use the My Queries portlet to view information about queries in either the summary viewor the details view. The summary view contains a table with one row allocated to each of thesessions logged on under one or more user names. Select a row in the summary view to seeadditional session and query information in the details view. Use the SQL, Explain, BlockedBy, or Query Band tab in the details view to display information for the selected session.

The PREFERENCES view allows you to select one or more Teradata Database systems, andthen select one or more users per system to monitor. From this view, you can also select aformat for the SQL that appears in the query details view.

About the My Queries View

After you add an account in the Profile portlet for each Teradata Database system you wantto monitor, the MY QUERIES view displays queries running on the selected systems underyour logon.

Filters

Displays data by showing only rows that match your filter criteria. Sort on thecolumn headers to group data in ascending or descending order.

Sessions

The MY QUERIES view displays information about each session in a table, withcolumns configured specifically for the current view. These statistics are sampledand the table is refreshed every 30 seconds. Highlighted values in any row indicatethat a session has exceeded threshold criteria for a specific metric. Click anywhere ina row to see session details.

Table Actions







Filter Symbols




This wildcard character can be used in conjunction with anyother symbol.

cat?

?cat

cat?l

cat???

p???er

cats, catalog

scat, Scatter

catalog

catalog


Chapter 14 My Queries





*cat

cat*l

cat*

*ews*er

*%


catalog

cat, cats, catalog


what is 100%?



=CAT

=cat?

=Cat*

=Cat_

=Cat\?

CAT

cats

Cat, Cats, Catalog

Cat_

Cat?



*\?

=cat\*

cat\?

what is 100%?

cat*

cat?, Cat?



>60 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth



>=60 60, 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth



<60 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth



<=60 60, 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth

! Use this symbol at the beginning of your search to matchalpha or numeric characters that do not contain the alpha ornumeric characters.





Clearing Filters



Option Description






















Session View Metrics

Metrics appearing in the summary view can be selected in the Columns dialog box. Metricsavailable for monitoring and display are listed below.


Account Account from which a query was submitted String

Blocked Time How long the query has been blocked Number

CPU Skew CPU skew during the last sample Percent

CPU Use Percent of the total amount of available CPU used by thequery

Percent

Δ CPU Total CPU usage time consumed, in seconds, since the lastsample

Number

Δ I/O I/O count since the last sample Number

Duration How long the query has been running Number

Host Host ID or LAN ID associated with the PE that processed thelogon request for the session

Number

Impact CPU CPU time in seconds of the highest CPU utilized AMP duringthe collection interval times the total number of AMPsparticipating for this session during the last session collectioninterval

Number

In State How long the query has been in the current state Number

I/O Skew I/O skew during the last sample Percent

Partition Partition in which the query is running String

PJI Ratio of the CPU milliseconds per I/O for the query, where alarger Product Join Index number indicates systemperformance degradation

Number

Query Band Set of name-value pairs for the session or transaction String

Req CPU Number of CPU seconds needed to run the query Number

Req I/O Number of disk I/Os performed to run the query Number

Session ID Unique session identifier Number

Spool Amount of spool space the query requires Number

Start Time that the query started running on Teradata Database Number

State Text describing the current state of the query String

State Icon Icon representing the current state of the query Icon

System Full name of the system running the query String

Temp Space Amount of temp space used by the query Number




Unnecessary I/O All AMP I/O divided by all AMP CPU, displayed inmilliseconds, to reveal large amounts of I/O occurring over ashort period of time

Number

Username Name of the user who submitted the query String

Workload Workload in which the query is running String

State Icons

The following icons appear in the portlet:


Aborting Query has been aborted, and changes are being rolledback.

Active Query is running.

Blocked Query is waiting for a lock held by another query.

Delayed Query is in a delay queue waiting to run.

Idle No query is running.

Other Query is in an unknown state.

Parsing Query is being parsed before running.

QTDelayed Query is waiting for rows to be inserted into a queuetable.

Response Query is returning results to the user.

SESDelayed Query is delayed because a utility limit has beenexceeded in FastLoad, MultiLoad, FastExport, orARC.


The details view displays statistics and information about the selected session. This view canbe accessed by clicking a session row in the summary view.

Tabs

Provides important query details on the Overview, SQL, Explain, Query Band,Blocked By, Skew, and Delay tabs.

Query Details

Displays details of the selected query in sections that are specific to each tab.

Manage Queries

Manages the query or session for Teradata Database systems with Abort, ChangePriority, Change Workload, and Release Query options.



Previous/Next

Allows you to move through sessions without returning to the summary table.


The Overview tab provides detailed information about key metrics for the selected sessionand its queries. The metric values provide a view of the query status on the system. Metricsthat exceed defined thresholds are highlighted.


State Query state, such as active, blocked, terminate

Time in State How long the query has been in the current state, displayed ashh:mm:ss

Total Duration How long the query has run, displayed as hh:mm:ss

Spool Space Amount of spool space the query is using

Temp Space Amount of temp space the query is using

PJI Ratio of the CPU milliseconds per I/O for the query, where alarger Product Join Index number indicates system performancedegradation

Unnecessary I/O All AMP I/O divided by all AMP CPU, displayed in milliseconds,to reveal large amounts of I/O occurring over a short period oftime




CPU Use Percent of the total amount of available CPU used by the query

CPU Total CPU usage time, in seconds, consumed by the query

CPU Skew CPU skew during the last sample

Impact CPU CPU time in seconds of the highest CPU utilized AMP during thecollection interval times the total number of AMPs participatingfor this session during the last session collection interval

I/O Number of I/O operations the query performed

I/O Skew I/O skew during the last sample


Name Name of the workload where the query is actively running

Method Name of the workload management method in SLES 11. Availablevalues are:• Tactical• SLG Tier (not used by TIWM systems)• Timeshare

CPU Decay Most severe level of CPU resource access restriction for queries ina Timeshare workload in SLES 11

CPU Exception Nodes Number of nodes that exceeded the tactical CPU time exceptioncriteria for the session in a Tactical workload in SLES 11

Classification Mode How a query or session is assigned to a workload. Available valuesare:• Auto - Query is assigned automatically by TASM• Request - Query is assigned manually to a workload using

Change Workload• Session - Queries initiated in that session are assigned

manually to a workload using Change Workload

This field is empty if this is not a DBC/SQL session or if TeradataWorkload Management Category 3 is disabled.

VPart Name of the virtual partition in SLES 11

I/O Decay Most severe level of I/O resource access restriction for queries in aTimeshare workload in SLES 11

I/O Exception Nodes Number of nodes that exceeded the tactical I/O usage exceptioncriteria for the session in a Tactical workload in SLES 11


User Name of the user that submitted the query

Account Account of the user that submitted the query

Source Source details, such as application name, IP address, and host username




Partition Partition in which the query is running

Requests Number of queries submitted by the session

About the SQL Tab

The SQL tab displays the SQL for the selected query. This information is read-only. Click to export the SQL as a .txt file. The tab is only available when a query is active, blocked, ordelayed.

For Teradata Database systems, the tab is only available when a query meets certainthresholds established by the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator.


The Explain tab displays an abbreviated version of the Step statistics and Explain text thatresult from an Explain request in an SQL session. Each Explain step is uniquely identifiedwith a number, where the background of the number box indicates status. This informationis read-only. The tab is only available when a query meets certain thresholds established bythe Teradata Viewpoint Administrator. Click to export the Explain data as a .csv file.


Step Number • Completed steps are at the top of the list and indicated by ablack number box.

• Active steps are indicated by a pulsating number box (flashesgray and white).

• Steps to run are at the bottom of the list and indicated by awhite number box.

Confidence Level Indicator Icon- No confidence in the estimate

- Low confidence in the estimate

- High confidence in the estimate

- High confidence in the estimate due to a join index

Est. Time Estimated execution time for the step

Est. Rows Estimated number of rows for the step

Actual Time Actual CPU time consumed by the step, or blank if the step hasnot run

Actual Rows Actual number of rows for the step, or blank if the step has notrun

About the Blocked By Tab

The Blocked By tab displays details about other queries that are blocking the selected query.This information is read-only. The tab is only available when the selected query is blocked.



Blocked By Information Description

Username Name of the user that is running the query that holds the lock


Session ID Session ID of the blocking query

Lock Type Type of lock. Type can be Exclusive, Read, Write, or Access.

Status Lock status. Status can be Waiting or Granted.

Locked Name of the locked object

About the Query Band Tab

The Query Band tab displays the session and transaction query bands for the selected query.This information is read-only. The tab is only available when a query band is included in thequery.

Query Band Information Description

Name Name of the query band for the session or transaction

Value Value of the query band for the session or transaction

About the Delay Tab

The Delay tab displays details about all rules that are delaying a query. A scroll bar appears ifthere are more than two rules. This information is read-only. The tab is only available if theselected query is delayed and monitored on a Teradata Database 13.10 system or later.

Statistics Information Description

Blocking Count Number of consecutive times this session has blocked at least oneother session

Utility Throttle Delay Time Amount of time request has been delayed by a utility throttle rule

System Throttle Delay Time Amount of time request has been delayed by a system throttle rule

Workload Throttle Delay Time Amount of time request has been delayed by a workload throttlerule

Rule Information Description

Rule Name Name of rule causing request delay

Rule Type TASM type of rule causing request delay

Overridable Indicates if the Teradata Database Administrator can abort orrelease the request

About the Skew Tab

The Skew tab displays details about the level of skew in the query or session. The Skew tabdoes not display when the Delay tab is present.



Skew Information Description

Highest AMP with the highest CPU utilization or I/O count

2nd Highest AMP with the second highest CPU utilization or I/O count

3rd Highest AMP with the third highest CPU utilization or I/O count

Average AMP with the lowest CPU utilization or I/O count

3rd Lowest AMP with the second lowest CPU utilization or I/O count

2nd Lowest AMP with the third lowest CPU utilization or I/O count

Lowest Average CPU utilization or I/O count across all AMPS

Session Skew Difference between the highest and the average values

Participating AMPs Total number of AMPs participating for this session during thelast session collection interval

About Managing Queries and Sessions

You can manage queries and sessions to improve workload performance for TeradataDatabase systems.

Abort

Abort the selected query or session

Change Priority

Change the priority of the selected query or session

Change Workload

Change the workload of the selected query or session

Release Query

Release the selected query from a delay queue

You must log on with a user ID that has permissions to abort, change priorities orworkloads, or release queries. If you log out, close a portlet, or open a new portlet instance,you must log on again.

Note: Change Workload is available only if Teradata Active System Management (TASM)is enabled. If TASM is disabled, Change Priority is available. If you do not see ChangeWorkload or Change Priority in the menu, the system you are monitoring does notsupport these features or you do not have permission to use them. If the query you aremonitoring is delayed, only Release Query is available.

Aborting a Query or a Session

For Teradata Database systems, you can abort a query or session that is blocking otherqueries or consuming too many resources.

1 Click the row of the query you want to abort.

2 Click .



3 Select Abort.

4 Log on to Teradata Database, if prompted.

5 Click Next.

6 Select one of the following:• Abort Query to abort the selected query.• Abort Session to abort the selected query and log off the session.

7 Click Next.

8 Click Next to confirm your selection.

Changing the Priority of a Query or Session

For Teradata Database systems, you can change the priority of a query or session to allowhigher priority queries to run or balance session resources.

This menu item is only available when workloads are not enabled and the system beingmonitored supports this feature.1 Click the row of the query you want to change.

2 Click .

3 Select Change Priority.


5 Click Next.

6 From the list of accounts that have been assigned to the user, select an account to copythe account name to the Edit new account string box.

7 [Optional] Edit the account string or enter a new account string.

8 Click Next.

9 Select one of the following:• Move just this query to change the priority of the selected query.• Move this query and all future queries associated with this session to change the

priority of the selected query and all subsequent queries in the current session.

10 Click Next.


Changing the Workload of a Query or Session

For Teradata Database systems, you can change the workload of a query or session to allowhigher priority workloads to run or to balance workload resources.

This menu item is only available when workloads are enabled and the system beingmonitored supports this feature.1 Click the row of the query you want to change.

2 Click .

3 Select Change Workload.




5 Click Next.

6 Select a different workload from the list and click Next.

7 Select one of the following:• Move just this query to change the selected query.• Move this query and all future queries associated with this session to change the


8 Click Next.


10 Click OK.

Releasing a Query

For Teradata Database systems, you can release a query from the delay queue for immediateprocessing.1 Click the row of the query you want to change.

2 Click .

3 Select Release Query.


5 Click Next.


Changing Multiple Sessions

You can change system resources for multiple sessions, users, or account strings in thefollowing locations:• All sessions table from the summary view• User sessions table from the details view• Account strings table from the details view1 Click a session from the summary view.

2 [Optional] Access user or account string tables from the details view.

a Click a session.

b Click the USER or ACCOUNT link under SESSION INFO.

3 Select a session action from the Table Actions menu.

Check boxes appear next to the sessions.

4 Do one of the following:• Select the check box in the column heading to select all sessions.• Select the check boxes for specific sessions.

5 Select Next.




7 Follow the instructions on subsequent screens.


The PREFERENCES view allows you to select systems and users to monitor and to select aformat for the SQL that appears in the query details view.


Systems

Select the Teradata Database systems and login user names to monitor.

Display

Choose formatted or unformatted SQL to display on the SQL tab of the query detailsview.

Selecting Systems and Users to Monitor

Use the Systems tab in the PREFERENCES view to select Teradata Database systems andlogin user names to monitor.

Define user names for each system using the Profile portlet. Only predefined user namesappear on the Systems tab.


2 Click the Systems tab.

3 Click to expand system names and show available user names.


5 For each Teradata Database system and user name you want to monitor:

a Select the systems on which you want to monitor queries.

b Select the user names for each system that you want to monitor.




7 Click OK.

Selecting Display Options

The Display tab in the PREFERENCES view allows you to format the SQL that appears onthe SQL tab of the query details view.


2 Click the Display tab.


4 Do one of the following for Teradata Database systems:• Select the Format SQL check box to use formatted SQL.• Clear the Format SQL check box to use unformatted SQL.


6 Click OK.





CHAPTER 15

Node Resources

Node ResourcesThe Node Resources portlet allows you to monitor physical and virtual resources to locateover or under-utilized resources and isolate performance or system issues. You choosewhich system and resources to monitor on your Teradata Database system.

The Node Resources portlet provides metrics about:• Percentage of CPU used by nodes or vprocs• How system resource usage is spread across the vprocs• How much physical disk I/O, BYNET traffic, or host reads and writes are occurring• Whether congestion or excessive swapping is an issue on a single or group of nodes or

vprocs

These metrics allow you to analyze data and detect issues, such as poor node or vprocparallel efficiency, or higher than expected disk read/write ratio or swap I/O rate.

The Node Resources portlet provides controls that let you choose what information isdisplayed. The information is refreshed every 60 seconds.

The PREFERENCES view allows you to choose which metrics appear in the portlet views.

About the Summary Views

The summary views provide a status of the resources on your Teradata Database system soyou can monitor and locate issues. The NODES summary view displays the status of nodes,grouped by clique. The VPROCS summary view displays the status of vprocs in a node.

The following list describes the features in these views:

Selection Menus

Shows the system and resources currently being displayed. Choose a system,including multi-generational systems, and type of node.

Toolbar

Contains a count of the total resources on the selected system, the number ofresources outside the threshold, and the number of down resources that are out ofservice or offline.


Preview Sliders

Displays resources that are outside the threshold or down. You can customize themetrics displayed from the PREFERENCES view.

Resource Totals

Displays the total number of nodes or vprocs that are outside the threshold.

Clique ID

Displays the status of nodes, grouped by clique, when you select any of the Nodesviews from the selection menus.

Node ID

Displays the status of vprocs in a node when you select any of the Vprocs viewsfrom the selection menus. You can click a node ID to view the details view for thatnode.

Preview Squares

Displays node or vproc status by color-coded squares, depending on the resourceyou chose from the selection menus.

Following is an example of the NODES summary view that you see when you select AllNodes > Nodes > ALL from the selection menu.

Following is an example of the VPROCS summary view that you see when you select AllNodes > Vprocs > ALL from the selection menu.

Chapter 15 Node Resources



You can use selection menus to choose a system and type of resource to monitor in theportlet, starting with the highest level menu on the far left. Menu choices are based on theprevious menu.



3 Click Next.

4 Select a type of resource from the menu.

5 Click Next.

6 Select Nodes or Vprocs from the menu.

7 Click Next.

8 Do one of the following:• Select Nodes, and then select ALL, With AMPs, or Without AMPs from the menu.• Select Vprocs, and then select ALL, AMPs, or PEs from the menu.

9 [Optional] Click Next.

Selection Menu Choices

The Node Resources portlet displays data for a single Teradata Database system. Theselection menu allows you to choose the type of data that appears in the summary views,



preview squares, and details views. Depending on your system, you may have access tomulti-generational systems.

Selection Menu Choices Description

Nodes > ALL Node data on all nodes, grouped by clique

Nodes > With AMPs Node data on all nodes with AMPs, grouped by clique

Nodes > Without AMPs Node data on all nodes without AMPs, grouped by clique

Vprocs > ALL Vproc data on all AMPs and vprocs, grouped by node

Vprocs > AMP Vproc data only on AMPs, grouped by node

Vprocs > PE Vproc data only on PEs, grouped by node

5500H, 5350, 4980, and soforth

Multi-generational system data

For example, by selecting 5500H, you can view and compare data for5500H nodes within a system. Typically, you would not compare metricson older hardware with metrics on newer hardware.

About the Toolbar

The toolbar allows you to filter the display attributes in the table view by using the resourcecount status buttons. The toolbar displays a summary count of:• The total resources on the selected system• The > threshold resources that are outside the threshold• The number of down resources that are out of service or offlineAfter you click a button, the table view appears with statistics and information about theselected resources to help you isolate issues.

About the Preview Sliders

Preview sliders display metrics of resources that are outside the threshold or down and helpyou determine if there is skew across the nodes or vprocs. The metrics and thresholds thatappear in the preview sliders are set in the PREFERENCES view.

As you move a slider:• A box to the right of each slider displays the total number of nodes or vprocs that are

outside the threshold.• A box above the slider displays a percentage + or - from the average. The left side of the

slider represents the average. As you move the slider to the right, the metric is furtheraway from the average.

• Preview squares reflect the resources that are outside the threshold.

You can click a node ID to see the details view for that node.



A single vproc might be counted for each resource total, however, that vproc is only countedonce in the > threshold status button.

About the Preview Squares

Preview squares are color-coded squares that help you determine status for a particularresource. Preview squares display data in the summary views and details views according tothe resources selected from the selection menu.

Mouse over a preview square to display an information balloon containing the metrics forthe resource selected. The information in the balloon corresponds to the metrics in the 3preview sliders. Click a preview square to see the details view for that resource.

The types of preview squares are listed below.

Preview Square Status Description

Gray Normal No threshold is set or no metric is outside of thethreshold.

Orange Warning At least one metric for a resource is outside thethreshold.

Black Down Set automatically when the node goes down or when theTeradata Database Administrator takes the resource outof service or offline.

Summary View Metrics

Select metrics to appear in the summary view for nodes, vprocs, AMPs, and PEs using theColumns dialog box. Some metrics are only available in certain views.

N

Nodes > ALL, Nodes > With AMPs, Nodes > Without AMPs



V

Vprocs > ALL

A

Vprocs > AMP

P

Vprocs > PE

Metric Description Type View

CIC Usage Percent of Channel Interface Controller usage for thisresource

Percent N

CPU Usage Percent of CPU usage that is spent being active (notidle)

Percent N, V, A, P

Disk I/O Number of disk I/Os for this resource Number N, V, A

Disk Out ReqAvg

Average number of outstanding disk requests for thisresource

Number N, V, A

Disk Reads Total number of physical disk reads for this resourceduring the sample interval

Number N, V, A

Disk Usage Percentage of disk usage for this resource Percent N

Disk Writes Total number of physical disk writes for this resourceduring the sample interval

Number N, V, A

Host BlockReads

Number of message blocks received from all hosts.

A message block may consist of multiple messages.

Number N, V, P

Host BlockWrites

Number of message blocks sent to all hosts.

A message block may consist of multiple messages.

Number N, V, P

Host I/O Number of host I/Os for this resource Number N, V, P

Mem Agings Memory agings and collections done on old segments Number N

Mem AllocateKB

Kilobytes allocated to memory resources Number N, V, A, P

Mem Allocates Segments allocated to memory resources Number N, V, A, P

Mem Failures Memory segment allocation attempts that failed Number N


Percent N

Net Reads Messages read from the BYNET and input into theresource during the sample interval

Number N, V, A, P

Net Writes Messages written from the resource and output to theBYNET during the sample interval

Number N, V, A, P

NV Mem Agings Backup storage disk segments flushed from nonvolatilememory (on Teradata Database V2R6.x)

Number N



Metric Description Type View

NV MemAllocate Segs

Complete and partial nonvolatile memory allocationsof disk segments read (written) for backup storage (onTeradata Database V2R6.x)

Number N, V, A

NV MemAllocate

Kilobytes of nonvolatile memory allocated for AMPbackup storage (on Teradata Database V2R6.x)

Number N

Percent AMPWorker Task

CPU resources spent in AMP Worker Task (AWT)processing

Percent V, A

Percent Kernel Time spent in UNIX PDE Kernel waiting for I/Os tocomplete

Percent N

Percent Service CPU resources spent in UNIX PDE user serviceprocessing

Percent N, V, A, P

PercentDispatcher

Percent of CPU resources spent in PE Dispatcherprocessing

Percent V, P

Percent User CPU resources spent in non-service user codeprocessing

Percent N

Parser Usage Percent of CPU resources spent in PE Parserprocessing

Percent V, A, P

Swaps Total number of swap reads and swap writes Number N

Swap Drops Pages and segments dropped from resource memoryduring the sample period due to swapping

Number N

Swap Reads Segments read into resource memory from the diskduring the sample interval due to swapping

Number N

Swap Writes Segments written to disk from resource memoryduring the sample interval due to swapping

Number N

About the Table View

The table view displays statistics and information about the resources at one time, helpingyou to isolate performance or system issues. This view is useful for comparing multiplevprocs. The table view can be accessed from the summary views by clicking a resource countstatus button in the toolbar or clicking any metric name in the preview slider.

Select and organize the displayed columns by clicking .

Click a row to access the details view for a particular node or vproc, depending on theresource you chose from the selection menus.







Filter Symbols





cat?

?cat

cat?l

cat???

p???er

cats, catalog

scat, Scatter

catalog

catalog




*cat

cat*l

cat*

*ews*er

*%


catalog

cat, cats, catalog


what is 100%?



=CAT

=cat?

=Cat*

=Cat_

=Cat\?

CAT

cats

Cat, Cats, Catalog

Cat_

Cat?



*\?

=cat\*

cat\?

what is 100%?

cat*

cat?, Cat?



>60 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth






>=60 60, 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth



<60 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth



<=60 60, 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth




Clearing Filters



Option Description






Use the Columns dialog box to set thresholds and select, lock, and order columns. You canresize columns in the table.



3 [Optional] Click next to the column name.



The columns at the top of the list can be locked in the table to remain on the left whenscrolling horizontally.


Qualifying data is highlighted in the table.



7 [Optional] In the table, drag the column heading border in either direction to resizethe column.The thresholds and column selection, order, and lock settings that you choose are appliedto the minimized and maximized views separately.







The details view displays statistics and information about a particular node or vproc to helpyou isolate performance or system issues. This view can be accessed by clicking on a previewsquare in the summary view or a row in the table view.

Preview squares at the bottom of the view help you determine the status for a particularvproc within the node. Mouse over a square to display an information balloon containingmetrics for that vproc. Mouse over other preview squares to compare the metric values withother vprocs. When viewing a vproc, the parent node number is shown in the informationballoon. Click a preview square to directly access the details view for another vproc. Click thenode ID to view the details view for that node.



Details View Metrics

The metrics that may appear in the details view are listed below.

If the processing is skewed towards one or more AMPs (that is, the parallelism is not 100%),the metrics may display a value greater than 100%. This is due to the way the data isnormalized.

Some metrics are only available in certain views.

N

Nodes > ALL, Nodes > With AMPs, Nodes > Without AMPs

V

Vprocs > ALL, Vprocs > AMP, Vprocs > PE

Metric/Name Description Type View

Status Status of the node or vproc, where U means theresource is up, D means the resource is down, and Smeans the resource is in stand-by state

Character N, V

Clique # Location of the clique in the rack. When there is oneclique, a dash displays.

Number N

Node # Unique identifier for each node (cabinet ID and nodeID)

Number V

Node Type Type of node Various N

Type Type of vproc Character V




AMP Count Number of AMPs currently executing session requestson this node

Number N

PE Count Number of PEs currently active on this node Number N

Host ID/Cluster Host Id is the logical host identifier associated with aPE or session. Cluster is the cluster number associatedwith an AMP.

Number V

Session LogCount

Sessions currently logged on to this PE Number V

Session RunCount

Sessions sending TSR messages to this vproc Number V

CPU Usage Percent of CPU usage that is not spent being active(not idle)

Percent N, V

Percent Kernel Time spent in UNIX PDE Kernel waiting for I/Os tocomplete

Percent N

% Service Percent of CPU resources spent in UNIX-PDE userservice processing

Percent N, V

% User CPU resources spent in non-service user codeprocessing

Percent N

Percent AMPWorker Task

CPU Resources spent in AMP Worker Task (AWT)processing

Percent V

Parser Usage Percent of CPU resources spent in PE Parserprocessing

Percent V

PercentDispatcher

Percent of CPU resources spent in PE Dispatcherprocessing

Percent V


Percent N

Disk Usage Percent of disk usage for this resource Percent N, V

CIC Usage Percent of Channel Interface Controller usage for thisresource

Percent N, V

Disk Reads Total physical disk reads for this resource during thesample interval

Number N, V

Disk Writes Total physical disk writes for this resource during thesample interval

Number N, V

Disk I/O Number of disk I/Os Number N, V

Disk Out ReqAvg

Average number of outstanding disk requests for thisresource

Number N, V

Host BlockReads

Message blocks received from all hosts. A messageblock may consist of multiple messages.

Number N, V

Host BlockWrites

Message blocks sent to all hosts. A message block mayconsist of multiple messages.

Number N, V




Host I/O Number of host I/Os Number N, V

Swap Reads Segments read into node memory from the diskduring the sample interval due to swapping

Number N

Swap Writes Segments written to disk from node memory duringthe sample interval due to swapping

Number N

Swap Drops Pages and segments dropped from node memoryduring the sample period due to swapping

Number N

Swaps Total number of swap reads and swap writes Number N

Mem Allocatesor Mem Allocs

Segments allocated to memory resources Number N, V

Mem AllocateKB

Kilobytes allocated to memory resources Number N, V

Mem Faillures Segment allocation attempts that failed Number N

Mem SEGsAgings

Memory agings and collections done on old segments Number N

Net Reads Messages read from the BYNET and input into thenode during the sample interval

Number N, V

Net Writes Messages written from the node and output to theBYNET during the sample interval

Number N, V

NV Mem Agings Backup storage disk segments flushed fromnonvolatile memory (on Teradata Database V2R6.x)

Number N

NV MemAllocate

Kilobytes of nonvolatile memory allocated for AMPbackup storage (on Teradata Database V2R6.x)

Number N

NV MemAllocate SEGs

Complete and partial nonvolatile memory allocationsof disk segments read (written) for backup storage (onTeradata Database V2R6.x)

Number N, V

PE CPU Use CPU usage of the parsing engines Percent V

Available AWT Total available AMP worker tasks Number V

AWT In Use Total in-use AMP worker tasks Number V

Message Count Messages waiting on the vproc Number V

Message DQCount

Messages processed from the queue Number V


The PREFERENCES view allows you to customize the way resource information isdisplayed in the portlet views.




Slider Metrics

Select the metrics to display in the preview sliders for each view. Set the maximumthreshold percent for each metric.

Display

Display or hide nodes or cliques in the summary views that are operating within setthresholds.


Use the Slider Metrics tab in the PREFERENCES view to set metric thresholds. UseMaxThreshold % to set the maximum range of the preview sliders in the summary views.


2 Click the Slider Metrics tab.


4 Select a view from the list.

5 Select a metric from the list.

6 Enter the maximum threshold percent for each metric.

The maximum range of the preview sliders changes in the summary views.


8 Click OK.

Hiding Nodes and Cliques

Use the Display tab in the PREFERENCES view to display or hide nodes or cliques in thesummary views.




4 Do one of the following:• Select the Hide nodes or cliques that are operating within set thresholds check box

to hide nodes or cliques in the summary views.• Clear the Hide nodes or cliques that are operating within set thresholds check box

to display nodes or cliques in the summary views.


6 Click OK.



CHAPTER 16

Productivity

ProductivityThe Productivity portlet allows you to analyze performance trends for a Teradata Databasesystem over a 24-hour or a 48-hour period. You can also compare current performance withaverage performance measured across one or more weeks of historical data. Additionally,you can monitor and compare the productivity of multiple systems by adding aProductivity portlet to the view for each Teradata Database system to be monitored.

Only the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator can enable system health metrics, configure thewarning and critical thresholds, and customize the states and tooltips for your system. Themetrics and thresholds are usually selected to highlight an unusual load on the system thathas the potential to impact overall performance.

About the Productivity View

The PRODUCTIVITY view displays a high-level overview of the performance trends for aTeradata Database system during the preceding 24 hours or 48 hours. Data trends arerepresented in a horizontal graph called a sparkline. Mouse over a sparkline to see aninformation balloon containing detailed information about the data point. There are threetypes of sparklines:

CANARY RESPONSE TIME

Canary-response-time metrics show the time (in milliseconds) a query takes tocomplete. Canary response times, such as SYSTEM HEARTBEAT are representedby a curve sparkline. Every 15 minutes, a new data point is added to the sparkline,representing the average canary response time recorded during the interval. A largedot and a number at the end of the sparkline indicate the last data point captured.

QUERIES PER HOUR

Queries-per-hour (QPH) metrics show the number of queries against the databasefor each hour over the 24-hour or 48-hour period for the selected metric. Forexample, the TOTAL QPH sparkline is a skyline sparkline, used to represent QPHmetrics. A flat, solid data point represents the number of queries per hour on thetimeline.

SYSTEM HEALTH

The SYSTEM HEALTH metric provides an overview of the worst state of themonitored system, sampled at 15-minute intervals during the 24-hour or 48-hourperiod. SYSTEM HEALTH is represented by a bar sparkline and uses default or


custom states and tooltips. The values on the sparkline represent the worst systemstate experienced during each 15-minute period.

To display data in the PRODUCTIVITY view, the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator mustfirst enable the appropriate Teradata Viewpoint collectors, including Query count, Systemstatistics, and Canary queries. The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator also specifies the datacollection rate for each collector.

Factors external to Teradata Viewpoint can also affect the collection and display of data. TheTeradata System Administrator must enable query logging on the Teradata Database system.

Productivity Metrics

You can select and organize metrics to display, set thresholds, adjust the vertical axis rangefor each metric, and adjust the duration over which the averages are calculated using thePREFERENCES view.

MetricDefaultSparkline

PastAverageLine Default Description

Canary Response TimesMetrics

Curve Yes No Select individual canary query metrics

System Metrics: SystemHealth

Bar No Yes Shows customized states or these default states:healthy, warning, critical, down, or unknown.

System Metrics: SystemHeartbeat

Curve Yes Yes Shows whether the Teradata Database system isresponsive

System Metrics: TotalQPH

Skyline Yes Yes Select total queries per hour metrics

Queries Per Hour Metrics Skyline Yes No Select individual queries per hour metrics


The PREFERENCES view allows you to customize the portlet to monitor key metric trendsthat are important to efficient operation of the system. You can select only one system tomonitor for each portlet instance.

Chapter 16 Productivity



System

Select a system to monitor.

Metrics

Select and organize metrics to monitor in the summary view. Drag metrics from alist of all available metrics to the Preview pane where you can preview the results asyou go.

Settings

Define settings for the metrics selected for display. Set thresholds to highlight metricvalues that are outside normal operating ranges. Set maximum vertical-axis rangesto limit the range of values displayed for selected metrics.

Past Averages

Adjust the number of weeks of data points used to calculate the average value foreach displayed metric.








6 Click OK.

Selecting Metrics to Monitor

Use the Metrics tab in the PREFERENCES view to select and organize the metrics shown inthe summary view.



The Preview pane uses sample data to show how metric rows are displayed in thesummary view.


4 Do any of the following to change the way metric rows are displayed:



• Add a metric row. Drag a metric from the Select metrics for display list to thePreview pane.

• Remove a metric row. Click located on the metric row.• Change metric row order. Drag a metric already in the Preview pane to a new

location in the pane (up or down).Adding or removing metrics affects only the system currently selected, provided that themetrics are available on that system.


6 Click OK.


Use the Settings tab in the PREFERENCES view to set the THRESHOLD and VERTICALAXIS RANGE values for the metrics selected for display. Only metrics selected using theMetrics tab appear in the list of available metrics.

Only the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator can enable System Health metrics andconfigure the degraded and critical thresholds. These selections are made in the TeradataSystems portlet.


2 Click the Settings tab.


4 [Optional] Enter the THRESHOLD setting for each available metric.The threshold line does not appear in the view when the value entered is zero or blank.

5 [Optional] Enter the VERTICAL AXIS RANGE for each available metric.The sparkline scales automatically when the value entered is zero or blank.


7 Click OK.






4 Enter the number of weeks (1 to 99 weeks).



The default is 2 weeks.


6 Click OK.





CHAPTER 17

Query Groups

Query GroupsThe Query Groups portlet allows you to view information about session queries running ona Teradata Database system that match defined criteria.

A query group is any combination of one or more Teradata Database users, account strings,query bands, and workloads. For example, a query group that contains a group of users,could be configured for you to view queries based on the country of the user.

Queries appear in a group because they match certain criteria or characteristics. You canonly view groups that have been assigned to you. If you identify a problem query, you cancorrect the problem by changing the priority or workload, releasing the query, or abortingthe query or session. Take these actions for one query or session, or multiple queries orsessions at a time.

The summary view contains a table with one row allocated to each group running on thedatabase. It contains all the information matching the criteria set for that group.

The details view contains session and query information.

The Query Groups portlet allows you to filter queries by group for all sessions. You can setthresholds for certain columns, and when the threshold is exceeded, the information ishighlighted in the summary table.

The PREFERENCES view allows you to change display options.

You can monitor multiple Teradata Database systems by opening more than one instance ofthe Query Groups portlet.

About the Query Groups View

The QUERY GROUPS view displays a summary of queries running on the selectedTeradata Database system.

Selection Menus

Shows the system and query group currently being displayed. Choose a system anda query group.

State Filter Bar

Displays a count of the sessions in each of the states. Click any state in the bar tochange the displayed data in the summary table to only show the sessions running aquery in the selected state.


Filters

Filters allow you to change displayed data by showing only rows that match yourfilter criteria. You can also sort on the column headers to find the details you want.

Summary Table

Displays information about each session for the group of queries, with columnsconfigured specifically for the current view. The view is refreshed every 30 seconds.Click on a row in the table to see details.

Table Actions

Clear Filters removes any content in the filter boxes.Configure Columns allows you to choose the columns to display and setthresholds.Abort, Change Priority, Change Workload, and Release Query allow you tomanage the selected queries and sessions.Export creates a .csv file containing all available data. If filters are used, only filtereddata is exported.

Overflow Menu

Displays a list of states. You can select another state to replace the current state.


You can use selection menus to choose a system and a query group to monitor in the portlet,starting with the highest level menu on the far left. Menu choices are based on the previousmenu.

You are not required to make a selection from every menu each time you modify a selection.



Chapter 17 Query Groups


3 Click Next.

4 Select a group from the menu.

5 Click Next.


The state filter bar allows you to display specific states in the view. If more than six states areavailable in a Teradata Database system, you can select another state from the OverflowMenu to replace the state in the last position.

The state filter buttons provide a count of sessions for each state category. Click any buttonto filter for the selected state or select a state from the list. For example, click DELAY todisplay the sessions running a query that is queued and waiting to run in the selectedsystem. Mouse over a state filter button to display the expanded content for large,abbreviated numbers or truncated state names.

All

Sessions currently running in the selected Teradata Database system

Not idle

Sessions in any state except idle

Active

Sessions running a query that is in progress

Block

Sessions running a query that is waiting for a locked resource, such as a databasetable or view

Delay

Sessions running a query that is queued waiting to run

Abort

Sessions running a query that is in the process of aborting (rolling back changesmade by the query)

Resp

Sessions running a query that has completed and is sending (responding) spooleddata back to the user

Idle

Sessions not currently running a query

Parse

Sessions running a query that is being parsed. It has not begun to execute.



Other

Sessions whose status is unknown and do not fall into any of the above categories

QTDelayed

Sessions delayed due to a queue table restriction

SESDelayed

Utility sessions that are in the workload delay queue





Filter Symbols





cat?

?cat

cat?l

cat???

p???er

cats, catalog

scat, Scatter

catalog

catalog




*cat

cat*l

cat*

*ews*er

*%


catalog

cat, cats, catalog


what is 100%?


=CAT

=cat?

CAT

cats




This symbol can be used in conjunction with * and ?. =Cat*

=Cat_

=Cat\?

Cat, Cats, Catalog

Cat_

Cat?



*\?

=cat\*

cat\?

what is 100%?

cat*

cat?, Cat?



>60 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth



>=60 60, 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth



<60 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth



<=60 60, 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth




Clearing Filters



Option Description





Option Description


















State Icons
















Query Group Metrics






Percent


Number




Number


Number





Number

Query Band Entire query band string (Query bands are a set of name-value pairs defined by the user to tag sessions or transactionswith an ID through an SQL interface.)

String




Req CPU CPU seconds needed to run the query Number

Req I/O Disk I/Os performed to run the query Number


Spool Spool space the query requires Number




Temp Space Temp space used by the query Number


Number

User Name of the user who submitted the query String




Tabs


Query Details


Manage Queries


Previous/Next











































About the SQL Tab





If you have the correct permissions, use to retrieve the latest Explain steps from thedatabase. Click Refresh to update. The refresh screen data is not maintained once therefresh view closes. Repeatedly retrieving current Explain data can impact systemperformance.





























About the Delay Tab











About the Skew Tab
















Abort


Change Priority


Change Workload


Release Query







2 Click .



3 Select Abort.


5 Click Next.


7 Click Next.




This menu item is only available when workloads are not enabled and the system beingmonitored supports this feature.1 Click the row of the query you want to change.

2 Click .



5 Click Next.



8 Click Next.



10 Click Next.




This menu item is only available when workloads are enabled and the system beingmonitored supports this feature.1 Click the row of the query you want to change.

2 Click .





5 Click Next.




8 Click Next.


10 Click OK.

Releasing a Query

For Teradata Database systems, you can release a query from the delay queue for immediateprocessing.

1 Click the row of the query you want to change.

2 Click .



5 Click Next.



In Teradata Database systems, you can change system resources for multiple sessions fromthe summary view.



2 Do one of the following:• Select the SEL check box in the column heading to choose all sessions.• Select specific check boxes to choose only those sessions.

3 Click Next.


5 Follow the instructions that appear on subsequent screens.


The PREFERENCES view allows you to change display options.


In this view you can:



• Display or hide the state filter bar in the portlet.• Choose formatted or unformatted SQL to display in the SQL tab.


Use the Display tab in the PREFERENCES view to select a format for the SQL and to displayor hide filters.



3 Do one of the following:• Select the Display the state filter bar check box to display the state filter bar in the

portlet.• Clear the Display the state filter bar check box to hide the state filter bar in the

portlet.

4 Do one of the following:• Select the Format SQL check box to use formatted SQL.• Clear the Format SQL check box to use unformatted SQL.


6 Click OK.



CHAPTER 18

Query Monitor

Query MonitorThe Query Monitor portlet allows you to view information about queries running inTeradata Database and Teradata Aster systems so you can target problem queries.

For Teradata Database, you can see the progress of submitted queries and target longer-running queries so you can optimize them. After you have identified a problem query, youcan take action to correct the problem by changing the priority or workload, releasing thequery, or aborting the query or session. You can take these actions for a single query orsession, or multiple queries or sessions at a time. The session view provides a table listing thesessions, account strings, users, or utilities running on the database.

From the PREFERENCES view for Teradata Database systems, you can choose to displaythe sessions list, top sessions graph, state filter bar, and set the criteria values used to displaysessions in the My Criteria view. The My Criteria session list displays only sessions thathave exceeded the defined thresholds.

For Teradata Aster, you can see the progress of queries. The session view provides a tablelisting the sessions, databases, or users running on the database.

From the PREFERENCES view for Teradata Aster systems, you can choose to display thesessions list and state filter bar.

About the Query Monitor View

The QUERY MONITOR view shows a list of sessions running on a system, which you cangroup by account string, database, session, user, or utility.

Selection Menus

Shows the system and resources currently being displayed. Choose a system andview options, including account string, database, session, user, or utility.

Top Sessions Graph

Displays the sessions with the largest value compared with the total number ofsessions currently running in a Teradata Database.

State Filter Bar

Displays a count of the sessions in each state. Click any state in the bar to change thedisplayed data in the summary table to only show the sessions running a query inthe selected state.


Overflow Menu Displays additional states available for a Teradata Databasesystem. If the number of states on the State Filter Bar exceeds the available space,you can select another state to replace the current state.

Filters


Summary Table

Displays summary information about sessions, account strings, users, or utilities incolumns. The current view is configured in the Columns dialog box andPREFERENCES view. The view is refreshed every 30 seconds. Click a row in thetable to see details.

Table Actions

For Teradata Database systems, Table Actions include:• Clear Filters removes any content in the filter boxes.• Configure Columns allows you to choose the columns to display and set

thresholds.• Abort, Change Priority, Change Workload, and Release Query allow you to

manage the selected queries and sessions.• Export creates a .csv file containing all available data. If filters are used, only

filtered data is exported.For Teradata Aster systems, Table Actions include:• Clear Filters removes any content in the filter boxes.• Configure Columns allows you to choose the columns to display.• Export creates a .csv file containing all available data. If filters are used, only

filtered data is exported.

Chapter 18 Query Monitor



You can use selection menus to choose a system, type of view, and information to monitorin the portlet, starting with the highest level menu on the far left. Menu choices are based onwhat you selected in the previous menu.



3 Click Next.

4 Select a type of view from the menu.

5 Click Next.

6 If you selected By Session for a Teradata Database system, you can further define thecriteria.

7 Click Next.


The Query Monitor portlet displays data for one system at a time, based on the data typeyou select. The selection menu choices are specific to the type of system selected.

Teradata DatabaseSelection Menu Choices Description

By Account String Displays rows of account strings in the summary table

By Session > All Displays all sessions in the summary table



Teradata DatabaseSelection Menu Choices Description

By Session > My Criteria Displays the summary table for sessions that exceed the set criteriavalues and the metrics enabled in the PREFERENCES view

By User Displays rows of users in the summary table

By Utility Displays rows of utilities in the summary table

Teradata Aster SelectionMenu Choices Description

By Database Displays rows of databases in the summary table

By Session Displays rows of sessions in the summary table

By User Displays rows of users in the summary table

About the Top Sessions Graph

The top sessions graph, which is only available for Teradata Database systems, provides aTop sessions by menu where you can select one of several metrics. Selecting a metricupdates the graph to display sessions with the largest values in bars representing the relativesize of the metric value. As you mouse over the bar graph, information balloons displaysession values. Click a graph section representing a session to see details for that session.

Use the maximized view to display some of the smaller sessions by clicking Other.

The Display tab in the PREFERENCES view allows you to show or hide the top sessionsgraph in the summary view.


The state filter bar allows you to display specific states in the view. For a Teradata Databasesystem, if the number of states exceeds the available space, you can select another state fromthe Overflow Menu. The new state replaces the last state on the state filter bar.

The state filter buttons provide a count of sessions for each state category. Click a state in thestate filter bar to display only sessions with a query in the selected state. For example, clickDELAY to display the sessions running a query that is queued and waiting to run. Mouseover a state filter button to display the full state name or number.

For Teradata Database systems, these states are available:



All

Sessions in the system

Not idle

Sessions in any state except idle

Active

Sessions processing queries

Block

Sessions processing a query waiting for a locked resource, such as a database table orview

Delay

Sessions waiting to be processed

Abort

Sessions in the process of aborting (rolling back changes made by the query)

Resp

Sessions running a query that has completed and is sending (responding) spooleddata back to the user

Idle

Sessions not currently running a query

Parse

Sessions running a query that is being parsed. It has not begun to execute.

Other

Sessions whose status is unknown and do not fall into another category

QTDelayed

Sessions delayed due to a queue table restriction

SESDelayed

Utility sessions that are in the workload delay queue

For Teradata Aster systems, these states are available:

All

Sessions in the system

Active

Sessions processing queries

Idle

Sessions not running



Canceling

Sessions being canceled by a system user

Pending

Sessions waiting to be processed





Filter Symbols





cat?

?cat

cat?l

cat???

p???er

cats, catalog

scat, Scatter

catalog

catalog




*cat

cat*l

cat*

*ews*er

*%


catalog

cat, cats, catalog


what is 100%?



=CAT

=cat?

=Cat*

=Cat_

CAT

cats

Cat, Cats, Catalog

Cat_




=Cat\? Cat?



*\?

=cat\*

cat\?

what is 100%?

cat*

cat?, Cat?



>60 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth



>=60 60, 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth



<60 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth



<=60 60, 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth




Clearing Filters



Option Description







Option Description


Use the Columns dialog box to select, lock, and order columns. You can resize columns inthe table. The thresholds and column selection, order, and lock settings that you choose areapplied to the minimized and maximized views separately.




4 [Optional] Click Set, type a threshold value, and click OK.Threshold values can be set for Teradata Database systems. Values exceeding thethreshold are highlighted and displayed in the table.









State Icons

The following icons appear for a Teradata Database system:















The following icons appear for a Teradata Aster system:


Active Process is running.

Canceling Process has been canceled and is stopping.

Pending Process is waiting to run.

Query Monitor Metrics

Metrics that appear in summary table can be customized using the Columns dialog box.Available metrics differ depending on the type of system and selection menu options youchoose.


Session Metrics

The selection menu choice By Session > All or My Criteria makes the following metricsavailable.






Percent


Number







Number


Number





Number

Query Band Entire query band string (Query bands are a set of name-value pairs defined by the user to tag sessions or transactionswith an ID through an SQL interface.)

String

Req CPU CPU seconds needed to run the query Number

Req I/O Disk I/Os performed to run the query Number


Spool Spool space the query requires Number




Temp Space Temp space used by the query Number


Number

User Name of the user who submitted the query String


Account String and User Metrics

The selection menu choice By Account String or By User makes the following metricsavailable.



Number


Δ Request Count Total number of queries submitted by the user or accountstring since the last sample

Number




Aborting Count Queries that have been aborted and changes are being rolledback

Number


Active Count Queries that are running Number

Blocked Count Queries waiting for a lock held by another query Number


Percent

Delayed Count Queries in a delay queue waiting to run Number

Idle Count Queries that are not running Number

Parsing Count Queries being parsed before running Number

Response Count Queries that are returning results to the user Number

Spool Current spool used by the request across all AMPs, in bytes Number

Total Number of sessions for the user or account (total of active,aborting, blocked, idle, parsing, response, delayed, andunknown)

Number

Unknown Count Queries in an unknown state Number

Username Name of the user that submitted the query String


Session Metrics

The selection menu choice By Session makes the following metrics available.


Database Name of the database on which the process is running String

Icon Values for process types are as follows:• SQL-MR• SQL• Teradata Import• Teradata Export

Number

In State How long the process has been in the current state Number

Process ID Unique process identifier Number


Start Time the process began running Number

State Process state, such as active, canceling, pending String

State Icon Symbol of the process state Icon

Username Name of the user who submitted the process String

Workload Workload in which the process is running String



Database and User Metrics

The selection menu choice By Database or By User makes the following metrics available.


Active Count Active processes Number

Canceling Count Processes created by the user that were canceled and arestopping

Number

Database Name of the database on which the process is running String

Idle Count Number of processes with no running processes on thisdatabase or for this user

Number

Pending Count Number of processes waiting to run Number

Total Number of active, idle, and pending processes Number

Username Name of the user who submitted the processes String

About the Utility View

The utility view, which is only available for Teradata Database systems, displays utilitynames, states, and limits in the following columns:

Name

Type of utility, including the partition on which the utility is being run. You canclick a name to obtain details about an individual utility.

Note: TDWM Statistics reports many active utilities other than utility session. If youselect an active utility to obtain more information, you might receive a No Datamessage.

Active

Current number of utilities active on the partition.

Limit

Maximum number of utilities allowed to be active on the partition. The limit valuecan be either the system default value for the utility or a rule throttle value. You canoverride the default limits by changing the setting in the DBS control record.



Tabs

Teradata Database systems have Overview, SQL, Explain, Query Band, Blocked By,Skew, and Delay tabs.Teradata Aster systems have Overview, SQL, and Explain tabs.



Query Details


Manage Queries


Previous/Next


About the Overview Tab for Teradata Database

The Overview tab provides detailed information about key metrics for the selected sessionand its queries. The metric values provide a view of the query status on the system. Metricsthat exceed defined thresholds are highlighted. Under SESSION INFO, you can click a useror account to see all sessions for that user or account string.






































About the Overview Tab for Teradata Aster

The Overview tab displays detailed information about key metrics for the selected session.The metric values provide a view of the query status on the system.


Process ID Unique identifier for the process

State Process state, such as active, canceling, pending

In State How long the process has been in the current state

Start Time the process started running


Workload Policy Name of the workload policy used to manage the process. Definesa set of related queries, and allows them to be prioritized in asimilar manner.

Service Class Name of the service class used by the workload policy. Specifies theshare of system resources allocated to a workload as a function ofthe class's priority and weight values.

Priority Indicates the importance of the process.• High• Medium• Low

Weight Number ranging from 1 to 100 that indicates the precedence of theprocess within the priority level, increasing the resources that canbe allocated for the process. A higher value indicates a greater levelof precedence.


User Name of user that submitted the query

Database Name of the database on which the process ran

IP Address IP address of the user that submitted the process



About the SQL Tab



About the Explain Tab for Teradata Database


If you have the correct permissions, use to retrieve the latest Explain steps from thedatabase. Click Refresh to update. The refresh screen data is not maintained once the refreshview closes. Repeatedly retrieving current Explain data can impact system performance.













About the Explain Tab for Teradata Aster

The Explain tab displays the Explain text that shows a query's progress. Each Explain stephas a colored box that indicates the status of the step. This information is read-only. Click to export the Explain data as a .csv file.



To view all steps and phase details, click Show all. Alternatively, click Show summary toview a shortened version of the Explain data.


Step Status Icon Indicates the status of each Explain step:• Completed steps are at the top of the list and indicated by a

black box.• Active steps are indicated by a pulsating box (flashes gray and

white).• Steps to run are at the bottom of the list and indicated by a

white box.

Time Duration of the step

Type Category of step, such as Command,CommitPreparedTransaction, DataTransfer, Import,PrepareTransaction, and Query

Phase/Detail Summarized or full explanation of query that executes in this step.Can be used to diagnose the cause of the failure or slowness.

About the Blocked By Tab for Teradata Database

The Blocked By tab displays details about other queries that are blocking the selected query.This information is read-only. The tab is only available when the selected query is blocked.The Session ID is a link that allows you to drill down into the session information for theblocking session. This allows you to navigate the chain of blocking sessions to identify thesession currently holding the lock on the object.








About the Query Band Tab for Teradata Database







About the Delay Tab for Teradata Database











About the Skew Tab for Teradata Database
















Abort


Change Priority


Change Workload


Release Query







2 Click .

3 Select Abort.


5 Click Next.


7 Click Next.




This menu item is only available when workloads are not enabled and the system beingmonitored supports this feature.


2 Click .





5 Click Next.



8 Click Next.



10 Click Next.




This menu item is only available when workloads are enabled and the system beingmonitored supports this feature.


2 Click .



5 Click Next.




8 Click Next.


10 Click OK.

Releasing a Query



2 Click .





5 Click Next.



For Teradata Database systems, you can change system resources for multiple sessions,users, or account strings in the following locations:• All sessions table from the summary view• My Criteria sessions table from the summary view• User sessions table from the details view• Account strings table from the details view• Utility table from the details view

1 Select By Session in the selection menu and one of the following choices:• All• My Criteria

2 [Optional] Access user or account string tables from the details view.

a Click a session.

b Click the USER or ACCOUNT link under SESSION INFO.



4 Do one of the following:• Select the check box in the column heading to select all sessions.• Select the check boxes for specific sessions.

5 Select Next.


7 Follow the instructions on subsequent screens.


The PREFERENCES view allows you to customize the way query and session information isdisplayed in portlet views.


Display

For Teradata Database systems, choose formatted or unformatted SQL to display inthe SQL tab. Display or hide the top sessions graph, state filter bar, and session listin the portlet.



For Teradata Aster systems, display or hide the state filter bar and session list in theportlet.

Criteria

For Teradata Database systems, set the criteria values used to display sessions in theMy Criteria view. After setting the criteria value and enabling a metric, any queryexceeding the criteria value appears in the sessions table in the My Criteria view.


Use the Display tab in the PREFERENCES view to display or hide the Top Session Graph,State Filter Bar, or Session List in the portlet, and select a format for the SQL.




4 Do one of the following for Teradata Database systems:• Select the Top Sessions Graph check box to display the top session graph in the

portlet.• Clear the Top Sessions Graph check box to hide the top sessions graph in the portlet.

5 Do one of the following:• Select the State Filter Bar check box to display the state filter bar in the portlet.• Clear the State Filter Bar check box to hide the state filter bar in the portlet.

6 Do one of the following:• Select the Session List check box to display the session list in the summary table in

the portlet.• Clear the Session List check box to hide the session list in the summary table in the

portlet.

7 Do one of the following for Teradata Database systems:• Select the Format SQL check box to use formatted SQL.• Clear the Format SQL check box to use unformatted SQL.


9 Click OK.

Selecting Threshold Criteria

For Teradata Database systems, use the Criteria tab in the PREFERENCES view to set thecriteria values used to display sessions in the My Criteria view. If any enabled metric exceedsthe threshold value, the session is displayed when the metric is also selected in the Columnsdialog box.




2 Click the Criteria tab.


4 Enter threshold values for each metric you want tested.

5 Select the metrics you want enabled.


7 Click OK.





CHAPTER 19

Query Spotlight

Query Spotlight

The Query Spotlight portlet allows you to view completed queries that exceeded thethresholds you set. You can view individual queries of interest as a line graph over time andagainst a variety of metrics. The Snapshot tab displays the query data at any point in time.

Use Query Spotlight to:• View general information about a query.• Inspect a query as a line graph using the date-range slider and time marker.• Set a date and time in the rewind toolbar. This feature is useful for rewinding data in

surrounding portlets to a point of time specified within a query. The Query Spotlightportlet can set time and date but it does not respond to changes made in the rewindtoolbar.

The PREFERENCES view allows you to choose the query criteria that filter which metricsappear in the views.

You can monitor multiple systems by opening additional instances of the Query Spotlightportlet. Rewind control is given over to the last instance of Query Spotlight to use the timemarker.

About the Query Spotlight View

The QUERY SPOTLIGHT view displays completed queries on the selected system and timeframe.

Selection Menus

Choose the system and time frame to display. Time frame options include viewingby hours, days, weeks, or setting a custom range.

Filters


Summary Table

Displays summary information about each query. The current view is configured inthe Columns dialog box and PREFERENCES view. Click on a row in the table tosee details.


Table Actions



You can use the selection menu to choose a system and time frame to monitor.



3 Click Next.

4 Select a time frame.Hours, week, and month are all based on the current time. Custom is a fixed time period.

5 Click Next.If you chose Custom, enter a date and time range and click OK.




Chapter 19 Query Spotlight


The filtering, sorting, and page number settings that you choose for the default orminimized view are not used when you switch to the maximized view.

Filter Symbols





cat?

?cat

cat?l

cat???

p???er

cats, catalog

scat, Scatter

catalog

catalog




*cat

cat*l

cat*

*ews*er

*%


catalog

cat, cats, catalog


what is 100%?



=CAT

=cat?

=Cat*

=Cat_

=Cat\?

CAT

cats

Cat, Cats, Catalog

Cat_

Cat?



*\?

=cat\*

cat\?

what is 100%?

cat*

cat?, Cat?



>60 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth



>=60 60, 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth






<60 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth



<=60 60, 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth




Clearing Filters



Option Description






















Query Spotlight View Metrics

Metrics appearing in the queries table can be selected using the Columns dialog box.Metrics available for monitoring and display are listed below.




End Time that the query stopped running on Teradata Database Number


Number


Number



Number

Req CPU Number of CPU seconds needed to run the query Number

Req I/O Number of disk I/Os performed to run the query Number

Req Number Number of the specific request Number


Spool Amount of spool space the query requires Number






Number

Username Name of the user who submitted the query String


The details view displays a graph, statistics, and information about a selected query. Choose ametric from the metrics list to display one query as a line graph.

Metrics List

The list of metrics that can be graphed are as follows: CPU Skew, Impact CPU, I/OSkew, PJI, CPU Delta, I/O Delta, Spool, and Unnecessary I/O.

Date-Range Slider

A slider used to control the amount of data displayed in the graph. The sliderappears for longer queries.

The darker-shaded area between the slider handles represents the current date rangedisplayed in the graph.

Metrics Graph

Charts selected metric for a query using Explain steps. As you mouse over the graph,information balloons display query values.

Time Marker

A marker that pinpoints information about a query at a particular point in time.Used to rewind time in the rewind toolbar when Control Rewind is enabled.Determines the data displayed in the Snapshot and Blocked By tabs.

Job Steps

Numbers that denote the Explain step that occurs between the dashed lines in thegraph. Job steps are shown just below the graph area. Overlapping steps or steps-within-steps are not shown.

When there is not enough room to display individual steps, the numbers aregrouped together. For example, you might see 1, 2, 3, 4, 8. Step 8 represents steps 5,6, 7, and 8.

Tabs

Provides important query details on the Overview, SQL, Explain, Blocked By, andSnapshot tabs.

Query Details




Previous/Next


Time Frame

A window that displays the date and time range duration of the query.

Skyline

Skyline blocks represent a metric over the duration of the designated query step. ForImpact CPU this metric is the average Delta CPU. For Unnecessary I/O it is theaverage Delta IO. No other metrics display skyline data.


The date-range slider shows the most recent part of the query. The date and time range aredisplayed in the time frame above the slider on the right.

1 Mouse over the date-range slider to activate the start-time and end-time handles.



2 Drag the start-time handle until the intended start time is displayed in the time frame.

3 Drag the end-time handle until the intended end time is displayed in the time frame.

4 [Optional] Drag the date-range handle left or right to move the start-time and end-timehandles in unison.

Selecting a Metric to Graph

You can select different metrics to graph. The metrics contain historical details you can useto investigate queries.

1 Click next to the metric name.


About Query Spotlight and Rewind

The Query Spotlight portlet cannot rewind and does not use the rewind toolbar. TheControl Rewind button in the Query Spotlight portlet is a toggle that enables portal rewindfor portlets that support the rewind function on the same page. When rewind is enabled, thetime marker in Query Spotlight sets the time and date in the rewind toolbar and controls thetime and date for data in the other portlets. This allows you to investigate how metricscompare across portlets during the same time frame.

When Control Rewind is toggled off, the time marker no longer controls the date and timefor data in the other portlets and portal rewind is controlled from the rewind toolbar.

Enabling and Using Rewind Control

The time marker is a vertical line in the graph with small triangles at the top and bottom. Itsposition represents a point in time and controls rewind for the portlets that support therewind function. The time marker appears green when Control Rewind is enabled and youinteract with it.

1 From the Details View, click Control Rewind located below the graph in the middle ofthe page.

The icon in the Control Rewind button turns green and the rewind toolbar appears.

2 Click or drag the time marker to a specific point in time.



3 [Optional] Drag the time marker to another point in time.

Disabling Rewind Control

The icon in the Control Rewind button is green and the rewind toolbar is displayed withrewind is enabled.

1 Click Control Rewind.

The in the Control Rewind button turns gray. The time marker no longer controlsthe time and date in the rewind toolbar, and portal rewind is controlled from the rewindtoolbar.




Total Duration How long the query has run, displayed as hh:mm:ss Number

User Name of the user that submitted the query Character

Account Account of the user that submitted the query Character

Req Number Number of I/O operations the query performed Number

Req CPU Total CPU usage time, in seconds, consumed by the query Number

Req I/O Number of I/O operations the query performed Number

Req Max Spool Amount of spool space the query requires Number

Source Source details, such as application name, IP address, and hostuser name

Character

About the SQL Tab



































About the Snapshot Tab

The Snapshot tab displays detailed query data for any point in time. Metrics that exceeddefined thresholds are highlighted.




















Classification Mode How a query or session is assigned to a workload. Available valuesare:• Auto - Query is assigned automatically by TASM




• Request - Query is assigned manually to a workload usingChange Workload

• Session - Queries initiated in that session are assignedmanually to a workload using Change Workload





Time Marker Description Type

Time Location Temporal location of the time marker within the Explain step Number

Step Location Explain step in which the time marker is located Number


The PREFERENCES view allows you to set thresholds to filter query data and customize theway query list information is displayed in the portlet view.

From the portlet frame, click to access the PREFERENCES view and the Criteria tab.

Criteria

Specify threshold criteria to limit the number of queries shown in the query table.After enabling a metric filter and setting the criteria value, any query exceeding thecriteria value appears in the query table if it is also selected in the Columns dialogbox.

Selecting Threshold Criteria

Use the Criteria tab in the PREFERENCES view to set the criteria values used to displayqueries in the QUERY SPOTLIGHT view. If any enabled metric exceeds the threshold value,the query is displayed when the metric is also selected in the Columns dialog box.



3 Enter threshold values for each metric you want tested.

4 Select the metrics you want enabled.




6 Click OK.





CHAPTER 20

Remote Console

Remote ConsoleThe Remote Console portlet allows you to run many of the Teradata Database consoleutilities remotely from within the Teradata Viewpoint portal.

Using this portlet, you can:• Select or search for a system.• Select or search for a utility.• Enter console utility commands.• Display responses from the commands.

Teradata field engineers, Teradata Database operators, system administrators, and systemprogrammers use Teradata Database utilities to administer, configure, monitor, anddiagnose issues with Teradata Database.

About the Remote Console View

The REMOTE CONSOLE view allows you to select and run Teradata Database consoleutilities. You can run only one utility at a time for each portlet instance. Permission to useeach console utility is granted to individual users based on their role and portlet access. If amessage appears in the console denying access to a utility, you are not authorized to use thatutility.


Selection Menus

Select a system and utility.

Clear Console

Clear the content from the console.

Disconnect

Disconnect the utility from Teradata Database.

Console

Display responses from the commands.

Input Line

Enter commands.


Submit Command

Click to submit the command.

Running a Utility

You can select a different system and utility, enter commands, and use the keyboard up anddown arrow keys to access previous commands.

Use this procedure only if you are logged into a system and utility, and want to select adifferent system or utility.



3 Click Next.

4 Select a utility from the menu.

5 Click Next.

The name of the utility appears in the console.

6 Enter a command on the input line.

7 Click to submit the command.

The command results appear in the console.

Chapter 20 Remote Console


8 [Optional] From the input line, use your keyboard up and down arrows to accessprevious commands.The commands are temporarily saved and available as long as you are running theutility. After disconnecting from the utility, the commands are cleared.

Note: After approximately 30 minutes of inactivity in the portlet, the Teradata Databaseconnection times out, and you must reconnect to the utility and Teradata Database.

About the Remote Console Menus and Toolbar

The menus and toolbar allow you to specify the display attributes of the REMOTECONSOLE view.

Use the selection menus to:• Select or search for a system.• Select or search for a utility.

Use Clear Console to clear the content from the console.

Use Disconnect to disconnect from the utility and Teradata Database.

Selecting a System and Utility

You can use selection menus above the toolbar to choose a system and utility to monitor inthe portlet, starting with the highest level menu on the far left. You must select a system andutility before you can submit commands and see the output in the console.


2 Enter the name of the system in the Search box or select a system from the menu.The Search box is not case sensitive. If you cannot find the correct system, press theBackspace key on your keyboard until you find the system you want in the list.

As you type, the list shows the systems that match your filter criteria.

3 Click Next.

4 Enter the name of the utility in the Search box or select a utility from the menu.The Search box is not case sensitive. If you cannot find the correct utility, press theBackspace key on your keyboard until you find the utility you want in the list.

As you type, the list shows the utilities that match your filter criteria.

5 Click Next.

Clearing the Console

1 From the summary view, click Clear Console.

The contents of the console no longer appear.



Disconnecting from a Utility

You can disconnect from a utility and database.

1 From the summary view, click Disconnect.

The input line no longer accepts input and the portlet no longer responds to commands.

The Teradata Database connection closes when you remove the portlet from the portalpage or click Disconnect. If you close the browser without clicking Disconnect, theTeradata Database connection times out in approximately 30 minutes.

About Console Utilities

Teradata field engineers, Teradata Database operators, system administrators, and systemprogrammers use Teradata Database utilities to administer, configure, monitor, anddiagnose issues with Teradata Database.

Console Utilities

Information about available console utilities is listed below. You can access only thefollowing subset of Teradata Database utilities.

Utility Description

Abort Host Cancel all outstanding transactions running on a failed host until the systemrestarts the host.

Check Table Check for inconsistencies between internal data structures, such as table headers,row identifiers, and secondary indexes.

Configure Define AMPs, PEs, and hosts, and describe their interrelationships for TeradataDatabase.

DBS Control Display and modify the DBS Control Record fields.

Ferret Define the scope of an action, such as a range of tables or selected vprocs, displaythe parameters and scope of the action, and perform the action. The action is toeither move data to reconfigure data blocks and cylinders, or display disk spaceand cylinder free space percent in use.

Gateway Global Monitor and control the sessions of Teradata Database LAN-connected users.

Lock Display Display a snapshot capture of all real-time database locks and their associatedcurrently running sessions.

OperatorConsole

Run supervisor commands to manage the programs that perform TeradataDatabase operations.

PriorityScheduler

Create, modify, and monitor Teradata Database process prioritization parameters.All processes have an assigned priority based on their Teradata Database session.Priority Scheduler allocates CPU and I/O resources based on the priority.

QueryConfiguration

Display the current Teradata Database configuration, including the node, AMP,and PE identification and status.

Query Session Monitor the state of selected Teradata Database sessions on selected logical hostIDs.



Utility Description

RecoveryManager

Display information used to monitor progress of a Teradata Database recovery.

Show Locks Display locks placed by archive and recovery, and by table rebuild operations ondatabases and tables.

Teradata DWMDump

Display information about active Teradata Dynamic Workload Manager(Teradata DWM) rules on a Teradata Database system.

Vproc Manager Manage the vprocs including obtaining the status of specified vprocs, initializingvprocs, forcing a vproc to restart, and forcing a Teradata Database restart.

Information on how to use a majority of these utilities is located in Utilities. Information onhow to use Teradata DWM Dump is in Teradata Dynamic Workload Manager User Guide.Information on how to use Operator Console is in Graphical User Interfaces: DatabaseWindow and Teradata MultiTool. Experienced utilities users can refer to the simplifiedcommand descriptions in Utilities Quick Reference which provides the syntax diagrams foreach Teradata Database utility.

You can access these documents at: http://www.info.teradata.com.


The PREFERENCES view allows you to change the console text and background colors.


Setting the Display Background

Use the Display tab in the PREFERENCES view to change the console text and the displaybackground to light or dark.




4 Change the color of the text and background by selecting one of the following options:• Light text on dark background• Dark text on light background


6 Click OK.



http://www.info.teradata.com



CHAPTER 21

Space Usage

Space UsageThe Space Usage portlet allows you to monitor database disk space usage for TeradataDatabase and Teradata Aster systems. The views and the options vary depending on thesystem you choose.

For Teradata Database systems, you can monitor database data, such as the perm space,temp space, and spool space, and reallocate permanent disk space. The details view displayspermanent space usage over time in information balloons. You can reallocate permanentdisk space from one database to another using either the SPACE USAGE view or the detailsview.

For Teradata Aster systems, you can monitor database data, such as the table count andcurrent space usage. The details view displays the space usage, schema and level of skew.

The PREFERENCES view allows you to customize the display for summary and detailsviews and set thresholds for filters. Preferences are only available for Teradata Databasesystems.

About the Space Usage View

The SPACE USAGE view displays information about databases on the selected system. ForTeradata Database systems, the view displays a summary of perm, spool, and temp space foreach database on the selected system. Use this information to see if you need to reallocatedisk space to maximize space usage. For Teradata Aster systems, the view displays thenumber of tables and amount of space used for each database on the selected system.


Selection Menus

Displays the system and space usage report. You can choose a different system andreport.

Threshold Filter Bar

Displays the number of databases on the system and the number of databases whosespace usage exceeds set thresholds. This feature is only available for TeradataDatabase systems.You can set the thresholds in the PREFERENCES view.


Filters


Table Actions

This feature is only available for Teradata Database systems.Clear Filters removes any content in the filter boxes.Configure Columns allows you to choose the columns to display and setthresholds.Export creates a .csv file containing all available data. If filters are applied, onlyfiltered data is exported.

Add Space

Reallocates permanent disk space from one database to another. This feature is onlyavailable for Teradata Database systems.

Summary Table

Displays summary information for the space usage report. The table is configured inthe Columns dialog box. Click a row in the table to see details.

Following is an example of the SPACE USAGE view that appears when you select a TeradataDatabase system from the selection menu.

Following is an example of the SPACE USAGE view that appears when you select a TeradataAster system from the selection menu.

Chapter 21 Space Usage


About the Threshold Filter Bar

For Teradata Database systems, the threshold filter bar allows you to view databases thatexceed thresholds for space usage.

In the By Database report for Teradata Database systems, threshold buttons display thenumber of databases that use space in all categories and that exceed set thresholds. Click anythreshold button to filter for the selected category. Define the thresholds in thePREFERENCES view.

In Teradata Database systems, these states are available:

All

List of databases on the system

Perm

Number of databases using permanent disk space in excess of the set threshold

Spool

Number of databases using temporary spool space in excess of the set threshold

Temp

Number of databases using temporary space in excess of the set threshold

Selecting a System and Report

You can use selection menus above the toolbar to choose a system and report, starting withthe highest level menu on the far left.





3 Click Next.

4 Select a report from the SELECT REPORT dialog box.

5 Click Next.

The report appears in the SPACE USAGE view.


The Space Usage portlet displays data for one system at a time. The selection menu definesthe information that appears in the SPACE USAGE view and in the details view.Teradata DatabaseSystem Selection MenuChoices Description

By Database Displays details by database for permanent disk space, such as the totalspace being used and the amount of temporary spool space being used.

By Vproc Displays details by vproc for permanent disk space, such as the totalspace being used and the amount of available space.

Teradata Aster SystemSelection Menu Choices Description

By Database Displays details for the database, such as the name, table count, andspace in use.

By Node Displays details for each worker node, such as the percentage of spacebeing used and the amount of available space.

Adding Space

You can reallocate permanent disk space from one database to another. This feature is onlyavailable for Teradata Database systems. Permission to reallocate disk space is granted toindividual users based on their Teradata Viewpoint role and portlet access.1 To reallocate space, do one of the following:

• From the SPACE USAGE view, click and then select Add Space from the menuthat appears.

• From the details view, click Add Space.

2 Log onto the selected Teradata Database system, if prompted.

3 Click Next.

4 In the Add text box, enter how much space you want to reallocate.

5 In the MB from text box, select the source database from which the perm space is beingtaken.



6 Click Submit.


7 Click OK.

The space is reallocated to the database.




The filtering, sorting, and page number settings that you choose for the default orminimized view are not used when you switch to the maximized view.

Filter Symbols





cat?

?cat

cat?l

cat???

p???er

cats, catalog

scat, Scatter

catalog

catalog




*cat

cat*l

cat*

*ews*er

*%


catalog

cat, cats, catalog


what is 100%?



=CAT

=cat?

=Cat*

=Cat_

CAT

cats

Cat, Cats, Catalog

Cat_




=Cat\? Cat?



*\?

=cat\*

cat\?

what is 100%?

cat*

cat?, Cat?



>60 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth



>=60 60, 61, 62, 70, 500, and so forth



<60 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth



<=60 60, 59, 58, 50, 8, and so forth




Clearing Filters



Option Description







Option Description
















Space Usage Metrics

Metrics that appear in summary table can be customized using the Columns dialog box.Availability of metrics depends on the system and selection menu options you choose.


By Database

The selection menu choice By Database makes the following metrics available.




Current Perm • In the SPACE USAGE view: Amount of total permanent diskspace the database is currently using

• In the details view: Amount of total permanent disk space thetable is currently using

Number

Current Perm % Percentage of the total permanent disk space the database iscurrently using (Current Perm divided by Max Perm)

Percent

Current Perm Skew%

A measure of perm space data distribution across all AMPs for theselected database

Note: A perfectly distributed database (same amount of data oneach AMP) has a skew of 0. A database which has all the data onone AMP has a skew of 100.

Percent

Current Spool Amount of total temporary spool space the database is currentlyusing

Number

Current Spool % Percentage of total temporary spool space the database is currentlyusing (Current Spool divided by Max Spool)

Percent

Current Temp Amount of total temporary space the database is currently using Number

Current Temp % Percentage of total temporary space the database is currently using(Current Spool divided by Max Spool)

Percent

Max Perm Total amount of permanent disk space available for the database Number

Max Spool Total amount of temporary spool space available for the database Number

Max Temp Total amount of temporary space available for the database Number

Name Database name String

Parent Database Parent database name String

Peak Perm • In the SPACE USAGE view: Greatest amount of permanentdisk space the database has used

• In the details view: Greatest amount of permanent disk spacethe table has used

Number

Peak Perm % Highest percentage of total permanent disk space the database hasused (Peak Perm divided by Max Perm)

Percent

Peak Spool Greatest amount of temporary spool space the database has used Number

Peak Spool % Highest percentage of total temporary spool space the databasehas used (Peak Spool divided by Max Spool)

Percent

Peak Temp Greatest amount of temporary space the database has used Number

Peak Temp % Highest percentage of total temporary space the database has used(Peak Temp divided by Max Temp)

Percent

Skew % A measure of data distribution among the nodes (details viewonly)

Number

Table Table name (details view only) String




Unused Perm % Percentage of total permanent disk space currently not being used(100% minus Current Perm %)

Percent

By Vproc

The selection menu choice By Vproc makes the following metrics available.


% In Use Percentage of total permanent disk space the database is currentlyusing (Current Perm divided by Max Perm)

Percent

Available Perm Amount of total permanent disk space currently not being usedby the database (Max Perm divided by Current Perm)

Number

Current Perm Amount of total permanent disk space the database is currentlyusing

Number

Max Perm Total amount of permanent disk space available for the database Number

Vproc ID AMP number Number


By Database

The selection menu choice By Database makes the following metrics available.


Current Space • In the space usage view: Amount of space used by the database• In the details view: Amount of space used by the tables

Number

Database Name Name of the database String

Schema Schema where the table is stored (details view only) String

Skew % A measure of data distribution across the nodes (details viewonly)

Percent

Table Table name (details view only) String

Table Count Number of tables in the database Number

By Node

The selection menu choice By Node makes the following metrics available for each workernode.


% In Use Percentage of space being used Percent

Available Space Amount of unused space on each node Number

Compression Ratio Ratio between the uncompressed size of the data and thecompressed size of the data

Number

Current Space Total amount of space occupied on the node Number




(Current User plus Replica plus System Space)

Total Space Storage capacity Number

Name Name of the node String

Node ID ID of the node Number

Replica Space Amount of space used by replica copies of data Number

Size On Disk Amount of space required to store the data Number

System Space Amount of space used by non-data files, such as system files Number

Uncompressed Size Amount of uncompressed user data Number

User Space Amount of space used by primary copies of data Number

About the Space Usage Details View

The details view displays space usage information for tables. Click a database name in theSPACE USAGE view to access the details view.

Use the sparkline to determine if the space usage has increased or decreased over time.


Add Space

Reallocate permanent disk space from one database to another. This feature is onlyavailable for Teradata Database systems.

Table Actions

Clear Filters removes any content in the filter boxes.Configure Columns allows you to choose the columns to display and set thresholds.Export creates a .csv file containing all available data. If filters are used, only filtereddata is exported.

Sparkline

For Teradata Database, see the perm space usage over the last 3 months in thesparkline, where each data point on the sparkline is the amount of space usagerecorded during a single day.

For Teradata Aster, see the current space usage.

Mouse over the sparkline to display detailed information about the space usage in aninformation balloon.

To the right of the sparkline, view the current peak and max perm for TeradataDatabase and current space usage for Teradata Aster.

Filters




Report Details

View space usage information for tables, such as the current space used, or the peakperm space used by the user.


From the portlet frame, click to access the PREFERENCES view. Set the threshold valuesfor the perm, spool, and temp space buttons in the toolbar. Preferences are applied to the ByDatabase report for Teradata Database systems. Customize the way information isdisplayed in the SPACE USAGE and details views.

Setting Filter Thresholds and Display Options

For Teradata Database systems, you can set thresholds for the By Database report andcustomize the way information is displayed.



3 Enter threshold values for buttons in the Threshold Filter Bar for the By Databasereport.

4 Select the Define KB, MB and GB as multiples of 1,000 instead of 1,024 check box tochange the display in the SPACE USAGE and details views.




6 Click OK.



CHAPTER 22

SQL Scratchpad

SQL ScratchpadThe SQL Scratchpad portlet allows you to enter SQL queries and retrieve query results froma Teradata Database system. You can connect to a system to run a single- or multi-statement query, view and export the query results, and save one or more queries and pin, ortemporarily save, results. With the object browser, you can view a list of database objectsand insert object names into queries.

About the Query Box

The query box allows you to build queries and submit them to a Teradata Database system.The results are available below the query box after you run the queries.

System Name

Connects to a Teradata Database system. Displays name of currently connectedsystem, or allows you to connect to a different system.

Disconnect

Disconnects from the Teradata Database system displayed in the System Name.

Query Box

Allows you to enter and edit SQL queries.

Load

Shows the query history from the current session or saved queries from any session.The list displays the OBJECT BROWSER.

Run

Runs statements in the query box and provides results in the query tabs. The listallows you to run a selected query and to save all queries or selected queries.


Connecting to a System

You can connect to a Teradata Database system. If you are currently connected to a system,you can switch to another system by clicking System Name.

1 Click Select System.

The SELECT SYSTEM dialog box appears.

2 Select or search for a system from the list.Teradata Database systems appear for those systems you are authorized to access.

3 Click Next.

4 In the CONNECT TO SYSTEM dialog box, enter the log on information.

5 Click Connect.

Disconnecting from a System

You can disconnect from a Teradata Database system to avoid idle connections.

1 Click Disconnect.

Select System replaces System Name in the portlet frame. The results tab is cleared.

Running a Query

You can enter and send multiple queries to a Teradata Database system. The currentlyconnected system is System Name in the portlet frame.

1 Enter one or more queries into the query box.

2 Click Run to submit all the queries you entered.

Running a Selected Query

You can run one or more adjacent queries if you do not want to run all queries that youtyped in the query box.

1 In the query box, highlight one or more complete query statements you want to run.When you select more than one adjacent query statement to run, highlight eachstatement, including the final semicolon.

2 Click the list next to Run and select Run Selected Query.

Chapter 22 SQL Scratchpad


About Query Statements

You can enter single- or multi-statement SQL queries using Data Definition Language(DDL), Data Control Language (DCL), or Data Manipulation Language (DML) statementsin the query box.

DDL statements

Begin with SQL keywords, such as CREATE, ALTER, DROP, DELETE, MODIFY,HELP, SHOW, SET, REPLACE.

DCL statements

Begin with SQL keywords GRANT, REVOKE, GIVE.

DML statements

Begin with SQL keywords, such as SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE.

For single-statement queries, enter the query, optionally followed by a semicolon. For multi-statement queries, each statement must end with a semicolon.

Cancelling a Long-Running Query

Occasionally, a query may take longer to execute than you expected. You can cancel thequery before it completes.

1 Click Cancel in the results tab to stop a single, long-running query.

Saving All Queries

You can save all queries that you enter in the query box for reuse in current or futuresessions.

1 Click the list next to Run and select Save All Queries.

2 In the ENTER QUERY NAME dialog box, enter a name for your set of queries.

3 Click Save.

4 [Optional] Click Load and click the Saved tab to view your set of saved queries.

Saving Selected Query

You can save one or more adjacent queries that you typed in the query box for reuse incurrent or future sessions.

1 In the query box, highlight one or more complete query statements you want to save.When you select more than one adjacent query statement to save, highlight eachstatement, including the final semicolon.

2 Click the list next to Run and select Save Selected Query.

3 In the ENTER QUERY NAME dialog box, enter a name for the selection.

4 Click Save.

5 [Optional] Click Load and click the Saved tab to view your saved query selection.



About Query Results

Query results are displayed in a table below the query box. You can view, pin, or exportquery results, as well as view SQL statements, Explain steps, and blocked query information.Query Tabs

Display detailed query results in separately numbered tabs. Pinned query tabs showstored results temporarily for the current session. You can pin or unpin queryresults to be stored in the current session.

Submitted Statement

Displays a portion of the SQL statement.

Results Tab

Displays a table of query results that can be exported.

SQL Tab

Displays the entire SQL statement for the selected query.

Explain Tab

Displays Explain steps for the query, including step statistics and explain text. Onlyappears when a query meets certain thresholds established by the TeradataViewpoint Administrator.

Blocked By Tab

Displays details about other queries that are blocking this query. Only appears whena query is blocked.

Export

Saves results of the currently selected Query tab to a comma-separated values (CSV)file.



Results for each statement in the query appear in a separately numbered Query tab. Resultsfor a single-statement query appear in the Query 1 tab. Results for multi-statement queriesappear in additional tabs. For example, if you submit three statements, results appear in theQuery 1, Query 2, and Query 3 tabs.

Viewing Query Results

You can view results for queries that you submit in the Query tabs.

1 Click the Query tab corresponding to your query listed in the query box.

A table with the results of your query appears in the Results tab.

Pinning Query Results

You can pin query results for later reuse in the session. If you do not pin the Query tab, newqueries overwrite results currently displayed in the tab.

1 Click the Query tab that contains the query you want to pin and click .

The tab name changes from Query to Pinned. The tab retains its number. Query resultsremain pinned until you unpin the tab or disconnect from the Teradata Databasesystem.

2 [Optional] Click to unpin your query.

The tab name changes from Pinned to Query. The results displayed in the results tab arecleared when you submit another query.


You can export data to a .csv file for further analysis and formatting. The exported .csv filecontains all available data. The format for the time, date, and some numeric values differs inthe view and exported .csv file.




About the Results Tab

The Results tab provides detailed information about your query results. To view morecolumns in a wide results tab, drag the scroll box to the right. This information is read-only.

About the SQL Tab

The SQL tab displays the SQL for the selected query. This information is read-only.


The Explain tab displays an abbreviated version of the Step statistics and Explain text thatresult from an Explain request in an SQL session. Each Explain step is uniquely identifiedwith a number where the background of the number box indicates status. This informationis read-only. The tab is only available when a query meets certain thresholds established bythe Teradata Viewpoint Administrator.












The Blocked By tab displays details about other queries that are blocking this query. Thisinformation is read-only. The tab is available as long as other queries continue to block thisquery. When the blocking query conditions are resolved, this query can then complete, andthe tab is no longer displayed.






About the Object Browser

The object browser allows you to view a list of objects on a Teradata Database system andinsert an object into a query. You can reduce the time required to build a query and reduceerrors when inserting object names in a query.

The object browser displays database objects in the connected system as a hierarchicallyorganized tree. Types of database objects include databases, users, tables, views, macros,functions, and procedures. You can use filtering to search for object types in the tree.• Expand a branch of objects in the tree by clicking next to the object type. The object

browser totals the objects found on each expanded branch by object type. If no objects ofthe type are found, the branch displays 0 items.

• Refresh the list of objects in the tree by clicking next to the Teradata Database systemname.

About Filtering Objects

Filtering allows you to display only objects that match your filter criteria in the objectbrowser. Filtering is not case-sensitive.



Filter boxes are located at each branch and sub-branch of the directory tree, under the nameof the database object. When you click the object name, the filter box appears.• Filter for databases and users by entering text in the box under the top branch of the tree.

For example, if you type dbc in the filter box at the top branch of the tree under theTeradata Database name, databases and users containing the string DBC are displayed inthe tree.

• Filter for all other database object types by entering text in the box under the object type.Object types include Tables, Views, Macros, Functions, and Procedures.

For example, if you type clear in the filter box under a Macros sub-branch of the tree,macros containing the string Clear are displayed in the tree.

Change the filter criteria by entering a new string in the filter box. Unless you type new filtercriteria or open other branches, the object browser maintains the state of the tree, includingopened branches and applied filter criteria.

You cannot use ? or * as wildcards to match single or multiple characters in filter criteria.

The object browser can display a maximum of 500 objects at each branch of the tree. Todisplay fewer results, enter filter criteria to narrow the list of database objects displayed onthe branch.

Object Types

The database objects and associated icons that display in the object browser are listed below.

Database Object Icon

Database

User

Table

View

Macro

Function

Procedure

Inserting an Object into a Query

You can insert the qualified name of a database object into a query in the query box usingthe object browser. A qualified object name is a name composed of more than one identifier,joined with the dot character (.). The identifiers together specify a database object with moreprecision than a single name.

1 Position the cursor in the query box where you want to insert the object.

2 Click the list next to the Load button and select Insert Object.

The OBJECT BROWSER opens, displaying the name of the connected TeradataDatabase system.

3 Click next to the Teradata Database system name to expand the directory tree.



4 [Optional] Enter filter criteria in the box under the Teradata Database system to finddatabases or users containing the criteria.

5 Click next to the database object type in the tree to expand that sub-branch.

6 [Optional] Enter filter criteria in the box under the object type to find objects containingthe criteria.

7 Click to highlight the object name.

8 Click Insert Object to copy the qualified object name to the query box.

The object name is inserted in the query box after the cursor location.

9 Click Close.

Example of Inserting an Object into a Query

If you select the table object Accounts of the DBC database in the Teradata Database systemDEV1, the selected identifier is inserted as a qualified object name into the query box.

1 Click DEV1 to open the directory tree.

2 Click DBC to open a database sub-branch of the directory tree. DBC is a databaseidentifier for the DEV1 system.

3 Click Tables to open all table objects under the DBC sub-branch.

4 Click Accounts in the sub-branch to select the table. Accounts is the identifier of aparticular table in the DBC database for the DEV1 system.

5 Click Insert Object to copy the qualified name to the query box.

DBC.Accounts appears after the cursor in the query box.

About the History Tab

The History tab provides the following information in the table or in mouseover text forqueries submitted in the current session:• Date and time of the query• Complete SQL statement• Amount of time to complete the query• Number of rows processed

For longer SQL statements, click to display the complete query.

You can click Load to copy the query to the query box, for later reuse or editing.

Viewing Previously Run Queries

You can view a table of queries submitted in the current session. You can load a query fromthe table for reuse in the same session.

1 Click Load and click the History tab.

The History tab provides the following information in the table or in mouseover text onqueries submitted in the current session:• Date and time of the query



• Complete SQL statement• Amount of time to complete the query• Number of rows processed

2 Click Close.

Loading a Previously Run Query

You can copy a query submitted in the current session to the query box for reuse or editing.

1 Click Load and click the History tab.

2 In the query history table, click Load for the query you want to run.

The query is copied to the query box and the History tab closes.

3 [Optional] Edit the query before running it.

4 Click Close.

About the Saved Tab

The History tab provides the following information on queries saved in the current orprevious sessions:• Name of the saved query• Complete SQL statement

For longer SQL statements, click to display the complete query.

You can click Load to copy the query to the query box, for later reuse or editing. You canalso click to delete a saved query.

Viewing Saved Queries

You can view a table of queries that you saved. You can also load a query from the table forreuse in the current or future sessions.

1 Click Load and click the Saved tab.

The name of the query and the SQL statement appear in the table of saved queries.

2 Click Close.

Loading a Saved Query

You can load a saved query into the query box for reuse or editing.


2 In the table of saved queries, click Load for the query you want to run.

The query is copied to the query box and the Saved tab closes.

3 [Optional] Edit the query in the query box before running it.

4 Click Close.



Deleting a Saved Query

You can delete a saved query that you no longer need.


2 In the table of saved queries, click for the query you want to delete.


3 Click OK.

4 Click Close.



CHAPTER 23

System Health

System HealthThe System Health portlet displays the status of monitored systems using a defined set ofmetrics and thresholds. This portlet reports status with customized states or these defaultstates: healthy, warning, critical, down, or unknown with customized or default tooltips soyou can investigate metrics exceeding healthy thresholds.

Only the Teradata Viewpoint Administrator can enable system health metrics, configure thewarning and critical thresholds, and customize the states and tooltips for your system. Themetrics and thresholds are usually selected to highlight an unusual load on the system thathas the potential to impact overall performance.

About the System Health View

The SYSTEM HEALTH view displays a summary of states for one or more systems, usingcolored text and icons to represent system health. From the SYSTEM HEALTH summaryview, click anywhere on a status icon or text to investigate metrics for that system in theSYSTEM HEALTH DETAILS view.

Default Icon TextColor

DefaultStates

Definition

Blue Healthy All metrics are within healthy ranges.

Orange Warning At least one metric exceeded the warningthreshold.

Red Critical At least one metric exceeded the criticalthreshold.

Black Down The selected system is down.

Black Unknown Status of the selected system is unknown.


If your system does not use the default states and tooltips, your Teradata ViewpointAdministrator customized the states and tooltips. You can customize the icons using theIcons tab in the PREFERENCES view.

About the System Health Details View

The SYSTEM HEALTH DETAILS view displays detailed statistics and information abouteach metric to evaluate the overall health of a system.

This view presents detailed metric information in several ways:

METRIC

Lists the names of the monitored metrics, using color to indicate metric health.Displays metric descriptions when you mouse over the name. If the TeradataViewpoint Administrator defined metrics as View Only, they are excluded from thesystem health calculation and display with a gray background.

VALUE VS THRESHOLD

Shows the current metric value in terms of warning and critical thresholds, indicatedby gaps in the bar. Displays threshold values and default or custom tooltips whenyou mouse over the bar.

The at the end of some bar graphs indicates an unbounded metric, which havenumerical values with no upper limit. The is red when the unbounded metric valueexceeds 1.2 times the critical threshold.

LAST nn MIN

Displays a sparkline with the trend in metric values over the selected duration of 15,30, or 60 minutes, suggesting whether the system is expected to degrade or improvein the future. Line color indicates metric health.

VALUE

Shows the metric value at the last system sampling, using color to indicate metrichealth.

Chapter 23 System Health


Viewing Component Down Details

When the COMPONENT DOWN metric has a value of one or greater, the SYSTEMHEALTH DETAILS view displays detailed information so that you can investigate theextent of your exposure to components that are down.

1 From the SYSTEM HEALTH DETAILS view, click the COMPONENT DOWN metricname or value.

2 View the list of component types and the number of components affected.

System Health Details View Metrics

Metrics appearing in your SYSTEM HEALTH details view are selected for you by theTeradata Viewpoint Administrator. Available metrics differ depending on the type of systemyou choose.


System Metrics

Metric Description

Active Sessions Number of sessions with active queries

AMP CPU Skew Comparison of CPU use on the busiest AMP to the average AMP

AMP I/O Skew Comparison of disk use on the busiest AMP to the average AMP

AMP Worker Tasks Average number of AMP worker tasks in use on each AMP

Component Down Number of components, such as BYNETs or AMPs, that are down

(CPU) System Average percentage of CPU time spent in system (kernel) mode

(CPU) User Average percentage of CPU time spent in user mode

CPU Utilization Average node CPU use. CPU is calculated as the sum of the user CPUand system CPU usage percentages.

(CPU) Wait I/O Average percentage of CPU time spent waiting for I/O

DBC Disk Space Available DBC disk space in use

Max Disk by AMP Available disk space currently in use

Max Spool by AMP Available spool space in use

Memory Failures Memory failures across all nodes

Memory Used Largest amount of memory used by a single node in kilobytes


Node I/O Skew Comparison of disk use on the busiest node to the average node

System Heartbeat Canary query showing the response time of the most recent systemheartbeat in milliseconds

Total Disk Space Percentage of total disk space currently in use



Metric Description

Additional Canaries Additional canary queries that are defined for the system and used aspart of the monitoring of system health


System Metrics

Metric Description

Active Sessions Number of users and applications currently connected to database

Component Down Number of nodes that are not available

Component Passive Number of nodes not processing queries but can be made ready toprocess queries when needed

CPU Average node CPU use

Max Disk by Node Largest percentage of used disk space on a node

Memory Average node memory use


Node I/O Skew Comparison of I/O use on the busiest node to the average node

Queen Disk Space Percentage of used disk space on the queen node

Replication Factor Number of copies of the user data

Total Space Percentage of used space to overall storage capacity


The PREFERENCES view allows you to customize the portlet to display information that ismost useful to you.


Systems

Select the systems to monitor in the SYSTEM HEALTH and SYSTEM HEALTHDETAILS views.

Icons

Select an icon style to use in the SYSTEM HEALTH view.

Trend Interval

Select the interval for the SYSTEM HEALTH trend line. Choose from among 15, 30,or 60 minutes of historical data.

Selecting Systems to Monitor

Use the Systems tab in the PREFERENCES view to select the systems to monitor in thesummary and details views.






4 Select the check boxes of systems to display.


6 Click OK.

Selecting the System Health Icon Style

Use the Icons tab in the PREFERENCES view to select the icon style to display in theSYSTEM HEALTH view.


2 Click the Icons tab.


4 Select the icon style to use in the SYSTEM HEALTH view.


6 Click OK.

Setting the System Health Trend Interval

Use the Trend Interval tab in the PREFERENCES view to set the length of time used toplot the sparklines in the SYSTEM HEALTH DETAILS view. This interval applies to allmetrics selected for this view.

The Example pane provides a sample of how the SYSTEM HEALTH view might look afterthe change.


2 Click the Trend Interval tab.


4 From the Interval list, select an interval.


6 Click OK.





CHAPTER 24

Today's Statistics

Today's StatisticsThe Todays Statistics portlet allows you to monitor current resource-use statistics andcompare them to statistics collected during the same period one or more weeks in the past.Additionally, you can monitor and compare the performance of multiple Teradata Databasesystems by adding a Todays Statistics portlet to the portal page for each monitored system.

The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator typically uses the Todays Statistics portlet todetermine if users are getting value from their Teradata Database system. Data is presentedin a table, allowing you to compare metric values collected recently (today and as far in thepast as yesterday) to values collected during the same time period up to 999 weeks in thepast. This view is refreshed once every 2 minutes with displayed values updated for eachuser-selected metric.

About the Today's Statistics View

The TODAYS STATISTICS view displays a statistical analysis of system-resource use over auser-defined time period. A table lists the monitored metrics and compares current statisticsto statistics from the same time period 1 or more weeks in the past. Metrics are grouped intocategories so that metric data collected at the same frequency is displayed together in theview. The view is refreshed every 2 minutes.

Table columns provide the following information:

STATISTIC

The name of the monitored metric.

SINCE DATE, X AM/PM

The value of the metric at the date and time the data was last collected.

This column heading is used for metrics in the query category.

LAST X HOUR(S)

The value of the metric from a user-specified number of hours ago, up to 999 hoursin the past, until the current time.

SAME PERIOD X WEEK(S) AGO

The value of the metric over the same time period as LAST X HOUR(S), up to 999weeks in the past.


SINCE X AM/PM TODAY/YESTERDAY

The value of the metric calculated from a user-specified hour of the day, either todayor as far in the past as yesterday, until the current time.

SAME PERIOD X WEEK(S) AGO

The value of the metric over the same time period as SINCE X AM/PM TODAY/YESTERDAY, up to 999 weeks in the past.

To display statistical data in the TODAYS STATISTICS view, the Teradata ViewpointAdministrator must first enable the appropriate Teradata Viewpoint collectors, includingQuery count, System statistics, and Canary queries. The Teradata Viewpoint Administratoralso specifies the data collection rate for each collector.

Factors external to Teradata Viewpoint can also affect the collection and display of statisticaldata:• Query Logging. The Teradata System Administrator must enable query logging on the

Teradata Database system.• Data Collection. Query data must have been collected during all time periods selected on

the Sampling Interval tab in the PREFERENCES view. Teradata Viewpoint collectorsand query logging must have been enabled during all selected time periods in order forTODAYS STATISTICS data to display correctly.

Use the PREFERENCES view to select the system and metrics category to monitor, setmetrics thresholds, and set the sampling interval. The heading for the second columndepends on the selections made in the PREFERENCES view and how frequently data foreach metric is collected. For example, the heading LAST 2 HOURS appears when thesampling interval is 2 hours and data for the previous 2 hours is available. The same headingcould appear as SINCE AUG 20, 2:10 AM if the sampling interval is set to 2 hours and thedata was last collected more than 2 hours ago.

Today's Statistics View Metrics

Information about available metrics is provided in the tables. Use the Metrics tab in thePREFERENCES view to select metrics for display in the TODAYS STATISTICS view.

The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator must enable the appropriate collectors to calculateand display statistical data in the TODAYS STATISTICS view. When the Canary Queries

Chapter 24 Today's Statistics


Collector is the source for a metric, the data displayed is always the heartbeat query for theselected system.

System Metrics

The System Statistics collector gathers system metrics. System metrics are calculated as anaverage.




Percent


Percent

AWT Average number of AMP worker tasks (AWTs) in use oneach AMP

Number


Percent

System CPU Average CPU time spent in system mode Percent

Total Disk Space Total disk space currently in use Number

User CPU Average CPU time spent in user mode Percent


Query Metrics

The Query Count collector gathers query metrics.



Number


Average time in milliseconds it takes to receive the firstresponse

Number


Maximum time in milliseconds it takes to receive the firstresponse

Number


Minimum time in milliseconds it takes to receive the firstresponse

Number


Standard deviation time in milliseconds it takes to receive thefirst response

Number


Number

Spool Usage Avg Average amount of spool in bytes the query used Number

Spool Usage Max Maximum amount of spool in bytes the query used Number

Spool Usage Min Minimum amount of spool in bytes the query used Number




Spool Usage Stddev Standard deviation of amount of spool in bytes the queryused

Number

Performance Metrics

The Canary Queries collector gathers performance metrics. Performance metrics arecalculated as an average.


Response Time Average response time in milliseconds of the selected canaryquery

Number


Number


The PREFERENCES view allows you to customize the portlet to monitor key metric trendsto determine if you are getting value from your Teradata Database system. Only one systemcan be selected for each portlet instance.


System

Select a Teradata Database system to monitor.

Metrics

Select appropriate metrics, by category, for display in the view, and set values forhighlighting metrics beyond a specified threshold. Metric values that exceed thethreshold are displayed in the exception color.

Sampling Interval

Specify the time periods from which statistics are displayed. Set the number of hours(up to 999) prior to the current time, and define a comparison period up to 999weeks in the past.










6 Click OK.


Use the Metrics tab in the PREFERENCES view to select a metrics category to monitor andto set thresholds to trigger the highlighting of values that exceed the thresholds.




4 Select a metrics category.When the Canary Queries collector is the source for a metric, the data displayed isalways the heartbeat query for the selected system.

5 In the Metric column, select check boxes for the metrics you want to monitor in theview.

6 [Optional] For each metric selected, enter a Threshold value.Values exceeding the threshold are highlighted in the view using the exception color.


8 Click OK.

Setting the Sampling Interval

Use the Sampling Interval tab in the PREFERENCES view to set the length of time used tocalculate the statistics shown in the TODAYS STATISTICS view. The Sampling Intervalapplies to all metrics selected for display.


2 Click the Sampling Interval tab.


4 Enter the number of hours (up to 999) in the Statistics will be sampled during the lastX hour(s).The value you enter determines the sampling interval for columns 2 and 3 of theTODAYS STATISTICS view.

5 Enter the since sampling interval as follows:

a Select the time of day that begins the interval.

b Select Today or Yesterday from the list box.



This value pair defines a start time up to 48 hours in the past for calculating column 4 ofthe TODAYS STATISTICS view.

6 Enter a value for the comparison period, up to 999 weeks in the past.The value you enter defines the number of weeks in the past for calculating column 5 ofthe TODAYS STATISTICS view.


8 Click OK.



CHAPTER 25

TVS Monitor

TVS MonitorThe TVS Monitor portlet allows you to view statistics on data temperature and storagegrade of cylinders allocated in Teradata Virtual Storage (TVS). Statistics reflect currentrelationships between data temperature and storage grade, and historical trends in themanagement of storage grades based on data temperature. This portlet is disabled by defaultand must be enabled using the Portlet Library portlet.

Temperature and grade metrics help assess storage requirements for your data, as well asfine tune the balance between disk performance and data-access demands. Suppose thatstatistics indicate an increasing proportion of hot data allocated to slow-grade storage. If faststorage is currently full, the Teradata System Administrator might consider upgrading tofaster storage. If fast storage is not full, the Teradata System Administrator should verify thatdata migration and metrics collection have been enabled to ensure the slow migration of hotdata over time.

TVS Monitor Concepts

About Storage Grade

Storage grade refers to the access rate capabilities of disk storage. Access speed is graded asslow, medium, or fast. Performance criteria for storage grade include physical speed of diskread-write access, electronics, and buffer memory.

Slow-grade storage involves more I/O time than fast-grade storage. Cylinders on physicaldisk drives are often associated with slow- and medium-grade storage. Cylinders on solid-state drives can be associated with fast-grade storage.

Typically, Teradata Virtual Storage optimizes cylinder allocation by reserving fast-gradestorage for frequently accessed data, and slow-grade storage for infrequently accessed data.Medium-grade storage is allocated for all other data-access frequencies.

About Data Temperature

Data temperature refers to the frequency of access to data stored in space types managed byTeradata Virtual Storage (TVS). Data is considered hot, warm, or cold.

Data temperature is not static, but evolves over time, based on data-access patterns trackedby TVS. Data temperature increases the more often it is accessed, and decreases as accessbecomes less frequent.


About Space Types

A space type is a classification of how disk space is allocated in Teradata Database. Each spacetype, such as perm, spool, or temp, is conventionally associated with a particular kind ofstored data. For example, the perm space type is disk space allocated to storage of tables,indexes, and permanent journals in the database, and typically is the largest space type in thesystem.

Teradata Virtual Storage reports on how space types are dynamically managed, according topatterns of data access and the grade of the storage device.

Selecting a View

You can select different views of the relationships between data temperature, storage grade,and space type.

1 Click one of the following:• to see the Cylinder Distribution by Grade view.• to see the Historical Cylinder Distribution by Grade view.• to see the Cylinder Allocation by Temperature and Grade view.

Viewing Cylinder Distribution by Grade

The Cylinder Distribution by Grade view displays graphs of the current proportionalallocation of cold, warm, and hot data in slow-, medium-, and fast-grade storage, as well asthe total number of cylinders assigned to each storage grade. The dashed line in each graphmarks peak allocation for the storage grade in number and percent of cylinders, aggregatedover the past 30 days.

The percent values in the graphs and mouseover text that are displayed for this view indicatethe percentage of the total number of cylinders in the selected grade.

1 Click the Slow Storage graph to display metrics on total slow cylinders, datatemperatures, and peak allocation for slow storage.

2 Click the Medium Storage graph to display metrics on total medium cylinders, datatemperatures, and peak allocation for medium storage.

3 Click the Fast Storage graph to display metrics on total fast cylinders, data temperatures,and peak allocation for fast storage.

Viewing Historical Cylinder Distribution by Grade

The Historical Cylinder Distribution by Grade view displays data temperature trends overtime in each storage grade. The horizontal axis marks days and the vertical axis marksnumber of cylinders, in millions. You can change how temperature allocation metrics andtotal number of cylinders are displayed for a specific point in time.

The percent values that are displayed in the graph and in the mouseover text for this viewindicate the percentage of the total number of cylinders in the selected grade.

Chapter 25 TVS Monitor


1 Mouse over the graph to display the time marker.

2 Move the time marker with the mouse to change the display of day and hour.

3 [Optional] Select a grade from the list to show proportion of cylinders, allocated bytemperature, for the grade.

4 [Optional] Select a time period from the list to show proportion of cylinders, allocatedby temperature, over the previous week or month.

Viewing Cylinder Allocation by Temperature and Grade

The Cylinder Allocation by Temperature and Grade view displays the currentrelationships between data temperature, storage grade, and space type. Change the displayof the matrix and the Space Types by Cylinder Percentage table to see allocation metricsfor a specific combination of temperature, grade, or space.

The percent values that are displayed in the matrix for this view indicate the percentage ofthe total of non-allocated space of the selected cylinder type.

1 Select a cylinder-allocation space type from the list above the matrix to display a spacetype in the matrix and space-types table.

2 To filter the data shown in the space-types table, do one of the following:

a Click a row label (HOT, WARM, COLD) in the matrix to filter the space-types tableby data temperature allocation.

b Click a column label (SLOW, MEDIUM, FAST) in the bottom row of the matrix tofilter the space-types table by storage grade.

c Click any cell in the matrix to filter the space-types table by temperature-gradecombination.

3 Select a temperature, grade, or temperature-grade combination from the list in thespace-types table to filter space types by temperature, grade, or temperature-gradecombination.



About Space Types by Cylinder Percentage Table

The Space Types by Cylinder Percentage table in the Cylinder Allocation by Temperatureand Grade view provides metrics about space types, storage grades, and data temperaturesmanaged by Teradata Virtual Storage.

SPACE

Lists the conventional space types (Perm, WAL, Spool, RSpool, Depot, Journal,Durable, Other) as well as the unused cylinder space (Free).

GRADE

Lists the storage grade (Slow, Medium, Fast).

CYL

Lists the count of cylinders for a given space type, storage grade, or type-gradecombination, in millions of cylinders or thousands (K) of cylinders.

% SPACE

Lists the percentage of cylinders for a storage grade in a given space type. When youfilter the matrix by space type, the sum of this column for the space type is 100%. For



example, if the number of cylinders (CYL) for WAL is 200 for slow grade, 400 formedium grade, and 200 for fast grade, the % SPACE column lists 25 for slow, 50 formedium, and 25 for fast, for a total of 100%. When you filter the table by All Zones,the sum of this column for all storage grades for a given space type is 100%. Thiscolumn is only displayed if you filter the matrix by space type or if you filter the tableby All Zones.

% COLD

Lists the percentage of cylinders for a given space type-grade combination allocatedto cold data. The sum of % COLD, % WARM, and % HOT is 100% for a given spacetype-grade combination. Only displayed if you filter the table by storage grade, or byAll Zones.

% WARM

Lists the percentage of cylinders for a given space type-grade combination allocatedto warm data. The sum of % COLD, % WARM, and % HOT is 100% for a givenspace type-grade combination. Only displayed if you filter the table by storage grade,or by All Zones.

% HOT

Lists the percentage of cylinders for a given space type-grade combination allocatedto hot data. The sum of % COLD, % WARM, and % HOT is 100% for a given spacetype-grade combination. Only displayed if you filter the table by storage grade, or byAll Zones.

% SLOW

Lists the percentage of cylinders for a given space type-temperature combinationallocated to slow grade storage. The sum of % SLOW, % MEDIUM, and % FAST is100% for a given space type-temperature combination. Only displayed if you filterthe table by data temperature, or by All Zones.

% MEDIUM

Lists the percentage of cylinders for a given space type-temperature combinationallocated to medium grade storage. The sum of % SLOW, % MEDIUM, and % FASTis 100% for a given space type-temperature combination. Only displayed if you filterthe table by data temperature, or by All Zones.

% FAST

Lists the percentage of cylinders for a given space type-temperature combinationallocated to fast grade storage. The sum of % SLOW, % MEDIUM, and % FAST is100% for a given space type-temperature combination. Only displayed if you filterthe table by data temperature, or by All Zones.

% OF ZONE

Lists the percentage of cylinders for a given space type in the temperature-gradecombination. The sum of cylinder percentages in the temperature-grade-combination zone is 100%. Only displayed if you filter the table by a temperature-grade combination.





CHAPTER 26

Viewpoint Monitoring

Viewpoint MonitoringThe Viewpoint Monitoring portlet allows you to analyze resource usage trends on one ormore Teradata Viewpoint servers or other managed servers. Trends are graphed accordingto metrics, such as CPU, memory, and throughput within a specified time range.

The VIEWPOINT MONITORING view displays a graph with time on the horizontal axis,metric values on the vertical axis, and a different color for each metric plot line. Plot linesshow the average metric values as a line and have enhanced interactive features, such asperformance envelopes and information balloons that show the actual, minimum, andmaximum metric values. Time-range buttons allow you to monitor current usage within thelast hour or view usage trends over the last day, week, month, 3 months, or 6 months.

The PREFERENCES view allows you to select and organize metrics to display, setthresholds, and adjust the vertical axis range for each metric.

About the Viewpoint Monitoring View

The VIEWPOINT MONITORING view displays a graph that shows Teradata Viewpointserver resource usage. One or more Teradata Viewpoint servers can be monitored in thetime range using the same or different metrics. Metrics can be selected with differentthresholds and vertical axis ranges.


Toolbar

Contains the time-range buttons. Select a time-range button to change the graph.Export creates a .csv file containing selected data.

Line Graph

Plots the time range on the horizontal axis and the metric values on the vertical axis.The plot line is a colored line that represents the average metric values. Click a plotline to see the highlighted plot line and performance envelope in a lighter shade ofthe assigned color. The performance envelope represents the upper and lower metricvalues.

Time Range

Shows the range of time selected with the time-range button on the toolbar. Forexample, if one hour is selected, times from the previous hour appear across thebottom of the graph.


Metrics

Lists up to 10 metrics that are defined in the PREFERENCES view. Each listposition is assigned a color and a check box. The metric name appears along withthe name of the system being monitored, if there is more than one system enabled.Select a metric name to highlight the plot line and see the performance envelope inthe graph.

About Metric Thresholds

Set thresholds to highlight metric values that are outside normal operating ranges. Setmaximum vertical-axis ranges to limit the range of values displayed for selected metrics.After a metric threshold is set in the PREFERENCES view, the threshold line is displayedacross the graph with the threshold value to the right of the graph when you select a metricplot line. As you mouse over the selected plot line, information balloons display the datapoint value and the minimum and maximum performance envelope values. The plot line andinformation balloons change to red when the threshold is exceeded during the time range.Threshold settings are optional and can be set any time after the metric has been configured.

Chapter 26 Viewpoint Monitoring


Setting the Time Range

You can set the time range that is used to plot the graph.






About the Toolbar

The toolbar allows you to choose the time range to display in the graph. The graph displaysthe oldest data on the left and the most recent data on the right. For each metric, data iscollected every 15 seconds and averaged according to the time range chosen.

Button Description

1 hour Displays the metric values for the last hour, plotted by minute

1 day Displays the metric values for the last 24 hours, plotted by 15-minute periods

1 week Displays the metric values for the last week, plotted by hour

1 mo Displays the metric values for the last month, plotted by 4-hour periods

3 mo Displays the metric values for the last 3 months, plotted by 12-hour periods

6 mo Displays the metric values for the last 6 months, plotted by day

Clicking a different time-range button causes the portlet to immediately recalculate andupdate the graph based on the data points collected for the metrics.




Exporting Metrics

You can export data to a .csv file for further analysis and formatting. The exported .csv filecontains data for the selected time period. The minimum, average, and maximum is exportedfor all metrics configured in the PREFERENCES view.


Option Frequency

1 hour Data points at 1 minute intervals

1 day Data points at 15 minute intervals

1 week Data points at 1 hour intervals



6 mo Data points at a 1 day interval

2 Click .




Viewpoint Monitoring Metrics

The following metrics can be used to analyze resource usage.

CPU Metrics


CPU Idle Percent of total CPU time spent idle Percent

CPU Involuntary Wait Percent of total CPU time spent waiting involuntarily Percent

CPU I/O Wait Percent of total CPU time spent waiting for I/O Percent

CPU System Percent of total CPU time used by system processes Percent

CPU User Percent of total CPU time used by user processes Percent

CPU Usage Percent of CPU time used by user and system processes Percent

Memory Metrics


Memory Buffers Amount of memory currently used as a disk buffer cache KB

Memory Cache Amount of cache memory KB

Memory Free Amount of idle memory KB




Memory Total Total amount of physical memory in the system KB

Memory Total Swap Amount of memory used for swap space KB

Memory Usage Total amount of memory used by the system, calculated as thetotal memory minus the amount of free memory

KB

Memory Virtual Amount of virtual memory used KB

Procs Sleeping Number of processes in uninterruptible sleep Number

Procs Waiting Number of processes waiting for run time Number

Swap In Amount of memory swapped in from disk per second KB/sec

Swap Out Amount of memory swapped to disk per second KB/sec

Throughput Metrics


Avg. Jobs Last Minutes Average number of processes running or able to run duringthe last minute

Number

Avg. Jobs Last FiveMinutes

Average number of processes running or able to run duringthe last 5 minutes

Number

Avg. Jobs Last FifteenMinutes

Average number of processes running or able to run duringthe last 15 minutes

Number

Blocks Received Number of blocks received from a block device per second Number

Blocks Sent Number of blocks sent to a block device per second Number

Context Switches perSecond

Number of context switches per second Number

Interrupts per Second Number of interrupts per second Number



In this view, you can:• Add metrics to monitor and display.• Delete metrics that you do not want to monitor or display.• Select the ENABLE check box to plot the metric in the graph.• Clear the ENABLE check box to remove the metric from the graph, but still list it below

the graph.• Reorder metrics to change their position and color.• Select systems to monitor and display.• Set a threshold that helps you track the performance of each metric.• Set a vertical axis range to limit the maximum value to display.



Adding Metrics

You can add metrics that are plotted in the graph.


2 [Optional] Select the ENABLE check box to enable the metric for display.

3 [Optional] Select a system from the list.The SYSTEM list is available when more than one Teradata Viewpoint server is enabledfor the Data Collection Service.

4 Select a metric from the list.You can add or remove metrics. Up to 10 metrics can be listed.

5 [Optional] Enter a THRESHOLD value.

6 [Optional] Enter a VERTICAL AXIS RANGE value.

7 [Optional] Click and drag the row to reorder the metrics for display.


9 Click OK.

Changing the Metrics Display Order

You can change the order of the metrics that are listed below the graph. Reordering themetric list affects which color is assigned to the metric.




4 On the metric row, click and drag the row to its new location.


6 Click OK.

Enabling and Disabling Metrics

You can enable and disable metrics from the graph. When a metric is disabled, the metricplot line is not displayed in the graph; however, data points are still being collected, so themetric is included in the list under the graph and can be reactivated at a later time.






• Clear ENABLE on the metric line to disable the metric.• Select ENABLE on the metric line to enable the metric.


5 Click OK.

Deleting Metrics

You can delete metrics from the graph. When a metric is deleted in the PREFERENCESview, the metric plot line is not displayed in the graph, and the metric is not included in thelist.


2 Select the Metrics tab.


4 Click on the metric row of the metric you want to delete.

The metric row disappears.


6 Click OK.





CHAPTER 27

Workload Designer

Workload DesignerThe Workload Designer portlet allows you to create rulesets for workload management inTeradata Database. The available options are different if Teradata Database is running onSUSE Linux Enterprise Server version 10 or lower, or SLES 11 (SLES 10 or SLES 11). Youcan define, control, balance, and refine rules for managing workloads. Use the followingfeatures to manage workloads:• Rulesets, which are collections of related filters, throttles, events, states, and workload

rules• States, which cause actions when a specific combination of planned environment and

health condition occur• Sessions limits, including query sessions limits, utility sessions limits, and utility limits• Filters, which reject queries• Throttles, which limit queries• Exceptions, which cause actions when one or more specific events occur• Classification criteria, which determine which queries use which rules

The WORKLOAD DESIGNER view provides controls to select a system and create, edit,view, and perform other actions on rulesets on that system.

The Workload Designer Ruleset views provide controls that allow you to refine settings for asystem, states, sessions, filters, throttles, workloads, and exceptions.

Workload Designer Concepts

About TASM and IWM Systems in SLES 10 and SLES 11

Teradata Workload Management offers different strategies, depending on the platform youselect:

TASM for Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW) platforms

Teradata Active System Management (TASM) is a product available on EDWplatforms to perform full workload management in Teradata Database.

IWM for base EDW and appliance platforms

Teradata Integrated Workload Management (IWM) is a Teradata Database featureincluded on base EDW and appliance platforms to perform basic workloadmanagement. Base EDW platforms can optionally purchase TASM.


TASM offers a full workload management feature set. IWM workload management featuresare more limited and have different options in SLES 10 and SLES 11, depending on thesystem you select:

States

The SLES 10 and SLES 11 IWM systems have no options for custom states, healthconditions, planned environments, or state-specific values for query sessions, filters,and throttles. IWM systems only use the Base state, Normal health condition, andAlways planned environment. The SLES 10 IWM system has no options forworkloads.

Virtual Partitions

The SLES 10 and SLES 11 IWM system has no options for virtual partitions.

Workload Management Methods

The SLES 11 IWM system has no options for the SLG Tiers workload managementmethod. The IWM system only uses the Tactical and Timeshare managementmethods.

Exceptions

The SLES 11 IWM system has no options for ruleset exceptions or non-tacticalworkload exceptions. IWM systems only use tactical workload exceptions. The SLES10 IWM system has no options for exceptions.

About the Workload Designer View

The WORKLOAD DESIGNER view shows summary information about rulesets. Items inthe options list depend on whether you are the ruleset owner. If a ruleset is locked bysomeone else, you have fewer options than if you are the ruleset owner. The Working,Ready, and Active sections contain the following options:

Working

Names and descriptions of rulesets that are being edited. In Working, you can createand import rulesets. Rulesets in Ready can be copied to Working for editing.Rulesets in Working can also appear in Ready and Active.

Ready

Rulesets that have been saved to the Teradata system, but are not active. A rulesetmust be in Ready before it is copied to Active. The Active ruleset cannot be deletedfrom Ready.

Active

Active ruleset on the Teradata system. The only option available in the options list, ifyou have permissions, is to deactivate the ruleset.

Ruleset background color indicates synchronization between the Working and Readysections. Gray in both sections indicates that the same version of the ruleset is in bothsections. Blue indicates that the ruleset has been modified in the Working section since itwas last saved to the Ready section.

Chapter 27 Workload Designer


TASM ruleset migration is performed automatically during the Teradata Database upgrade.

About Ruleset Options

The WORKLOAD DESIGNER view shows individual rulesets and specific options for eachruleset based on the permissions assigned to your role and the section in which the ruleset islocated.

Working

The Working section contains rulesets that are being edited. Any ruleset listed in Workingcan also be listed in Ready and Active. Available options are:

Make Ready

Copies the ruleset to the Teradata server and to the Ready section.

Make Active

Makes the ruleset the active ruleset on the Teradata server. Copies the ruleset to theReady and Active sections.

View/Edit

Opens the ruleset for viewing and/or editing.

Show All

Lists all ruleset attributes on one page.

Lock

Locks the ruleset so only the lock creator can edit the ruleset.

Unlock

Unlocks the ruleset so others can edit the ruleset.

Clone

Creates a copy of the ruleset. This option is useful if you want to use an existingruleset as a base or template to create a ruleset.

Export

Exports the ruleset XML file so you can view the file in a browser or save the file to alocation you specify. Use with the Import button to copy a ruleset from one systemto another.

Delete

Removes the ruleset from the Working section.

Ready

The Ready section lists rulesets saved to the Teradata server. Authorized users can create aruleset and add it to the Ready section. Then, from the Ready section, you can select Copyto Working Rulesets and edit the ruleset. Available options are:



Activate

Makes the ruleset the active ruleset on the Teradata server.

Copy to Working Rulesets

Copies the ruleset to the Working section.

Delete

Removes the ruleset from the Teradata server.

Active

The Active section contains the active ruleset on the Teradata server. If you have permission,the only available option is to Deactivate the current ruleset. In SLES 11, the deactivateoption is not available because there must always be an active ruleset.

Creating a Ruleset

A ruleset is a complete collection of related filters, throttles, events, states, and workloadrules. You can create multiple rulesets, but only one ruleset is active on the Teradata server ata time. After creating a ruleset, you can use the toolbar buttons to specify settings, such asstates, sessions, and workloads. New rulesets are automatically locked so only the owner canedit the ruleset.1 From the WORKLOAD DESIGNER view, select a system from the list.

2 Click Create.

3 Enter a ruleset name.

4 [Optional] Enter a description.

5 Click Save.

6 [Optional] Specify settings using the tabs in the General view, such as Intervals andBypass.

7 [Optional] Click States and create a state matrix.

8 [Optional] Click Sessions and create any of the following:• Query Sessions• Utility Limits• Utility Sessions

9 [Optional] Click Filters and create a filter.

10 [Optional] Click Throttles and create a system throttle.

11 [Optional] Click Workloads and create a workload.

12 [Optional] Click Exceptions and create an exception.

Editing a Ruleset

In the WORKLOAD DESIGNER view, you can edit ruleset properties. The TeradataViewpoint Administrator must grant your role permission to edit rulesets so you cancomplete this action. Without permission to edit the ruleset, the menu option is View andthe ruleset view is read-only.



1 From the WORKLOAD DESIGNER view, select a system from the list.

2 In the local Working section, click the ruleset name.

3 Specify settings using the toolbar buttons and tabbed views.

4 Click Save after making changes in each view.

Cloning a Ruleset

You can clone a ruleset to make an exact copy of the ruleset, except for the name anddescription. Cloning is a convenient way to create a ruleset using the criteria of an existingruleset as a base.


2 In the local Working section, click the ruleset and click Clone.

An exact copy of the ruleset is made, and the General view appears.

3 Enter a name.


5 Click Save.

6 Specify additional settings using the toolbar buttons and tabbed views.

7 Click Save.

Deleting a Ruleset

Deleting a ruleset removes the ruleset and all associated information. The TeradataViewpoint Administrator must grant your role permission to edit rulesets so you cancomplete this action.


2 In the local Working section or the system Ready section, click the ruleset , and clickDelete.

3 Click Delete.

The ruleset is deleted from the section.

Importing a Ruleset

The import and export options can be used to copy a ruleset from one system to another.The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator must grant your role permission to edit rulesets soyou can complete this action. Only rulesets exported from Workload Designer and aTeradata Database of the same release can be imported.


2 Click Import.

3 Enter a name for the imported ruleset.

4 Click Browse.

5 Locate and select the saved ruleset file.



Note: Exported ruleset files might be stored in the download area configured for yourbrowser.

6 Click Save.

Exporting a Ruleset

The import and export options can be used to copy a ruleset from one system to another. TheTeradata Viewpoint Administrator must grant your role permission to edit rulesets so youcan complete this action. Only rulesets exported from Workload Designer and a TeradataDatabase of the same release can be imported.


2 In the local Working section, click the ruleset , and click Export.

3 Click Save.

The ruleset file is saved to your download area or the location you specify, depending onyour browser settings.

Showing All Criteria in a Ruleset

You can display a read-only summary of all settings and state-specific values for a singleruleset.


2 In the local Working section, click the ruleset , and click Show All.

3 [Optional] Do any of the following:• Click Collapse All to hide all sections of the view.• Click Print to print the full summary.• Click the section name to show or hide individual sections of the view.

Copying a Ruleset to the Teradata System

When you are finished editing a ruleset in the Working section, copy the ruleset to theReady section on the Teradata system. The Teradata Viewpoint Administrator must grantyour role permission to edit rulesets so you can complete this action. After copying a rulesetto the Ready section, you can make the ruleset the active ruleset on the Teradata system.

Note: Copying a ruleset to a Teradata system that is under heavy load could take longer thanexpected.

1 From the WORKLOAD DESIGNER view, select the Teradata system containing theruleset you want to copy.

2 In the Working section, click the ruleset , and click Make Ready.

Activating a Ruleset

Activating a ruleset copies the ruleset to the active state on the selected system. Only oneruleset is active on the system at a time. A ruleset activated from the local Working section iscopied to the Ready section before being made active. The Teradata ViewpointAdministrator must grant your role permission to edit rulesets so you can complete thisaction.




2 To make the ruleset active, do one of the following:• From a ruleset in the Working section, click the ruleset , and click Make Active.• From a ruleset in the Ready section, click the ruleset , and click Activate.

Deactivating a Ruleset

Deactivating a ruleset removes the ruleset from the active state on the selected system. TheTeradata Viewpoint Administrator must grant your role permission to edit rulesets so youcan complete this action.


2 In the system Active section, click the ruleset , and click Deactivate.In SLES 11, the deactivate option is not available because there must always be an activeruleset.

About Ruleset Locks

An exclusive lock can be placed on a ruleset so that the ruleset cannot be edited, deleted, orotherwise modified except by the owner of the lock. A ruleset is automatically locked by theuser when it is created and each time changes to the ruleset are saved. Use theWORKLOAD DESIGNER view to lock and unlock rulesets. The Teradata ViewpointAdministrator must grant your role permission to edit rulesets so you can complete thisaction.

The WORKLOAD DESIGNER view displays the ruleset lock status:

Option Description

Locked

Unlocked

The ruleset views display the ruleset lock status:

Option Description

Unlocked

Locked by the current user

Locked by another user

Locking or Unlocking a Ruleset

Locking a ruleset prevents others from editing or deleting the ruleset. The TeradataViewpoint Administrator must grant your role permission to edit rulesets so you cancomplete this action.


2 In the local Working section, click the ruleset , and click Lock or Unlock.



About the Ruleset General View

The ruleset General view displays general attributes of a ruleset. The view appears after youclick the General button on the ruleset toolbar. The General view appears by default whencreating, editing, cloning, or viewing a ruleset. This view contains the following tabs:

General

Ruleset name and description.

Intervals

Collection and reporting intervals.

Option Description

Event Interval How often event thresholds are checked.

Note: If system or workload events have Simple or Averaging qualificationtimes, then the event interval must be less than or equal to the lowestqualification time for any of the events.

DashboardInterval

How often workload statistics are collected.

Logging Interval How often workload and exception logs are written.

ExceptionInterval

How often exception thresholds are checked.

Blocker

Settings for responding to throttled blockers. The log is located at DBC.TDWMEventLog.Selecting Log only logs the blocker. Abort or Release logs the action after the abort or releaseoccurs.

Option Description

Block Cycles Number of intervals over which the query must be blocked before the specifiedBlock Action is taken.

Block Action Action to perform in response to query blocking.

Activation

Options available when the ruleset is activated. The feature is available when the option isselected. The Events and States feature is available by default and cannot be disabled.

Option Description

Filters and UtilitySessions

Filters reject user queries. Utility Sessions limit the number of sessions a specificutility can use.

System Throttlesand SessionControl

System throttles delay or reject queries at the system level. Session Controlmakes it possible to create session parameters.



Option Description

Workloads A ruleset workload is a group of queries that share characteristics so that a set ofworkload management controls can be applied to the group. Workloads arealways available in SLES 11.

Events and States Events are occurrences that trigger a response from the system. States areintersections of health conditions and planned environments.

Bypass

Users, accounts, and profiles whose queries are allowed to bypass system filters andthrottles.

Option Description

Source Type Type of query source. You can select one or more items from each availablesource type. The dbc and tdwm user names cannot be removed.

Filter Limits your choices in the source list.

Items Lists the names of all available query sources of the selected type.

Bypass Selected sources, listed by source type. Queries from each of the listed querysources will bypass system filters and throttles for this ruleset.

Decay

In SLES 11, you can enable timeshare decay, which automatically decreases the resourceaccess rate of long-running queries in a Timeshare workload over time.

Limits/Reserves

In SLES 11, you can limit the resources available to the system per planned environment.Limits are defined as a percentage of CPU or I/O. You can also reserve AWTs for use by thesystem per planned environment.

Option Description

CPU Limit Percentage of CPU that the system can use.

I/O Limit Percentage of I/O that the system can use.

Reserved AWTs Maximum number of AWTs to reserve for tactical workloads.

Max AWTs fornew work

Maximum number of AWTs for new tactical work.

Defining System-Level Bypass Settings

A system-level bypass is a collection of users, accounts, and profiles that are not filtered orthrottled at the system level. The dbc and tdwm usernames are listed automatically andcannot be changed, renamed, or removed.

1 Edit or create a ruleset.

2 From the ruleset toolbar, click General.

3 Click the Bypass tab.

4 Select a Source Type from the list to exclude it from system-level filters and throttles.



5 [Optional] Enter a filter string in the Filter box to limit your choices.

6 Select a source from the list or select multiple sources by using Ctrl or Shift.

7 Click Add Selection to add your selections to the bypass list.

8 [Optional] Repeat steps 4 through 7 to add sources to the bypass list.

9 [Optional] Mouse over a source in the bypass list, and click to include it in system-level filters and throttles.

10 Click Save.

Enabling Timeshare Decay

In SLES 11, you can enable timeshare decay.

Timeshare decay automatically decreases the resource access rate of queries in a Timeshareworkload over time. Enabling decay prevents problematic queries from monopolizingsystem resources.



3 Click the Decay tab.

4 Click the Enable Timeshare Decay check box.

5 Click Save.

Setting Limits and Reserves

In SLES 11, you can set limits and reserves for each planned environment.



3 Click the Limits/Reserves tab.

4 Select a planned environment.

5 Define limits on CPU Utilization and I/O for the planned environment.

6 Define tactical reserves for tactical workloads in the planned environment.

7 Click Save.

About Ruleset States

A state is the intersection of a health condition and a planned environment. A healthcondition is composed of unplanned events and a planned environment is composed ofplanned events. Creating states provides greater control over how the system allocatesresources. When a health condition and a planned environment intersect, the resulting statetriggers system changes.

The SLES 10 and SLES 11 IWM systems have no options for custom states, health conditions,planned environments, or state-specific values for query sessions, filters, and throttles. IWM



systems only use the Base state, Normal health condition, and Always plannedenvironment. The SLES 10 IWM system has no options for workloads.

Use the state matrix to create and organize states for a ruleset. With the state matrix, createstates so one ruleset can respond to a range of different system conditions. For example, ifyou have many system users on weekdays, but run batch jobs on the weekend, allocatesystem resources differently during the week than you do on weekends by creating twoplanned environments: Weekdays and Weekends.

In the state matrix, create planned events, unplanned events, health conditions, plannedenvironments, and corresponding states specific to your business situation. Update the statematrix at any time to reflect business, system, or priority changes.

The Normal health condition, Always planned environment, and Base state are defaults.The defaults apply unless planned or unplanned events occur, triggering other configuredstates. The defaults cannot be deleted or moved within the state matrix. Like any state, theBase state can be used in multiple cells of the matrix.

Any states you create use the default settings. The default settings can be viewed and editedon the state-specific settings tabs in workloads, filters, throttles, query sessions, and utilitylimits. You can override the default settings by entering new values on the state-specificsettings tabs.

Using only a few states in the state matrix reduces maintenance time. However, consideradding states to the matrix to manage the following situations:• Consistent, peak workload hours or days where priority management must be strictly

assigned and enforced• Load or query times where priority tasks must finish within a specific time frame• Conditions where resources must be managed in a different way, such as giving higher

priority to critical work when system health is degraded

Creating a State Matrix

If you have created a ruleset, you can create a state matrix for the ruleset. The state matrixinstructs the system as to which predefined state to use when a specific combination ofplanned environment and health condition exists.


2 From the ruleset toolbar, click States.

The state matrix appears. For a new ruleset, the default state matrix consists of one cell.

3 Define at least one health condition.



4 Define at least one unplanned event.An unplanned event is a system event, user-defined event, workload event, or acombination of these events.

5 Drag the unplanned event to the appropriate health condition so the event triggers thehealth condition.

6 Define at least one planned environment.

7 Define at least one planned event.A planned event is a period event, user-defined event, or a combination of these events.

8 Drag the planned event to the appropriate planned environment so the event triggers theenvironment.

9 Define at least one state.

10 For each cell in the state matrix, drag and drop a state from the States list into theappropriate cell of the matrix.When the defined combination occurs, the state is triggered.

11 Click Save.

Defining Health Conditions

Health conditions define levels of system health and are used to reallocate system resourceswhen an event degrades the system. When at least one unplanned event occurs, a healthcondition can be triggered. The default health condition is Normal, and it is used if no otherhealth conditions are triggered. The Normal health condition always remains at the top. Thelowest severity is listed at the top. The highest severity is at the bottom. If multiple unplannedevents are active at the same time, the health condition with the highest severity is triggered.1 Edit or create a ruleset.


3 Mouse over Health Conditions, and click .

A health condition is added with the default name newCond.

4 Mouse over the health condition and click .

5 Enter a name for the health condition.

6 Enter a minimum duration, in seconds, for the health condition.The event that triggers the change to the health condition must remain above the triggerthreshold for the minimum duration you enter before the health condition goes intoeffect. Setting minimum duration prevents short incidents of an event from triggering achange in the health condition.

7 Click OK.

8 [Optional] Mouse over a health condition name and click to delete a health condition.

9 Click Save.

Defining System Events in the State Matrix

A system event is an unplanned event, such as a down node. Incorporating system events intohealth conditions within the state matrix gives you greater control over the actions Teradata



Database takes when unexpected events occur. To create an event that only sends out anotification, create the event, but do not assign it to any health condition. When the eventoccurs, the notification action you specified is triggered.



3 Mouse over Unplanned Events, and click .

4 Click next to Available Events.

5 Select System Event.

6 Enter a name.


8 Select a System Event Type from the list.Maximum and minimum limits must be positive integers.

9 [Optional] Select a qualification option to prevent very short incidents from triggeringan event.

10 [Optional] Under Notifications, enable any of the following options for the start or theend of the event:

Option Description

Send Alert Specifies the action to trigger.

Run Program Specifies the Alerts registered programs to trigger.

Post to QTable The string you enter is posted to the QTable.

11 Click OK.

12 [Optional] Drag the event under a specific health condition.When the event occurs, it triggers the health condition.

13 Click Close.

14 Click Save.

System Event Type Options

System event type options are available in the following versions of Teradata Database:

Event Types Description 12.0 13.0 13.10 14.00

Node Down Maximum allowed number of nodesdown in a clique, defined as apercentage between 0 and 100. Thedefault is 24%.

Available Available Available Available

AMP Fatal Maximum number of AMPs reportedas fatal at system startup.




Event Types Description 12.0 13.0 13.10 14.00

AvailableAWTs

Number of AWTs available on thespecified number of AMPs. Includes aqualification time.

Available Available

AWTs In Use Maximum number of AWTs in useon the specified number of AMPs.

Available Available

Gateway Fatal Maximum number of gatewaysreported as fatal at system startup.


PE Fatal Maximum number of PEs reported asfatal at system startup.


Flow Control Maximum allowed number of AMPsin flow control. Includes aqualification time.


CPUUtilization

Defines when the system CPU valuesare consistently outside defined CPUutilization threshold values. Includesa qualification time.

Available

CPU Skew Maximum system-wide skew.Includes a qualification time.

Available

Note: Setting qualification times can prevent very short incidents from triggering events.

Qualification TimeOptions

Description

Simple Specifies how long an event threshold must be met before an event is triggered.

Immediate Specifies that an event is triggered immediately after an event threshold is met.

Averaging Specifies how long the rolling average of the metric value must meet the eventthreshold before an event is triggered.

About Workload Events

Workload events are available starting with Teradata Database 14.00. A workload event is anunplanned event. Use workload events to transition to different health conditions when theevents occur. When creating a workload event, select a Workload Event Type and define athreshold for the event type. For example, select Active Requests as the event type and set athreshold for the number of queries that can be active at one time. When the threshold ismet or exceeded, the workload event occurs.

To create an event that only sends out a notification, create the event but do not assign it toany health condition. When the event occurs, the notification action you specified istriggered.

Note: When events have been defined for a workload, the workload cannot be deleted untilthe events have been manually deleted.

Defining Workload Events in the State Matrix





3 Mouse over Unplanned Events and click .


5 Select Workload Event.

6 Enter a name.


8 Select a Workload.

9 Select a Workload Event Type from the list.

10 Define a threshold for the Workload Event Type.Maximum and minimum limits must be positive integers.

11 [Optional] Select a qualification option to prevent very short incidents from triggeringan event.


Option Description




13 Click OK.

14 [Optional] Drag the event under a specific health condition.When the event occurs, it triggers the health condition.

15 Click Close.

16 Click Save.

Workload Event Type Options

You can define thresholds for workload event types. When a threshold is met or exceeded,the associated workload event occurs. Maximum and minimum limits must be positiveintegers. The following event types are available:

Event Types Description

Active Requests Defines maximum or minimum number of queries that can be active at onetime. Active Requests are not available for utility workloads.

Arrivals Defines maximum or minimum per-second arrival rate for queries. Arrivalsare not available with utility workloads.

AWT Wait Time Defines minimum time a step in a request can wait to acquire an AWT.

CPU Utilization Defines maximum or minimum CPU usage for a query.



Event Types Description

Delay QueueDepth

Defines minimum number of queries in the delay queue.

Delay Queue Time Defines a minimum for the time a request can be in the delay queue. Thethreshold can include or exclude system throttle delay time.

SLG ResponseTime

Triggers an event based on the Response Time SLG set for the workload.Available only if a Response Time SLG is set for the workload.

SLG Throughput Triggers an event based on the Throughput SLG set for the workload.Available only if a Throughput SLG is set for the workload.

Note: Some workload event types allow you to set a qualification time. Setting qualificationtimes can prevent very short incidents from triggering events. The qualification time ischecked at the end of each interval.

Qualification TimeOptions

Description

Simple Specifies how long an event threshold must be met before an event is triggered.

Immediate Specifies that an event is triggered immediately after an event threshold is met.

Averaging Specifies how long the rolling average of the metric value must meet the eventthreshold before an event is triggered.

Defining Planned Environments

Planned environments are used to reallocate system resources during scheduled times.Planned environments are triggered when at least one associated planned event occurs. Thedefault planned environment is Always and it cannot be deleted or moved. The order ofprecedence is from lowest to highest, reading from left to right. The planned environmentwith the highest precedence is activated if multiple planned events are active at the sametime.



3 Mouse over Planned Environments and click .

A planned environment is added with the default name newEnv.

4 Mouse over the planned environment and click .

5 Enter a name.

6 Click outside the name.

7 Click a planned environment name and drag the name to the left or right in the list tochange the order of precedence, if multiple planned environments exist.

8 [Optional] Mouse over the environment name and click to delete a plannedenvironment.You cannot delete the Always environment.

9 Click Save.



Defining Period Events in the State Matrix

A period event is a planned event occurring on specific days and times, such as month-endfinancial processing. Use periodic events to manage events that happen on a recurring basis.To create an event that only sends out a notification, create the event, but do not assign it toany planned environment. When the event occurs, the notification action you specified istriggered.



3 Mouse over Planned Events, and click .


5 Select Period Event.

6 Enter a name.


8 [Optional] Select Create New Corresponding Planned Environment to automaticallycreate a planned environment that this event triggers.

9 Select Day of Week or Day of Month, and click a single day or multiple days.

10 [Optional] Select Month of Year, and click one or more months.

11 [Optional] Select Start Time, and enter a start and end time.

12 [Optional] Select Wrap around midnight to have a time range spanning midnight for aperiod event.


Option Description




14 Click OK.

15 [Optional] Drag the event under a planned environment.

16 Click Close.

17 Click Save.

Wrap around Midnight Example

When creating period events, use the Wrap around midnight option to have a time rangespanning midnight.

If the From time of a period event is later than the To time, two time segments are available:midnight until the To time and the From time until midnight. When Wrap aroundmidnight is not selected, the period event is in effect for segment 1 and segment 2 on each



specified day. When Wrap around midnight is selected, the event is in effect for segment 2on each specified day and for segment 1 on each day following the specified day.

For example, specify that a period event occurs on Mondays and Tuesdays with a From timeof 17:00 and a To time of 08:00.

If Wrap around midnight is not selected:

Monday Tuesday Wednesday

Midnight—08:00 (time segment 1) Yes Yes No

08:00—17:00 No No No

17:00—23:59 (time segment 2) Yes Yes No

If Wrap around midnight is selected:

Monday Tuesday Wednesday

Midnight—08:00 (time segment 1) No Yes Yes

08:00—17:00 No No No

17:00—23:59 (time segment 2) Yes Yes No

Defining User-Defined Events in the State Matrix

A user-defined event can be planned or unplanned. To create an event that only sends out anotification, create the event, but do not assign it to any planned or unplanned environment.When the event occurs, the notification action you specified is triggered.



3 Mouse over Unplanned Events or Planned Events, and click .

4 Next to Available Events, click .

5 Select User Defined Event.

6 Enter a name.


8 [Optional] Select Create New Corresponding Planned Environment to automaticallycreate a planned environment that this event triggers.This step can be taken if you are creating the user-defined event as a planned event.

9 Under Activate/Deactivate Event, copy the appropriate SQL request text.

10 Paste the text into an SQL script.


Option Description




Option Description



12 Click OK.

13 [Optional] Do one of the following:• For unplanned events, drag the event under a health condition.• For planned events, drag the event under a planned environment.

14 Click Close.

15 Click Save.

Defining Event Combinations in the State Matrix

An event combination is a mix of two or more different events, such as period, system, anduser-defined events. Event combinations can be planned or unplanned. To create an eventthat only sends out a notification, create the event, but do not assign it to any plannedenvironment. When the event occurs, the notification action you specified is triggered.



3 Mouse over Unplanned Events or Planned Events, and click .

4 Next to Available Events, click .

5 Select Event Combination.

6 Enter a name.


8 [Optional] If you are creating the combination event as a planned event, you can selectCreate New Corresponding Planned Environment to automatically create a plannedenvironment that this event triggers.

9 Add available events and operators to build the formula representing the combination ofevents that must occur to trigger the event. For example, Node Down OR BatchProcessing, or NOT PEI.When creating event combinations, avoid placing two operators or two events next toeach other. When an event combination is valid, the background of the EventCombination Formula text box is white. If a combination is invalid, the background isorange.


Option Description





Option Description


11 Click OK.

12 [Optional] Do one of the following:• For unplanned events, drag the event under a health condition.• For planned events, drag the event under a planned environment.

13 Click Close.

14 Click Save.

Defining States in the State Matrix

You can create a state to control how resources are allocated in different health conditionand planned environment combinations.



3 Mouse over States at the top of the states list and click .

A state is added to the list with the default name NewState.

4 Mouse over the state name and click .

5 Enter a name.


7 [Optional] Mouse over the state name and click to edit a state name.

8 Click Save.

Mapping States in the State Matrix

After creating a state, you can map it in the state matrix to control how resources areallocated when different health condition and planned environment combinations occur. Bydefault, the cell in the upper left corner of the state matrix is assigned the Normal healthcondition, the Always environment, and the Base state. This cell cannot be changed. Allother cells in the matrix must be associated with a single state. Any state, including the Basestate, can be used in multiple cells.



3 Drag and drop a state name from the States list to a matrix cell to map a state in the statematrix.



4 [Optional] Mouse over the state name in the States list and click to view details abouta state.

5 Click Save.

Mapping Events in the State Matrix

If you have created events in the state matrix, you can combine the events with healthconditions and planned environments for greater control of Teradata Database. Create thehealth conditions and planned environments that you need before mapping events in thestate matrix.



3 Map a planned event:

a Mouse over Planned Events, and click .

b In Available Events, drag and drop an event from the list into one or more of thePlanned Environment columns.

c [Optional] Click next to Available Events to create a planned event.

4 To map an unplanned event:

a Mouse over Unplanned Events, and click .

b In Available Events, drag an event from the list and drop it into one or more of theHealth Condition rows.

c [Optional] Click next to Available Events to create an unplanned event.

5 Click Close.

6 Click Save.

Deleting States from the State List

If a state is not used in the state matrix, you can remove it from the State list.





3 In the State list, mouse over a state name, and click .

4 Click Save.

About Classification Settings

Workload Designer provides a common classification process for workloads, filters,throttles, query sessions, and utility sessions. Classification determines which queries usewhich rules. Teradata Database detects classification criteria before executing queries. Thegoal in creating a useful classification scheme is to meet business goals and fine-tune controlof Teradata Database.

Modifications to the classification settings can be made in response to data monitoring,regular historical analysis, or changes. For example, classification groups may need to becreated, or existing groups modified, if an application is added, two Teradata systems areconsolidated, or service-level goals are missed.

About Classification Criteria

The following classifications are available:

Classification Description

Request source Where the query comes from

Target What the query is acting on

Query characteristics What the query is composed of

Query band What metadata is attached to the query

Utility Which utility submitted the query

A good approach to using classification is to first use request source to determine where thequery is coming from. Often, the account string is selected, but other options includeusername, account name, or client IP address. If you need a more detailed level ofclassification, establish where the query data is located, such as a database, table, or view. Tonarrow classification further, select query characteristics, query bands, or utilities. Forutilities, use the check boxes to select the specific utilities you want to include.

For example, you could create a filter and add the request source classification to reject allqueries from the Finance department when the Red state is in effect. To further refine thefilter, add the query characteristic classification to filter out all requests from the financedepartment that are estimated to run longer than 10 seconds. You include classification itemsin a filter to reject those items. The query characteristic setting is added to the request sourcesetting already in place.

All classification settings for a workload, filter, throttle, query session, utility session, orutility limit are listed on the Classification tab.



On the Classification tab:• Request source and target criteria can have a single criteria or several. In Teradata

Database 13.10 and later, if a criteria group has more than one criteria, then within thegroup the criteria are joined by AND. In Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, the criteria arejoined by OR.

• In Teradata Database 13.10 and later, if request source and target groups exist together,they are joined by an AND. In Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, a button can be used tojoin the groups by AND or by OR.

• Within a query characteristics criteria group, if the Statement Type parameter isenabled, it is joined to any additional parameters with an AND. In Teradata Database13.10 and later, if there is more than one parameter, they are joined by an AND. InTeradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, a button can be used to join the parameters by AND orby OR.

About Request Source Classification Type

The request source classification type establishes which username, account name, accountstring, profile, application, client IP address, or client ID is making the request.

Consider the following when using request source to classify information:• A source type can only be used once per rule. After a source type is used, it no longer

appears in the menu.• A match string must be an exact match. A match string can contain ? to match exactly

one character or * to match zero or more characters. Use the Include and Excludebuttons to add the match string to a list. You can also select items from the list and usethe Include and Exclude buttons to create your classification criteria.

Adding Request Source Classification Type

You can classify filters, throttles, workloads, utility sessions, and query sessions by requestsources such as account name or client IP address.

In Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, when adding the request source classification type tofilters and throttles, an Add button is available instead of the Include and Exclude buttons.Also in Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, the request source types available for filters andthrottles are Username, Profile, Account Name, and Account String. In Teradata Database12.0, when adding the request source classification type to workloads, all specified criteria



can be either included or excluded. Also in Teradata Database 12.0, wildcards are notavailable in Match String.1 Do one of the following:

• Click Filters, Throttles, or Workloads.• From the Sessions tab, click Query Sessions or Utility Sessions.

2 Select or create an item.

3 Click the Classification tab.

4 Do one of the following:• From the Add Classification Criteria list, click Request Source, and click Add.• Click Add Criteria if you are classifying a query session.• Select an existing request source criteria.

5 Select a Source Type from the list.

6 Do at least one of the following:• Enter a Match String and use the Include and Exclude buttons to add the match

string. A match string can contain ? to match exactly one character or * to match zeroor more characters. Wildcards in match strings are supported in Teradata Database13.0 and later.

• Select Items from the list and use the Include and Exclude buttons to create yourclassification criteria. In Teradata Database 12.00 and 13.00, use the Add button.

7 Click OK.

About Target Classification Type

The target classification type specifies the query data location.

Consider the following when using target to classify information:• Available target types include database, table, macro, view, or stored procedure. If table,

macro, view, or stored procedure is selected, a database selection list appears. A targettype can only be used once per rule. After a target type is used, it no longer appears in themenu.

• Optionally, each selected target item can have subcriteria. For example, if you select adatabase as the target, you could add subcriteria so that it only applies if you areperforming a full table scan. If you select two or more subcriteria, they must all be presentfor the classification setting to be used. The icon appears next to target itemscontaining subcriteria.

• A match string must be an exact match. A match string can contain ? to match exactlyone character or * to match zero or more characters. Use the Include and Excludebuttons to add the match string to a list. You can also select items from the list and usethe Include and Exclude buttons to create your classification criteria.

Adding Target Classification Type

The target classification type specifies the query data location. You can classify filters,throttles, or workloads by targets such as database, table, or stored procedure. In TeradataDatabase 13.10 and later, you can add subcriteria. If you add multiple subcriteria to a singleitem, all subcriteria conditions must be true in order for the query to be classified into the



rule. In Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, when adding the target classification type to filtersand throttles, an Add button is available instead of the Include and Exclude buttons. InTeradata Database 12.0, when adding the target classification type to workloads, all specifiedcriteria can be either included or excluded. In Teradata Database 12.0, wildcards are notavailable in Match String.

1 Click Filters, Throttles, or Workloads.



4 Select a target criteria or add one.

5 Select a Target Type from the list.

6 [Optional] Select a database from the list for Table, View, Macro, or Stored Proceduretarget types.


string. A match string can contain ? to match exactly one character or * to matchzero or more characters.

• Select Items from the list and use the Include and Exclude buttons to create yourclassification criteria.

8 [Optional] To add subcriteria, mouse over an item in the Selected list, click , andchoose from the following:

Option Description

Full Table Scan Includes or excludes all-row scans

Join Type Selects a type

Minimum Step Row Count Sets minimum rows at each step

Maximum Step Row Count Sets maximum rows at each step

Minimum Step Time Sets minimum time at each step

9 If you specified subcriteria, click Apply.

The icon appears next to target items containing subcriteria.

10 Click OK.

About Query Characteristic Classification Type

The query characteristic classification type describes a query by answering such questions aswhat does the query do and how long will the query run.

Consider the following when using query characteristics to classify information:• After a characteristic is selected, its value can be edited.• Many characteristics have minimum and maximum values that can be set independently.

You can set all values above the minimum, below the maximum, or between a minimumand a maximum.



• Query characteristic classification and utility classification are mutually exclusive. If youuse one, the other option is not available.

• You can have one query characteristic classification per rule.

Adding Query Characteristic Classification Type

You can classify filters, throttles, or workloads by query characteristics.




4 Select a query characteristics criteria or add one.

5 Choose from the following query characteristics criteria:

Option Description

Statement Type Options are: DDL, DML, or SELECT.

AMP Limits Includes or excludes queries that use all AMPs for filters in TeradataDatabase 13.10 and later.

Step Row Count Sets minimum and maximum rows at each step.

Final Row Count Sets minimum and maximum rows in the result set.

Estimated ProcessingTime

Sets minimum and maximum estimated processing time. Longer ormore complex queries have less accurate estimates.

Minimum Step Time Sets a minimum time at each step.

Join Type Options in the Include Only list are: No Join, Any Join, ProductJoin, No Product Join, Unconstrained Product Join, or NoUnconstrained Product Join.

Full Table Scan Includes or excludes full table scans for all rows.

6 Click OK.

About Query Band Classification Type

The query band classification type describes the query band data attached to a query.

Consider the following when using query band to classify information:• A name must be selected from the Name list or entered into the box.• After picking a name, one or more values must be specified. The value is selected from the

Previously Used Values list or entered into the New Value box. Multiple values can beselected for the same name.

• After a name and value are specified, the Include and Exclude buttons are available.• Multiple included query band key and value pairs are connected with "AND."• Multiple excluded query band key and value pairs are connected with "OR."

Adding Query Band Classification Type

A query band contains name and value pairs that use predefined names (on TeradataDatabase) or custom names to specify metadata, such as user location or application version.






4 Select a query band criteria or add one.

5 Select a query band name from the list or add one.

6 Select a Previously Used Value or enter a New Value.You must select a name and a value.

7 In Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, use the Add button to add query band classificationtypes to filters and throttles. In all other versions, use the Include and Exclude buttonsto create your classification criteria.

8 Click OK.

About Utility Classification Type

The utility classification type identifies which utility submitted the query.

Consider the following when using utility criteria to classify information:• Available utility types include FastLoad, FastExport, MultiLoad, and Backup Utilities.

Select a top level utility such as FastExport or a specific implementation of a utility suchas JDBC FastExport.

• Utility classification and query characteristic classification are mutually exclusive. If youuse one, the other option is not available.

• You can have one utility classification per rule.• The Utility classification is not available for a workload that has Arrivals or Active

Request as its associated event type, or for a workload that has an associated exception.

Adding Utility Classification Type

You can classify filters, throttles, workloads, or sessions by using utilities such as FastLoad orMultiLoad.1 Do one of the following:

• Click Filters, Throttles, or Workloads.• From the Sessions tab, click Utility Limits or Utility Sessions.

2 Select an item or create one.


4 Select a utility criteria or add one.

5 Select any combination of FastLoad, FastExport, Backup Utilities, and MultiLoadutilities. Select a utility type, such as FastLoad or FastExport, or a specific version, suchas JDBC FastLoad or Stand Alone MultiLoad.

6 Click OK.

Deleting a Classification Type

You can delete classification criteria from filters, throttles, workloads, query sessions, utilitysessions, or utility limits at any time.



1 Do one of the following:• Click Filters, Throttles, or Workloads.• From the Sessions tab, click Query Sessions, Utility Limits, or Utility Sessions.

2 Select an item.


4 Mouse over an existing classification criteria, and click . If you are deleting a utilitylimit criterion, clear the utilities you want to delete from the classification.

5 Click Save.

About Ruleset Sessions

You can specify session limit information when creating and editing rulesets. In TeradataDatabase 12.0 and 13.0, session throttles are configured on the Throttles tab. The followingtabs appear when you click Sessions on the ruleset toolbar:

Query Sessions

Limits on the number of query sessions that can be logged on at one time. InTeradata Database 13.10 and later, you can create, enable, clone, and delete querysessions.

Query Sessions by State

Limits on the number of query sessions for each state. In Teradata Database 13.10and later, the default session limit for a state is listed, along with each state you havecreated and its assigned, state-specific session limit.

Utility Limits

Limits on the number of utilities that can run at the same time. You can create,enable, clone, and delete utility limits.

Utility Limits by State

Limits on the number of utilities for each utility limit rule in each state. The defaultutility limit for a state is listed, along with each state you have created and itsassigned, state-specific utility limit.

Utility Sessions

Limits on the number of sessions a specific utility can use at one time. In TeradataDatabase 13.10 and later, you can create, enable, clone, and delete utility sessions.

Utility Sessions Evaluation Order

Precedence of utility session rules, from highest to lowest. In Teradata Database13.10 and later, evaluation order determines the rule in which the utility job is placedif a utility job matches more than one utility session rule.

Creating a Query Session

You can create a query session in Teradata Database 13.10 or later. In Teradata Database12.0 and 13.0, use a throttle. A query session limits the number of sessions that can be logged



on at one time. After the query session is created, additional controls in the Query Sessionstab allow you to clone, delete, enable, or disable the query session. View all created querysessions on the Query Sessions by State tab.


2 From the ruleset toolbar, click Sessions.

3 Click the Query Sessions tab.

4 Click Create Query Session.

5 Enter a name.


7 Select a Rule Type from the list:• Select Collective if you want all users that meet the classification criteria treated as a

group, with the group allowed a maximum number of queries.• Select Individual if you want to apply limits to each user individually.• Select Member if you want accounts or profiles that represent user groups used as the

classification criteria for the rule. Limits are placed on each individual in the group,and no limit is placed on the account or group.

8 Click Save.


10 Add classification criteria.

11 Click Save.

12 Click the State Specific Settings tab.

13 Set state-specific session limits.

14 Click Save.

Setting Classification for Query Sessions

Add classification settings to existing query sessions or when creating a query session.Classification options determine which sessions are associated with the query session.




4 Select a query session or create one.


6 Click Add Criteria.

7 In Source Type, click and select one of the following:

Option Description

Account Name Teradata Database account name



Option Description

Account String Teradata Database account identification string

Profile Teradata Database profile name

Application Application on the network client

Client IP Address IP address of the network client

Client ID Logon name on the network client


string. A match string can contain ? to match exactly one character or * to match zeroor more characters.


9 Click OK.

Setting State-Specific Values for Query Sessions

Add state-specific settings to existing query sessions or when creating a query session.

You can override the default by specifying session limits on a per-state basis. For example,you might want to have session limits during high-traffic states and no session limits duringlow-traffic states. View all created query sessions on the Query Sessions By State tab.




4 Select a query session or create one.


6 Mouse over a state and click .

7 Select Create State Specific Settings.

8 Select Unlimited, or enter a session limit in the box.

9 Click OK.

Your selection is applied to each cell having that state, and overrides the setting specifiedin Default Settings.

10 [Optional] Change the default setting by selecting Unlimited, or enter a session limitnumber in the box.

11 Click Save.

Creating a Utility Limit

A utility limit determines the number and type of utility jobs that can be run at one time.After the utility limit is created, additional controls in the Utility Limits tab allow you toclone, delete, and enable or disable the utility limit.





3 Click the Utility Limits tab.

4 Click Create Utility Limit.

5 Enter a name.


7 In Teradata Database 12.0, you can select Reject utilities that exceed limit to abort anyutilities that exceed the limit.If you do not select this option, utilities are delayed.

8 Click Save.


10 Select the utilities to which the limit should be applied.When a utility limit is created, several utilities are selected by default. The defaultutilities can be cleared.

11 Click Save.


13 Define utility limits for specific states.

14 Click Save.

Setting Classification for Utility Limits

Add classification settings to existing utility limits or when creating a utility limit.Classification options determine which sessions are associated with a utility limit.




4 Select a utility limit or create one.


6 Do one of the following:• Select a utility type, such as FastLoad or FastExport.• Select multiple utility types.• Select a specific version, such as Backup/Archive/Restore.• Select a combination of utility types and versions.In Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, the only option is to select one utility type.

7 Click Save.

Setting State-Specific Job Limits for Utility Limits

Set state-specific job limits for existing utility limits or when creating a utility limit.



You can override the default by setting job limits on a per-state basis. For example, youmight want to raise the job limit during a low-traffic state, and lower the job limit during ahigh-traffic state.




4 Select a utility limit or create one.


6 [Optional] Do any of the following:

Option Description

Set a default job limit for theutility limit in all states

a. Under Default Settings, select Job Limit.b. Enter a number in the box.c. In Teradata Database 13.0 or later, select Delay or Reject.

Set a job limit for the utilitylimit in a specific state

a. Mouse over a state and click .b. Select Create State Specific Settings.c. Select Job Limit.d. Enter a number in the box.e. In Teradata Database 13.0 or later, select Delay or Reject.f. Click OK.

7 Click Save.

Creating a Utility Session

You can create a utility session in Teradata Database 13.10 or later. A utility session controlsthe number of sessions that are allowed to be logged on to each utility at one time. After theutility session is created, additional controls in the Utility Sessions tab allow you to clone,delete, and enable or disable the utility session.



3 Click the Utility Sessions tab.

4 Click Create Utility Session.

5 Enter a name.



Option Description

Session-BasedUtilities

a. Select Session Based Utilities.b. Select the utilities to which this session limit applies.c. From the list, select Data Size.



Option Description

d. In Max Sessions, enter the maximum number of sessions that are allowedto be logged on to each of the selected utilities at one time.

Backup/Archive/Restore (BAR)

a. Select Backup/Archive/Restore.b. From the list, select Data Size.c. In Max Build Processes, enter the maximum number of build processes

that can be run at one time.

8 Click Save.

Setting Classification for Utility Sessions

Add classification settings to existing utility sessions or when creating a utility session.Classification options determine which sessions are associated with a utility session.



3 Click the Utility Sessions tab.

4 Select a utility session or create one.


6 In the Add Classification Criteria list, select Request Source or Query Band.

7 Click Add.

8 Specify options based on the classification criteria you selected.

Option Description

RequestSource

Do one of the following:• Enter a Match String and use the Include and Exclude buttons to add the

match string. A match string can contain ? to match exactly one character or* to match zero or more characters.

• Select Items from the list and use the Include and Exclude buttons to createyour classification criteria.

Query Band a. Select a predefined query band name from the list.b. Select a Previously Used Value or enter a New Value.c. Use the Include and Exclude buttons to create your classification criteria.

9 Click OK.

Setting Evaluation Order for Utility Sessions

You can create utility sessions and set the evaluation order in Teradata Database 13.10 orlater. If a utility job matches more than one utility session rule, the evaluation orderdetermines the rule in which the utility job is placed. The rule in the highest position on theUtility Sessions Evaluation Order tab is applied. You cannot change the order of thesystem rules located at the bottom of the list.





3 Click the Utility Sessions Evaluation Order tab.

4 Drag rules to reorder the list of utility rules.

5 Click Save.

About Ruleset Filters

A filter rejects a query before the query starts running. You can specify filters when creatingor editing a ruleset. Add criteria to each filter that identifies the queries to which the filtershould be applied. When creating or editing a ruleset, filters are specified by clicking Filtersin the ruleset toolbar. After creating a filter, you can specify the states to which you want thefilter applied.

Following are examples of using filters:• Create a filter that prohibits a specific user from running a query with an estimated

processing time of longer than 15 minutes.• Create a filter to limit all members of a specific department that runs large reports from

accessing the database during peak work hours.

Creating a Filter

A filter rejects user queries.


2 From the ruleset toolbar, click Filters.

3 Click Create Filter.

4 Enter a name.


6 [Optional] In Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, select Global Rule - applies to allrequests to apply global filters to all objects and to all logon and query requests that meetthe criteria of the rule.If Global Rule - applies to all requests is selected, the request source and targetclassification types are not available. If the request source or target classification types areused, the Global Rule - applies to all requests option is not available.

7 [Optional] Select Warning Only to have a warning message for the filter logged by thedatabase.The queries still run when a warning is logged.

8 Click Save.


10 Add and save classification criteria.Include classification items in a filter to reject those items. For example, create a filter andadd classification criteria to reject all queries from the finance department.




12 Set state-specific values for the filter. You can enable or disable filters on a per-statebasis.

13 Click OK.

14 Click Save.

Filter Classification Criteria

Filters for query characteristics classification criteria are available in the following versionsof Teradata Database:

Filter Options 12.0 13.0 13.10 14.00

Statement Type Available Available Available Available

AMP Limits Available Available

Step Row Count Available Available Available Available

Final Row Count Available Available Available Available

Estimated Processing TimeRel


Minimum Step Time Available Available

Join Type Available Available Available Available

Full Table Scan Available Available Available Available

AND or OR option to establishhow multiple criteria are joined

Available Available

Setting Classification for Filters

Filters reject user queries. Add classification settings to existing filters or when creating afilter. Classification options determine which queries are associated with a filter.

When using the query characteristics classification criteria with filters, consider thefollowing:• In Teradata Database 13.0 and earlier, select the AND or OR option to establish how

multiple criteria are joined.• In Teradata Database 13.0 and earlier, the Statement Type, AMP Limits, and Estimated

Processing Time criteria are available.• In Teradata Database 13.10 and later, a Minimum option is available when using Step

Row Count criteria.



3 Select a filter or create one.


5 In the Add Classification Criteria list select Request Source, Target, QueryCharacteristics, Query Band, or Utility.



6 Click Add.


8 If you selected Request Source or Target, do at least one of the following:• Enter a Match String and use the Include and Exclude buttons to add the match



9 Click OK.

Setting State-Specific Values for Filters

Add state-specific settings to existing filters or when creating a filter.

You can override the default by enabling or disabling the filter on a per-state basis. Forexample, you may want to leave a filter enabled under all circumstances except when aspecific state occurs.



3 Select a filter or create one.




7 Select Filter is Enabled or Filter is Disabled.

8 Click OK.

Your selection is applied to each cell having that state, and overrides the settings specifiedin Default Settings.

9 [Optional] Change the default setting by selecting Filter is Enabled or Filter is Disabled.

10 Click Save.

About Ruleset Throttles

A throttle limits the number of user queries that can be active at the same time. Whencreating or editing a ruleset, you can specify throttles. Throttles are different from filters,which reject queries. After the throttle limit is reached, the workload adds new queries to thedelay queue.

The following are examples of throttles:• A throttle that limits a specific user to running no more than 10 queries at a time.• A throttle that limits a specific department to no more than 4 simultaneous queries.

When creating or editing a ruleset, throttles are specified by clicking Throttles in the rulesettoolbar.



After creating a ruleset throttle, you can specify the throttle limits for each state.

Creating Throttles

Throttles limit the number of user queries that can be active at the same time. This isdifferent from filters, which reject queries and prevent them from running at all.


2 From the ruleset toolbar, click Throttles.

3 Click Create Throttle.

4 Enter a name.


6 Select a Rule Type:• Select Collective if you want all users that meet the classification criteria treated as a

group, with the group allowed a maximum number of queries.• Select Individual if you want to apply limits to each user individually.• Select Member if you want accounts or profiles that represent user groups used as the

classification criteria for the rule. Limits are placed on individuals in the group andno limit is placed on the account or group.

• In Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, you can select Global if you want all queriesplaced in a single queue. If Global is selected, the request source and targetclassification types are not available. If request source or target classification type isused, the Global Rule option is not available.

7 [Optional] Select Disable Manual Release or Abort to prevent Teradata DatabaseAdministrators from aborting or releasing throttled queries in the queue.

8 [Optional] In Teradata Database 12.0, select Reject throttled queries to abort throttledqueries.

9 Click Save.


11 Add and save classification criteria.


13 Define query limits for specific states.

14 Click OK.

15 Click Save.

Throttle Classification Criteria

Throttles for query characteristics classification criteria are available in the followingversions of Teradata Database.

Filter Options 12.0 13.0 13.10 14.00

Statement Type Available Available Available Available

AMP Limits Available Available Available Available



Filter Options 12.0 13.0 13.10 14.00

Any Step Time Exceeds Available Available

Step Row Count Available Available

Final Row Count Available Available

Estimated Processing Time Available Available

Minimum Step Time Available Available

Join Type Available Available

Full Table Scan Available Available

multiple criteria joined by AND Available Available

Setting Classification for Throttles

Throttles limit the number of user queries that can run at the same time. Add classificationsettings to existing throttles or when creating a throttle. Classification options determinewhich queries are associated with the throttle.

When using the query characteristics classification criteria with throttles in TeradataDatabase 13.0 or earlier, the Statement Type, AMP Limits, and Any Step Time Exceedscriteria are available.



3 Select a throttle or create one.


5 In the Add Classification Criteria list, select Request Source, Target, QueryCharacteristics, Query Band, or Utility.

6 Click Add.


8 If you selected the Request Source or Target criteria, do at least one of the following:• Enter a Match String and use the Include and Exclude buttons to add the match



9 Click OK.

Setting State-Specific Values for Throttles

Set state-specific query limits for existing system throttles or when creating a throttle.

You can override the default by setting query limits on a per-state basis. For example, youmay want to raise the query limit of a system throttle during a low-traffic state, and lower thequery limit during a high-traffic state.





3 Select a system throttle or create one.

4 Select the State Specific Settings tab.

5 In When Query Limit Exceeded, select Delay or Reject.This option is available in Teradata Database 12.0.



Note: If you select the Use Default Settings option, the settings at the bottom of theThrottles tab apply to the state.

8 Do one of the following:• Next to Query Limit, select Unlimited to place no limits on the number of queries

for this throttle.• Enter a query limit number in the box, and select either Delay or Reject. The Delay

and Reject options are available in Teradata Database 13.0 or later.• Next to Session Limit, select Unlimited or enter a session-limit number in the box.

These options are available in Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0.

9 Click OK.

Your selection is applied to each cell having that state, and overrides the setting specifiedin Default Settings.

10 [Optional] Change the Default Settings by selecting Unlimited, or enter a query limitnumber in the box and select Delay or Reject.The Delay and Reject options are available in Teradata Database 13.0 or later.

11 [Optional] Change the Session Limit by selecting Unlimited or entering a session limitnumber in the box.This option is available in Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0.

12 Click Save.

About Ruleset Workloads

A ruleset workload is a group of queries that share characteristics so that a set of workloadmanagement controls can be applied to the group. A workload has working values anddefining characteristics that are evaluated during the classification phase of systemmanagement. High-quality workload management can improve response times and ensuremore consistent response times for critical work. The SLES 11 IWM system has no optionsfor the SLG Tiers workload management method. The IWM system only uses the Tacticaland Timeshare management methods.

The Workloads tab lists workload names, types, throttle limits, and enabled status. For eachworkload, you can specify one or more of the following:• Classification criteria that determine if a query is assigned to the workload• Throttles that limit the number of concurrent active queries that can run• Service level goals that specify a goal for workload query performance



• Exceptions that monitor queries and take specified actions if a query exceeds exceptioncriteria while executing

You can create up to 250 workloads. The following requests are examples of workloads:• Batch jobs further subdivided by region or organization for reporting• Weekly or monthly reports that follow the calendar or a regular schedule• Jobs that are always critical whenever they occur

Queries not classified into a specific workload are placed into the default workload namedWD-Default. The WD-Default workload cannot be deleted or disabled.

A workload cannot be deleted if it has associated workload events. Workload events for aworkload are created in the state matrix.

Creating and Editing a Workload

You can group queries that share characteristics into a workload so that a set of workloadmanagement controls can be applied to the group.


2 From the ruleset toolbar, click Workloads.

3 Click Create Workload.

4 In the General tab, enter a name.


6 [Optional] In SLES 11, click Virtual Partitions and assign the workload to a virtualpartition.

7 Select an Enforcement Priority or a Workload Management Method.

OperatingSystem

Description

SLES 10 Select an Enforcement Priority for the type of queries you expect to run in thisworkload.• Tactical queries are short, critical queries that have a defined service level

goals. They are typically single or few-AMP queries or all-AMP queries thatconsume less than 1 CPU-second per node.

• Priority queries are important and higher priority than most other work.

• Normal queries are the average priority work running on the system.

• Background queries run for work that does not have a response timerequirement.

SLES 11 Select a Workload Management Method.• Tactical queries are short and high-priority. They have access to all available

resources.

• SLG Tier queries have access to the resources that remain after Tacticalresource demands are met. (Not available with SLES 11 IWM.) SLG Tierworkloads are assigned to the lowest available tier.



OperatingSystem

Description

• Timeshare queries have access to the resources that remain after Tactical andSLG resource demands are met. Timeshare workloads are assigned to theMedium access level.

8 Click Save.

9 [Optional] Click the Classification tab and determine if you want incoming queriesclassified into this workload.

10 [Optional] Click the Throttles tab and set a throttle just for this workload.Any query that is classified into this workload is subject to this throttle.

11 [Optional] Click the Service Level Goals tab and set service level goals for this workload.

12 [Optional] Click the Exceptions tab and select an exception to be triggered for thisworkload.For example, if a query in this workload is taking too long, create an exception to movethe query to a different workload.

13 [Optional] In SLES 11, if your workload management method is tactical, click theTactical Exception tab and modify the tactical exception.When you create a tactical workload, a tactical exception is created. You can modify thetactical exception but you cannot delete because it is used to prevent tactical workloadsfrom depriving non-tactical workloads of system resources.

14 Click Save.

Setting Classification for Workloads

Classification options determine which queries go into a workload. Add classificationsettings to existing workloads or when creating a workload. Additional classification optionscannot be added to any of the default workloads.



3 Select or create a workload.


5 Select classification criteria from the list.A workload cannot be used to classify utilities if the workload has associated ActiveRequest or Arrival workload events.

6 Click Add.


8 If you selected Request Source or Target, do at least one of the following:• Enter a Match String and use the Include and Exclude buttons to add the match

string. A match string can contain ? to match exactly one character or * to matchzero or more characters.




9 Click OK.

Setting State-Specific Throttles for Workloads

Set state-specific throttle query limits for existing workloads or when creating a workload. Ifyou select the Use Default Settings option, the settings at the bottom of the Throttles tabapply to the state.




4 Click the Throttles tab.



7 Do one of the following:• Select Unlimited to prevent limits on the number of queries for this workload.• Enter a query limit number in the box, and select either Delay or Reject. The Delay

option is available in Teradata Database 13.0 and later.

8 Click OK.



Your selection is applied to each cell having that state and overrides the setting specifiedin Default Settings.

9 [Optional] Change the default setting by selecting Unlimited or entering a number inthe box so queries over the limit are rejected.The Delay and Reject options are available in Teradata Database 13.0 and later.

10 Click Save.

Setting Service-Level Goals

Service level goals (SLGs) help determine if workload management is meeting expectations.You can set throughput and response time service-level goals.1 Edit or create a ruleset.



4 Click the Service-Level Goals tab and do one of the following to specify default ServiceLevel Goals:• Select Response Time Goal, enter a time in seconds, and set a service percentage. For

example, if you want 90% of queries to finish within 4 seconds, set a response time of4 and a service percent of 90. You can have different goals in different plannedenvironments. For example, you can set a response time of 4 seconds for a daytimeenvironment and 12 seconds for a nighttime environment. Metrics graphs showresponse times.

• Select Throughput Goal and enter a throughput number per hour. You can setdifferent goals for different planned environments. For example, type 200 if youexpect 200 or more queries to be processed per hour.

• Select No Goal if you want no service-level goal for this workload. This option maybe appropriate, for example, for very low priority background workloads.

• Note: You cannot remove the service-level goal for a workload if there is anassociated workload event. To remove the service-level goal, delete the associatedevent.

5 [Optional] To override the default settings, click a planned environment and setenvironment-specific goals.

6 Click Save.

About Workload Exceptions

An exception is a defined set of actions to take when a threshold is exceeded for anexecuting query in a workload. You can add multiple criteria to an exception. Workloadexceptions are triggered when all exception criteria are satisfied.

The SLES 11 IWM system has no options for ruleset exceptions or non-tactical workloadexceptions. IWM systems only use tactical workload exceptions. The SLES 10 IWM systemhas no options for exceptions.

Some exception criteria give you the option to add qualification time. Qualification time isthe amount of time the criteria must take place to be recognized. Setting qualification timeprevents very short incidents of criteria from being acknowledged.



Defining a Workload Exception




4 Click the Exceptions tab.

Note: In Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, local exceptions are displayed separately fromshared exceptions on the Exceptions tab.

5 Click Create Exception.

6 Enter a name.


8 Under Criteria, select an option from the list, click Add, and specify the additionalrequired information.

9 Under Actions, select one of the following actions to be performed when the specifiedcriteria are met:• Select Notification Only to send notification, and take no other action.• Select Abort to stop the query.• Select Abort Selects Only to stop the query only if it is a SELECT.• Select Change Workload to to change the query to the workload you select from the

list.


Option Description




11 Click OK.

12 In Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, set the priority of exceptions if multiple localexceptions are assigned to the Change Workload action.This feature is available from the Exception Precedence tab.

Defining Tactical Workload Exceptions in SLES 11

In SLES 11, a tactical exception is automatically created when you create a tactical workload.Tactical exceptions trigger a change workload action that moves a query to anotherworkload. A tactical exception can also trigger other specified actions, such as issuing an alertor running a program. Tactical exceptions occur when both of the defined criteria are metfor Tactical CPU Time or Tactical I/O Physical Byte. Tactical exceptions apply to the tacticalworkloads they are associated with, across all environments. Tactical exceptions can bemodified but they cannot be deleted because they are used to prevent tactical workloads fromdepriving non-tactical workloads of system resources.




2 Select or create a tactical workload.

3 Click the Tactical Exception tab.

4 Under Criteria, enter thresholds for Tactical CPU Time and Tactical I/O PhysicalByte.

5 Under Action, select a workload.The query is moved to this workload if the query exceeds both Tactical CPU Timethresholds or both Tactical I/O Physical Byte thresholds.


Option Description




7 Click Save.

Viewing Workload Service Level Goal Summary

A service level goal for workload query performance is set in either throughput or responsetime with a service percentage. You can view a summary of service level goals that have beenset for individual workloads.



3 Click the SLG Summary tab.Workloads are listed, along with their service level goals for each planned environment.

About Evaluation Order

Evaluation order determines the placement of queries into workloads and utility jobs intorules. Setting evaluation order is useful when you have created several workloads or utilitysessions.

For workloads, if classification criteria can sort the same query into different workloads,evaluation order determines the workload in which the query is placed. For example,account finance users are classified into one workload and users in a specific geographicallocation are classified into a different workload. If an individual is a member of both groups,the workload highest on the evaluation order list is the workload in which the individual issorted.

For utility sessions, if a utility job matches more than one utility session rule, evaluationorder determines the rule in which the utility job is placed.



Setting Evaluation Order for Workloads

If classification criteria can sort the same query into different workloads, evaluation orderdetermines the workload in which the query is placed. The workload in the highest positionon the Evaluation Order tab is applied.



3 Click the Evaluation Order tab.

4 In versions prior to Teradata Database 14.00, select a Planned Environment from thelist.

5 In the list of workloads, do one of the following to order the list and place higher priorityworkloads at the top:• Drag workload names to reorder.• Click in a number box, highlight the existing number, and enter a new number.

6 Click Save.

Setting Enforcement Priority for Workloads

An enforcement priority (EP) is a label given to assign weights for the queries running in aworkload.



3 Select a workload or create one.

4 Select an Enforcement Priority:• Tactical queries are short, critical queries that have a defined service level goals. They

are typically single or few-AMP queries or all-AMP queries that consume less than 1CPU-second per node.

• Priority queries are important and higher priority than most other work.• Normal queries are the average priority work running on the system.• Background queries run for work that does not have a response time requirement.

5 Click Save.

Adjusting Priority Distribution for Workloads

On the Priority Distribution tab, each cell in the diagram is an allocation group. The size ofeach cell is proportional to the relative weight. Each column in the diagram is a resourcepartition. The width of each column is proportional to the relative weight of the resourcepartition. Drag cell borders to dynamically change the amount of CPU (as a percentage)allocation groups are given. Drag column borders to change the amount of CPU available toresource partitions.

Note: If you modify the base state on the Priority Distribution tab, the changes are appliedto other states as long as no change has been made to any of the other states. Once any of thestates are changed, the only values that are applied are the changes to system values.





3 Click the Priority Distribution tab.

4 In State, select a state from the list.

5 For resource partitions, do any of the following:• Mouse over any resource partition name to obtain information about the partition.• Click a resource partition name, and drag the column resize bar. This resizes the

column and reallocates space between the resource partitions.• Click a resource partition name, and click . Enter a system percentage allocation

and, optionally, a CPU percentage limit. If you select the Locked option, this columnbecomes fixed in the diagram, and other columns can be dynamically resized aroundthis column.

• Click a resource partition name and click or to unlock or lock the column.

6 For allocation groups, do any of the following:• Mouse over any allocation group to obtain information about the group.• Click in a cell, and drag the cell resize bar. This resizes the cell and reallocates space

within a resource partition.• Click in a cell, and click . Enter a system percentage allocation and, optionally, a

CPU percentage limit. If you select the Locked option, this cell becomes fixed in thediagram and other cells can be dynamically resized around this cell.

• Click in a cell and click or to lock or unlock the cell.



7 [Optional] Select System Values, and enter a CPU limit to set the maximum percentageof system CPU that Teradata Database can use.

8 [Optional] Select Reserved AWTs (AMP Worker Task), and enter a number to set themaximum number of AWTs that are reserved for tactical workloads.

9 [Optional] Select Max Expedited AWTs, and enter a number to set the maximumnumber of AWTs that are created on each node.

10 Click Save.

About Virtual Partitions

Virtual partitions are a new feature in SLES 11. A virtual partition is used to divide a systemand afford a higher level of control for resource allocation. In SLES 11, the priority schedulermanages resources using virtual partitions. In SLES 10, the priority scheduler usesenforcement priorities and allocation groups to manage resources. A new Virtual Partitionstab was added under the Workload button. You can create virtual partitions and assignworkloads to the partitions. Drag a workload to move it from one partition to another. Aworkload can only exist in one partition. A maximum of 10 virtual partitions can exist.

In SLES 11, new tabs were created to manage virtual partitions. The Virtual Partitions,Partition Resources, and Workload Distribution tabs are used to create the partitions,allocate resources to the partitions, and distribute resources to workloads that are in thepartitions, respectively.

Assigning a workload to a different partition does not change the workload managementmethod. Assigning an SLG Tier workload to a different partition does not change theworkload tier assignment if both partitions have the same tiers. If the target partition doesnot have the same tiers as the source partition, then the workload is assigned to the lowestSLG tier in the target partition. For example, if a workload is moved from SLGTier3 inVirtual Partition A to Virtual Partition B, the workload is assigned to Tier3 in VirtualPartition B. If Tier3 does not exist in Virtual Partition B, then the workload is assigned to thelowest SLG Tier in Virtual Partition B.

An icon to the right of each workload represents the workload tier type.Icon Tier Type

Tactical

SLG Tier

Timeshare

Adding Virtual Partitions

In SLES 11, you can create virtual partitions and use them to manage workload resourceallocations. The SLES 10 and SLES 11 IWM system has no options for virtual partitions.1 Edit or create a ruleset.


3 Click the Virtual Partitions tab.

4 Mouse over Virtual Partitions and click .



5 Enter a name.

6 [Optional] Drag a workload to a virtual partition to assign the workload to the virtualpartition.A workload can exist in only one virtual partition.

7 [Optional] Mouse over the name of a virtual partition that does not contain anyworkloads and click to delete the virtual partition.

8 Click Save.

Managing Partition Resources

In SLES 11, you can allocate resources to a virtual partition in a planned environment. Ifthere are multiple partitions, drag the border between partitions to change resourceallocations. If there are multiple planned environments, you can allocate a different level ofresources for each planned environment. Resource consumption may differ from theallocation, based on activity on the system.



3 Click the Partition Resources tab.

4 Drag the border of a partition to adjust the resource allocation for the partition.

5 [Optional] Adjust the resource allocation for additional planned environments.

6 Click Save.

About Workload Distribution

In SLES 11, you can configure a virtual partition by allocating resources to workloads in thepartition. Resources can be allocated differently for each planned environment. The resourceconsumption may differ from the allocation you set in this tab, based on activity on thesystem. Resources are allocated to management methods as follows:

Tactical

Tactical workloads have access to all available resources.

SLG Tier

SLG Tier workloads have access to remaining resources after tactical demands aremet. If multiple SLG Tiers exist, resources are allocated to the top tier first, withworkloads in each tier consuming resources and passing remaining resources downto the next tier. A workload that is moved into a fully allocated tier receives 0.1% ofthe tier resources. The resources are taken from the workload with the highestallocation in the tier.An information balloon appears when you mouse over a workload. The balloonshows information about the resources available to the workload.



• Relative to tier is the percent of tier resources allocated to the workload.• Range based on activity in other workloads displays the minimum and

maximum resources available to the workloads when Tactical workloads areinactive.• The minimum value is the share of partition resources available when all

workloads in this tier and above are active and consuming all allocatedresources.

• The maximum value is the share of partition resources available when allworkloads in this tier and above are inactive.

• Unallocated Resources is the available tier resources that are not allocated to aworkload. Three percent of tier resources are reserved to prevent SLG demandsfrom depriving Timeshare workloads of any resources.

• Relative to tier is the percent of tier resources that can be passed down toworkloads in lower SLG tiers or to Timeshare workloads.

• Range based on activity in other workloads displays the minimum andmaximum resources available to the next Tier or to Timeshare workloads whenTactical workloads are inactive.• The minimum value is the share of partition resources available when all

workloads in this tier and above are active and consuming all allocatedresources.

• The maximum value is the share of partition resources available when allworkloads in this tier and above are inactive.

Timeshare

Timeshare workloads have access to remaining resources after tactical and SLGresource demands are met.• Top queries are given an access rate eight times the Low access level.• High queries are given an access rate four times the Low access level.• Medium queries are given an access rate two times the Low access level.• Low queries are given the lowest access rate for the Timeshare method.

Distributing Workload Resources

In SLES 11, you can allocate resources to workloads for each planned environment.



3 Click the Workload Distribution tab.

4 [Optional] Click the Planned Environment and select a planned environment, ifmultiple planned environments exist.



5 [Optional] Click the Virtual Partition and select a virtual partition, if multiplevirtual partitions exist.

6 [Optional] Drag a workload from one management method to another.This action changes the management method for the workload in all plannedenvironments and may change existing resource allocation. The following table showsthe result of moving a workload from one management method to another:

Option Description

Tactical to SLGTier

• You select the SLG Tier in the current planned environment. Theworkload is assigned to the lowest SLG Tier in all other plannedenvironments.

• Minimum allocation percentage (0.1%) is assigned to the workload. Theallocation comes from unallocated (“remaining”) resources for the tier, ifany, or from the workload with the highest allocation in the tier.

• Tactical Exception is deleted.

Tactical toTimeshare

• You select the access level for the workload in the current environment.The access level is changed to Medium in all other planned environments.

• Tactical Exception is deleted.

SLG Tier toTactical

Tactical Exception is created.

SLG Tier toTimeshare

• You select the access level for the workload in the current environment.• The access level is changed to Medium in all other planned environments.

Timeshare toTactical

Tactical Exception is created.

Timeshare toSLG Tier

• You select the SLG Tier in the current planned environment. Theworkload is assigned to the lowest SLG Tier in all other plannedenvironments.

• Minimum allocation percentage (0.1%) is assigned to the workload. Theallocation comes from unallocated (“remaining”) resources for the tier, ifany, or from the workload with the highest allocation in the tier.

7 [Optional] Under SLG Tier, do any of the following:• Drag the border of a workload to change its resource allocation.• Mouse over SLG Tiers and click to add an SLG Tier.• If multiple SLG Tiers exist, drag workloads from one SLG Tier to another.• Mouse over an SLG Tier name and click to delete the tier. Only the bottom tier

can be deleted. Only tiers that do not contain workloads can be deleted. If the bottomtier does not contain workloads, the tier is automatically deleted when you save thepage. Tier 1, however can never be deleted.

8 [Optional] Under Timeshare, drag a workload from one access level to another toassign the priority of resource allocation for queries in the workload.

9 Click Save.



Mapping Console Utilities to Workloads

Map console utilities to workloads so utilities can be organized and prioritized.



3 Click the Console Utilities tab.

4 In Console Utility to Workload Mapping, use the lists to set a workload name for eachconsole utility.The lists contain the predefined workload, WD-Default, and any workloads you havecreated. WD-Default is used when no other workload is specified.

5 Click Save.

About Performance Groups

A performance group is a collection of parameters used to control and prioritize resourceallocation for a particular set of database sessions. Performance groups belong to a resourcepartition, a set of prioritized performance groups related by their users' associations.Resource partitions have an assigned weight that determines the proportion of resourcesavailable to that partition relative to other partitions.



Note: The performance groups named L, M, H, and R stand for Low, Medium, High, andRush. Do not use or modify the performance groups named L, M, H, and R. The groupsrepresent levels of priority and are used by the system for console utilities.

On the Console Utilities tab, the mapping of performance groups to workloads only appliesto console utilities that are not included in the Console Utility to Workload Mappingsection.

Creating a Performance Group

Create a performance group to determine which allocation group manages a query.Performance groups belong to a resource partition, a collection of prioritized performancegroups related by their users' associations.




4 Click Create Performance Group Mapping.

5 Mouse over New Performance Group and click .

6 Enter a name.


8 In the Workload Name column, select a workload from the list for the performancegroup.

9 Click Save.

10 [Optional] Mouse over the group name and click to delete a performance group.

Mapping Performance Groups to Workloads

Map performance groups to workloads so the groups can be prioritized along with otherwork.




4 In Performance Group to Workload Mapping, use the lists to set a Workload Namefor each Performance Group.The lists contain the predefined workload, WD-Default, and any workloads you havecreated. WD-Default is used when no other workload is specified.

5 Click Save.

About Allocation Groups

An allocation group (AG) is a group of workloads that share an enforcement priority (EP).The AG manages access to CPU resources based on the assigned weight from the EP. An EPis a label given to assign weights for the queries running in a workload. Each AG takes theEP of the first workload associated with it and after that, only workloads with the same EPcan be associated to that AG. As a result, each AG is a collection of one or more workloads



that share the same EP. Multiple AGs can use the same EP. In SLES 10, Teradata Databaseuses the following EPs:• Tactical queries are short, critical queries that have a defined service level goals. They are

typically single or few-AMP queries or all-AMP queries that consume less than 1 CPU-second per node.

• Priority queries are important and higher priority than most other work.• Normal queries are the average priority work running on the system.• Background queries run for work that does not have a response time requirement.You can group and manage AGs in resource partitions. The default allocation groups andany groups you create are assigned to resource partitions.

You can change the default mapping by using the diagram on the Workload Mapping tab,where you can reassign workloads to other allocation groups and reassign allocation groupsto other resource partitions. Allocation groups that contain workloads cannot be deleted.

Carefully consider the allocation groups you drag in and out of the tactical resource partitionbecause this can have a significant effect on the amount of CPU available to the queriesrunning in the allocation group. The tactical resource partition normally has a much higherweight than other resource partitions. If you move an allocation group containing long,resource-intensive queries into the tactical resource partition, those queries can consume alarge amount of the available CPU, impacting queries running in other resource partitions. Ifyou move a tactical allocation group out of the tactical resource partition, the queriesrunning in the tactical allocation group are assigned a lower priority and may not meet theirresponse-time goals.

Creating an Allocation Group

Create allocation groups using the Workload Mapping tab.



3 Click the Workload Mapping tab.

4 Mouse over the name of the resource partition, such as Tactical or Standard, to whichyou want to add an allocation group, and click .

5 Enter a name.


7 [Optional] To move the allocation group to a different resource partition, mouse over thename of the group, and drag the group to a different column.

8 [Optional] To change the name of the allocation group, mouse over the name of thegroup, and click .

9 Click Save.

Mapping Allocation Groups to Workloads

If you have created workloads, you can view the Workload Mapping tab to see how theworkloads map to allocation groups and resource partitions. Allocation groups and resourcepartitions determine how much CPU is available to the queries that are running in the listed



workloads. The allocation groups named L (Low), M (Medium), H (High), R (Rush)represent levels of priority. These groups are used by the system for console utilities andcannot be deleted.1 Edit or create a ruleset.



4 Do any of the following:• Create allocation groups by mousing over a resource partition name, such as Tactical

or Standard, and clicking .• Create a resource partition by mousing over Resource Partitions and clicking .• Drag an allocation group to a different resource partition.• Drag a workload to a different allocation group of same priority in any resource

partition.• Rename a resource partition by mousing over a name and clicking .• Delete an empty allocation group by mousing over a name and clicking .• Delete an empty resource partition by mousing over a name and clicking .

5 Click Save.

Deleting an Allocation Group

You cannot delete the L (Low), M (Medium), H (High), R (Rush) allocation groups orallocation groups that contain workloads.1 Edit or create a ruleset.





4 Mouse over the name of an allocation group, and click .

5 Click Save.

About Ruleset Exceptions

An exception is a defined set of actions to take when a threshold is exceeded for an executingquery. When creating or editing a ruleset, you can specify a set of exception criteria andexception actions to apply to workloads for each planned environment. The SLES 11 IWMsystem has no options for ruleset exceptions or non-tactical workload exceptions. IWMsystems only use tactical workload exceptions. The SLES 10 IWM system has no options forexceptions.

The tabs on the ruleset Exceptions view display all exception information for a ruleset fromdifferent perspectives:

By Planned Environment

Exceptions organized by planned environment. After selecting a plannedenvironment, all exceptions are listed alphabetically by name. All workloads arelisted in workload evaluation order. Select or clear the workload check boxes toenable or disable the use of individual exceptions for individual workloads. If theAll-WD check box is selected, all check boxes in the row are selected and cannot beindividually controlled.

By Workload

Exceptions are organized by workloads. After selecting a workload, all exceptions arelisted by name. All planned environments are listed by name and by how they arearranged in the state matrix. Select or clear the planned environment check boxes toenable or disable individual exceptions for individual planned environments. Withina workload, if an exception is enabled for All-WD in a planned environment, thecheck box for the planned environment is selected and disabled. You can change theexception setting on the Planned Environment tab. In Teradata Database 12.0 and13.0, local exceptions are displayed separately from shared exceptions.

By Exception

List of all exceptions created for planned environments and workloads. Afterselecting an exception, all workloads are listed in workload evaluation order. Allplanned environments are listed by name. Select or clear the planned environmentcheck boxes to enable or disable individual workloads for individual plannedenvironments. If the All-WD check box is selected, all check boxes in the column areselected and cannot be individually controlled.

Defining an Exception

An exception is a defined set of actions to take when a threshold is exceeded. If you add morethan one criterion, all criteria must be satisfied in order for the exception to be triggered.Only one qualification time can be specified even if multiple qualified criteria are added. Ifqualified criteria are specified, the exception is triggered only if all of the qualified criteria are



satisfied for the duration of the qualification time. After an exception is created, additionalcontrols in the tabs of the Exceptions view allow you to manage the exception.1 Edit or create a ruleset.

2 From the ruleset toolbar, click Exceptions.

3 From any of the tabs in the Exception view, click Create Exception.

4 Enter a name.


6 Select an option from the Exception Criteria list, and click Add.

7 Enter a value for the criteria.

8 For qualified criteria (marked with *), enter a value in Qualification Time.

9 Select one of the following actions to be performed when the specified criteria aresatisfied:

Option Description

Notification Only Sends a notification only. No other action is performed.

Abort Stops the query.

Abort Selects Only Stops the query only if it is a SELECT.

Change Workloadto

Changes the workload of the query to the specified workload.

Change Workload to is unavailable if the Blocked Time criterion orElapsed Time criterion was selected.

In Teradata Database 12.0 and 13.0, there can be more than one sharedexception assigned to the Change Workload to action. Use theException Precedence tab to set the priority of multiple exceptions.

10 [Optional] Under Notifications, enable any of the actions for the exception.

Option Description

Send Alert Specify the Teradata Alerts to trigger.

Run Program Specify the Teradata Alerts registered programs to trigger.

Post to QTable Enter a string to post to the QTable.

11 Click OK.

About Tactical CPU per Node Exceptions in SLES 10

If you select the Tactical CPU per Node exception criteria, the following rules apply:• The exception can be enabled for workloads that use the tactical enforcement priority.

Tactical workloads are in the top row of the Workload Mapping tab.• The exception must have a Change Workload to action to another workload in the same

resource partition column.• The exception must have Tactical CPU per Node set to 5 CPU-seconds or less.• The exception must have CPU Time set to a number greater than Tactical CPU per

Node.



• Using Tactical CPU per Node criteria disables the Blocked Time and Elapsed Timecriteria for the exception.

Managing Exceptions

Ruleset exceptions are managed from the ruleset Exceptions view. In Teradata Database 12.0and 13.0, local exceptions are displayed separately from shared exceptions on the ByWorkload tab.


2 From the ruleset toolbar, click Exceptions.

3 [Optional] Create exceptions by clicking Create Exception from any tab.

4 After exceptions have been created, click the By Planned Environment, By Workload,or By Exception tab to manage exceptions.

5 Depending on the tab, select Workload or Exception from the list.

6 [Optional] Edit an exception from the By Planned Environment or By Workload tab bymousing over the exception and clicking .

7 [Optional] Delete an exception from the By Planned Environment or By Workload tabby mousing over the exception and clicking .

8 In the selected view, select or clear the appropriate check boxes to enable or disable theexceptions for the listed workloads, planned environments, or workload and plannedenvironment combinations.

9 Click Save.



CHAPTER 28

Workload Health

Workload HealthThe Workload Health portlet displays workload management activity in Teradata Databasefor one system at a time. The available options are different if Teradata Database is runningon SUSE Linux Enterprise Server version 10 or lower, or SLES 11 (SLES 10 or SLES 11)..You choose which system, workloads, and metrics to monitor. Filter and Sort menus allowyou to customize the information displayed. Data in the Workload Health portlet isrefreshed every minute and displays workloads that:• Have completed processing according to their response time Service Level Goals• Have missed their response time Service Level Goals• Are inactive• Are disabled• Have no defined response time Service Level Goals

The HEALTH DETAILS view displays detailed metrics for an individual workload.

Workload Health Concepts

What Is a Workload?

A workload is a group of queries that share characteristics so that a set of workloadmanagement controls can be applied to the group. A workload has working values anddefining characteristics that are evaluated during the classification phase of systemmanagement. Queries are assigned to workloads based on classification criteria andexceptions.

What Is a Service Level Goal?

A Service Level Goal (SLG) measures whether queries are meeting defined workloadmanagement criteria. SLGs are defined for logging and reporting purposes. There are noprovisions in Teradata Database to enforce these goals.

The Workload Health portlet only displays response time SLGs.

What Is an Enforcement Priority?

When a workload is created in SLES 10, it is assigned an enforcement priority (EP) and anallocation group (AG). An EP is a label given to assign weights for the queries running in aworkload. Each AG takes the EP of the first workload associated with it and after that, onlyworkloads with the same EP can be associated to that AG. As a result, each AG is a


collection of one or more workloads that share the same EP. Multiple AGs can use the sameEP. Teradata Database uses the following EPs:• Tactical queries are short, critical queries that have a defined service level goals. They are



What Are Tiers and Access Levels?

When a workload is created in SLES 11, it is assigned to one of the following workloadmanagement methods:

Tactical

Manages high-priority, critical queries with a short response-time requirement.

SLG Tier

Allocates resources according to the SLG tier on which the workload resides.Multiple tiers can be prioritized so higher level tiers have higher resource allocation.This method is not used in managing appliance platforms.

Timeshare

Assigns access levels that indicate the priority of resource allocation.Low This is the baseline and lowest resource access rate for the Timeshare accessmethod.Medium Queries are given an access rate 2 times the Low access level.High Queries are given an access rate 4 times the Low access level.Top Queries are given an access rate 8 times the Low access level.

About the Workload Health View

Use the WORKLOAD HEALTH view to display the health status of one or more workloads.Workload health is determined in relation to a response time Service Level Goal (SLG).

Chapter 28 Workload Health


The following list describes the features in this view:• Active ruleset name (the ruleset currently enabled on the Teradata Database system)• Workload names• Workload health, presented using color, icons, and predefined states• Workload sort and filter capabilities• Portlet rewind and share capabilities

Click a workload icon to go to the HEALTH DETAILS view for the workload. TheHEALTH DETAILS view is not available for workloads having a health state of NO_DATA.

Workload Health States

Workload health is described using a set of icons and predefined states. Health states arelisted in the default sort order.

Health states are determined by comparing the measured query response time with theexpected response time and percent SLG metrics.

Icon TextColor

State Description

Red MISSED_SLG Workload missed its response time SLG for a period oftime.

Time periods below are for enforcement priorities inSLES 10 or lower:• Tactical: last minute• Priority: last 30 minutes• Normal and Background: last 60 minutes

Time periods below are for tier/access levels in SLES 11:• Tactical: last minute• SLG Tiers: last 30 minutes• Timeshare: last 60 minutes

Blue MET_SLG Workload met its enforcement priority SLGs in SLES 10or lower, or tier/access level SLGs in SLES 11.

Black NO_SLG No response time or percent SLGs have been set for thisworkload.

Blue NO_DATA No data is available for this workload.

Blue DISABLED Workload has been disabled.

Gray INACTIVE Workload is inactive.

Selecting Filter Criteria

Use the Filters Workload button to display only the workloads in which you are interested.

1 Click Filter Workloads.

2 Select at least one of the following filtering options:



OperatingSystem

Description

SLES10 andearlier

• All Enforcement Priorities expands to display the list. Select at least oneenforcement priority.

• All Health States expands to display the list. Select at least one healthstate.

SLES11 • All Virtual Partitions expands to display the list. Select at least onevirtual partition.

• All tier types/access levels expands to display the list. Select at least onetier type or access level.

• All Health States expands to display the list. Select at least one healthstate.

3 [Optional] Select the Name Filters tab and deselect a workload name check box to hide itfrom view.

4 Click OK.

Setting Sort Criteria

1 Click Sort.

The Sort menu appears.

2 To specify the sort criteria, do one of the following:• Click Missed SLG to sort workloads into workload health state groups in alphabetical

order by workload name.• Click Name to display workloads in alphabetical order by workload name, regardless

of workload health state.

About the Workload Health Details View

The HEALTH DETAILS view displays metrics for a single workload. Use thePREFERENCES view to select the metrics. This view appears after you click the workloadicon or name for a workload in the WORKLOAD HEALTH view. The HEALTH DETAILSview is not available for workloads with a health state of NO_DATA.



Metrics are arranged in a two-column format:• Metric names• Sparkline graphs

As you mouse over the sparklines, information balloons display event information. Eachsparkline ends with a percentage or a value, depending on the metric.

About Workload Metrics Graphs

Sparkline graphs illustrate workload performance metrics.

Solid lines represent the current data for their respective metric.

On a single-sparkline graph (for example, the MAX RESPONSE metric), the solid linerepresents current data for the metric, and the grayed skyline represents the past averagesfor that same metric.

On a multi-sparkline graph, a metric can be expressed in more than one value. When youmouse over the sparkline, the color of the metric name, end data points, and informationballoons match.

A dotted line in the graph is called the SLG reference line. Data points above the SLGreference line are color-coded in red.



Workload Metrics

Metric Description OperatingSystem

Aborted Queries Number of aborted queries in the last 60 seconds SLES 10 and 11

Active Queries Number of active queries in the last 60 seconds SLES 10 and 11

Arrivals Number of queries arriving in the last 60 seconds.Historical data is not displayed for this metric.

SLES 10 and 11

Average CPU-SEC perQuery

Average CPU seconds per completed queries SLES 10 and 11

Average Physical KB I/Oper Query

Average physical I/O usage, in kilobytes, of all queriesin this workload

SLES 11

Average Response andDelay Time

Average response time and delay time for all activequeries

SLES 10 and 11

Cumulative CPU Cumulative CPU seconds per amp SLES 10 and 11

Decayed Active Queries Total number of queries that have decayed due toCPU or I/O (Timeshare workloads only)

SLES 11

Delayed Queries Number of queries in the delay queue SLES 10 and 11

Exceptions Number of queries classified as exceptions in the last60 seconds

SLES 10 and 11

Maximum CPU-SEC perQuery

Maximum CPU seconds used by completed queries isa default metric for the Tactical EP

SLES 10 and 11

Maximum Physical KB I/O per Query

Maximum physical I/O usage, in kilobytes, for allqueries in this workload

SLES 11

Maximum ResponseTime

Maximum response time for all active requests SLES 10 and 11

Queries Throttled Number of queries throttled in the workload in thelast 60 seconds

SLES 10 and 11

Rejected Queries Number of rejected queries in the last 60 seconds SLES 10 and 11

Tactical Queries withExceptions

Total number of queries reclassified to anotherworkload as a result of a tactical exception based onCPU per node and I/O per node values.

This metric is available only on the Metrics-Tacticaltab in the PREFERENCES view.

SLES 11

Throughput Number of completed queries in the last 60 seconds.This metric does not display historical data.

SLES 10 and 11




The PREFERENCES view allows you to customize the portlet.


Systems

Choose a system to monitor.

Metrics

In SLES 10, select metrics for workloads in the Tactical, Priority, Normal, orBackground enforcement priorities.In SLES 11, select metrics for workloads in the Tactical, SLG Tier, or Timesharemanagement methods.

Trend Interval

Set the time period displayed for the metric graphs.

Past Averages

Choose the time period for which a historical average is calculated.


Use the Systems tab in the PREFERENCES view to select a system to monitor.






6 Click OK.

Setting Metrics for Enforcement Priority or Tier/Access Level

For each enforcement priority group in SLES 10 or tier/access level in SLES 11, you canselect and order metrics for display in the portlet. Choose from a defined list of metrics.


2 Click the Metrics tab for an enforcement priority group or tier/access level.

The Default display pane uses sample data to show how metric rows are displayed inthe portlet.


4 Do any of the following to change the way metric rows are displayed:



• Add a metric row. Drag a metric from the Available Rows list to the Default displaypane.

• Remove a metric row. Click located on the metric row.• Change metric row order. Drag a metric already in the Default display pane to a new

location in the pane (up or down).


6 Click OK.

Setting the Workload Trend Interval

Use the Trend Interval tab in the PREFERENCES view to set the length of time representedin sparkline metrics.




4 Select an Interval.The default is 24 hours.


6 Click OK.








6 Click OK.



CHAPTER 29

Workload Monitor

Workload MonitorThe Workload Monitor portlet allows you to monitor workload management activity inTeradata Database. The available options are different if Teradata Database is running onSUSE Linux Enterprise Server version 10 or lower, or SLES 11 (SLES 10 or SLES 11).

The Workload Monitor portlet displays:• Multiple views of workloads and related data• Allocation of system resources per workload or associated groupings• Information about how queries are being processed• Information about active queries

Workload Monitor Concepts

What Is a Workload?

A workload is a group of queries that share characteristics so that a set of workloadmanagement controls can be applied to the group. A workload has working values anddefining characteristics that are evaluated during the classification phase of systemmanagement. Queries are assigned to workloads based on classification criteria andexceptions.

What Is a Service Level Goal?

A Service Level Goal (SLG) measures whether workload management is meeting definedcriteria. SLGs are defined for logging and reporting purposes. There are no provisions inTeradata Database to enforce these goals.

What Is an Exception?

A workload management exception is a collection of one or more thresholds that cause adefined action to occur. The Workload Monitor portlet allows you to view details of theworkload exceptions as well as queries that are reclassified to another workload.

What Is an Enforcement Priority?

When a workload is created in SLES 10, it is assigned an enforcement priority (EP) and anallocation group (AG). An EP is a label given to assign weights for the queries running in aworkload. Each AG takes the EP of the first workload associated with it and after that, onlyworkloads with the same EP can be associated to that AG. As a result, each AG is a


collection of one or more workloads that share the same EP. Multiple AGs can use the sameEP. Teradata Database uses the following EPs:• Tactical queries are short, critical queries that have a defined service level goals. They are



What Are Tiers and Access Levels?

When a workload is created in SLES 11, it is assigned to one of the following workloadmanagement methods:

Tactical

Manages high-priority, critical queries with a short response-time requirement.

SLG Tier

Allocates resources according to the SLG tier on which the workload resides.Multiple tiers can be prioritized so higher level tiers have higher resource allocation.This method is not used in managing appliance platforms.

Timeshare

Assigns access levels that indicate the priority of resource allocation.Low This is the baseline and lowest resource access rate for the Timeshare accessmethod.Medium Queries are given an access rate 2 times the Low access level.High Queries are given an access rate 4 times the Low access level.Top Queries are given an access rate 8 times the Low access level.

About TASM and TIWM Systems in SLES 10 and SLES 11

Teradata Workload Management offers different strategies, depending on the platform youselect:

TASM for Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW) platforms

Teradata Active System Management (TASM) is a product available on EDWplatforms to perform full workload management in Teradata Database.

IWM for base EDW and appliance platforms

Teradata Integrated Workload Management (IWM) is a Teradata Database featureincluded on base EDW and appliance platforms to perform basic workloadmanagement. Base EDW platforms can optionally purchase TASM.

TASM offers a full workload management feature set. IWM workload management featuresare more limited and have different options in SLES 10 and SLES 11, depending on thesystem you select:

Chapter 29 Workload Monitor


States

The SLES 11 IWM system has no state matrix.

Virtual Partitions

The SLES 11 IWM system has no virtual partitions.

Workload Management Methods

The SLES 11 IWM system uses only the Tactical and Timeshare managementmethods. There is no Metrics-SLG Tier tab in PREFERENCES because the SLGTiers management method is not available.

Exceptions

The SLES 11 IWM system only has tactical workload exceptions.

Workload Monitor Views

This topic lists the views available in the Workload Monitor portlet. More details areavailable from the request status icons on many views.

View Name Description

Dynamic Pipes View Displays workload performance in near real-time at each systemmanagement point of control

Static Pipes View Displays workload metrics for all workloads and system resources byworkload in the EP or tier/access level

Distribution View Displays active workload resource consumption:• SLES 10: Displays CPU consumption per workload and CPU

allocation per allocation group.• SLES 11: Displays system resource consumption by virtual

partition or workload

Distribution Details View In SLES 11, displays system resource consumption by tier/access levelor workload.

Workload Details View Displays details for a workload:• Cumulative: Cumulative values for the workload processed during

the selected sampling period

• Snapshot: Values for the workload at the current point in time

• Trends: Displays sparkline metrics for the workload processedduring the trend interval set in PREFERENCES

Workload Group View Displays the group of workloads that belong to the AG in SLES 10 ortier/access level in SLES 11:• SLES 10: Percentage of AG CPU and total CPU consumed by the

workloads in the group• SLES 11: Percentage of partition and system resources for each

workload in the group

State Details View Displays information about the current and previous states, plannedenvironments, health conditions, and events



View Name Description

Active Requests View Displays metrics for requests that are active

Delayed Requests View Displays metrics for requests that were delayed by system andworkload throttles

Request Details View Displays statistics and information about the session

Request Status Icons

You can click the values associated with request status icons to see more detail.

Name Icon Description

Arrivals Requests arriving into system management.

RejectionsAborted

Requests that were not allowed to continue processing. Thisicon appears with the following values:• The number of requests rejected by system filters• The number of requests rejected by system throttles and

workload throttles• The number of requests aborted due to exceptions

Warnings Requests that have been allowed to continue processing after awarning message has been written to the system log file.



Name Icon Description

Delays Requests that were delayed and completed or are currentlydelayed. Does not include requests that were delayed, but arestill active.

ExceptionsReclassified

Requests that triggered an exception. This icon appears withthese values:• The total number of workload exceptions in the sampling

period• The number of requests reclassified to a different workload

Completions Requests that executed successfully. These requests no longerrequire system resources.

Selecting Views

You can select a summary view and a sampling period to identify issues in workloadmanagement. The default sampling period is 60 minutes. Sampling period totals are updatedduring the portlet refresh, which is every 60 seconds. Workload Details views are availablefrom each summary view.

1 Choose one of the following summary views:

Option Description

Dynamic Pipes a. Click the Dynamic Pipes icon.b. Select a sampling period under Cumulative System Data from Last.c. [Optional] In SLES 11, select a virtual partition to display data for

only that partition. The default is All.

Static Pipes a. Click the Static Pipes icon.b. Select a sampling period under Cumulative System Data from Last.c. [Optional] In SLES 11, select a virtual partition to display data for

only that partition. The default is All.

Distribution SLES10

a. Click the Distribution icon.b. Select a sampling period from CPU Consumption Per Workload

from Last.c. Click any pie chart segment other than Idle or System to go to

another view:• CPU Consumption segments correspond to the Workload Details

view.

• Relative Weight segments correspond to the Workload Groupview.

Distribution SLES11

a. Click the Distribution icon.b. Select CPU Consumption or I/O Consumption.c. Select a sampling period in from Last.



Option Description

d. Click any pie chart segment other than Idle or System in Per VirtualPartitions to go to the Distribution Details view.

e. Select a Virtual Partition to see active workloads relative to their tier/access level.

f. Click any pie chart segment to go to another view:• Per Tier/Access Level segments correspond to the Workload

Details view.

• Per Workload segments correspond to the Workload Detailsview.

2 From any of the summary views, click the workload name to display the WorkloadDetails view and click one of the following time frame buttons:

Option Description

Cumulative a. Click Cumulative to display aggregated values for the selected samplingperiod.

b. Select a sampling period from Cumulative Workload Data from Last .c. Click the values associated with the request status icons to view details.

Snapshot a. Click Snapshot to display current workload values for the allocation group oraccess level.

Trends a. Click Trends to display sparkline metrics for the trend interval set inPREFERENCES

3 From any of the Workload Details views, you can choose one of the following WorkloadGroup views:

Option Description

SLES 10 a. Click the allocation group name to display the Workload Group view.b. Click the values associated with the request status icons to view details.

SLES 11 a. Click the tier/access level name to display the Workload Group view.b. Click the values associated with the request status icons to view details.

About the State Matrix

The Teradata Database state matrix icon in the toolbar shows changes in state, plannedenvironment, or health condition during the cumulative sampling period. The SLES 11 IWMsystem has no state matrix.

The state matrix icon uses color to show the following:

Dark blue

Active-state cell



Medium blue

Previously active state cell

Light blue

Inactive-state cell

Note: During a state change, the cell representing the previous state changes fromdark blue to medium blue. If there was a second state change during the samplingperiod, the previous state cell is shown in light blue.

The number of cells in the state matrix icon depends on the monitored system. If a one-by-one state matrix is configured, the state matrix icon appears as one active cell. When youmouse over the state matrix icon, information balloons show detail information and the laststate change if there was a state change within the sampling period.

In SLES 11, click the state matrix to view detailed information about the state.

About the State Details View

In SLES 11, the State Details view provides additional information about the current andprevious states, planned environments, health conditions, and events.

State Description

Active PlannedEnvironments

Lists all planned environments that are in an active state by precedence. Thefirst environment is used to determine the state.

Active HealthConditions

Lists all health conditions that are in an active state by severity. The first healthcondition is used to determine the state.

All Events Lists all events and whether they are currently active.

You can sort the columns in the table:• Sort on a column by clicking the column header. A second click toggles the sort order.• Sort on two columns consecutively using Ctrl+Click in the column header. Primary sort

order is indicated by a single arrow, and secondary sort order is indicated by a doublearrow.

About the Dynamic Pipes View

The Dynamic Pipes view helps you analyze workload performance.

Toolbar

State Matrix: Shows the changes in state, planned environment, or health conditionduring the cumulative sampling period. In SLES 11, you can click it to see detailsabout the current state and previous states.Request Icons: Shows the active and delayed requests. You can click them to seemore detail.Navigation Icons: You can click them to access the summary views.



Sampling Period Control

Filters the system information for the selected sampling period.

Virtual Partition Menu

In SLES 11, filters the system information for the selected virtual partition or allvirtual partitions.

Filter

Modifies the active workload display. If there are more than 18 workloads, they aregrouped by EP in SLES 10 and by tier/access level in SLES 11.

Workload Pane

Displays workloads based on the filter criteria and several interactive indicators:• Red workload pipes highlight workloads that missed their SLGs.• You can click the workload name to see the Workload Details view and access

cumulative, snapshot, and trend data for each workload.• A pulsing circle near the workload name indicates that a workload is adding

requests to the delay queue.


Shows the number of requests processed at each step, including at system filters andthrottles. You can click the values associated with these icons to see more detail.



Selecting Filter Criteria

1 In the Dynamic Pipes view, click in the Filter.

The FILTER WORKLOADS dialog box appears.

2 Select at least one of the following filtering options:

OperatingSystem

Description

SLES 10 • Group by enforcement priority groups workloads by their enforcementpriority.

• All Enforcement Priorities expands to display the list. Select at least oneenforcement priority.

• Missed SLG displays only those workloads which have missed their SLGs.

• Active Workloads displays only those workloads which were active withinthe sampling period.

SLES 11 • Group by tier type/access level groups workloads by their tier type oraccess level.

• All tier types/access levels expands to display the list. Select at least onetier type or access level.

• Missed SLG displays only those workloads which have missed their SLGs.

• Active Workloads displays only those workloads which were active withinthe sampling period.

3 [Optional] Select the Name Filters tab and deselect a workload name check box to hideit from view.

4 Click OK.

About the Static Pipes View

The Static Pipes displays all workloads and indicates how many are active.

Toolbar

State Matrix: Shows the changes in state, planned environment, or health conditionduring the cumulative sampling period. In SLES 11, you can click it to see detailsabout the current state and previous states.Request Icons: Shows the active and delayed requests. You can click them to seemore detail.Navigation Icons: You can click them to access the summary views.









Tabs

Workloads: Displays metrics for all workloads within the last sampling period. Youcan click a workload name to access the Workload Pipe view and see cumulative,snapshot, and trend data for each workload.Enforcement Priorities: In SLES 10, displays summary data about all activeworkloads, aggregated across all EPs. Available metrics include the total number ofactive requests classified into one or more workloads in the EP, number ofcompleted requests within the EP, average CPU time, and percentage of workloadsthat met their SLGs.Tier/Access Level: In SLES 11, displays summary data about all active tiers andaccess levels, aggregated across all virtual partitions. Available metrics for each tier/access level include total number of active requests, number of completed requests,average CPU time, and the percentage of queries in the tiers/access levels that mettheir SLGs.

Table Actions

Click to select the columns displayed on the Workloads, EnforcementPriorities, Tier/Access Level tabs. You can also select Export to create a .csv filecontaining the information displayed in the summary table.

Workload Name

Shows the workload name. You can click it to show the Workload Details view andaccess cumulative, snapshot, and trend data for each workload.




Use the Columns dialog box to select, lock, and order columns. You can resize columns inthe table.1 Click in the table header and select Configure Columns.





6 [Optional] Sort on a column by clicking the column header.• Sort on a column by clicking the column header. A second click toggles the sort

order.• Sort on two columns consecutively using Ctrl+Click in the column header. Primary

sort order is indicated by a single arrow, and secondary sort order is indicated by adouble arrow.





You can export data to a .csv file for further analysis and formatting. The exported .csv filecontains all available data. The format for the time, date, and some numeric values differs inthe view and exported .csv file.




About the Distribution View

The Distribution view displays active workload resource consumption in an interactivegraphical format.

Toolbar

State Matrix: Shows the changes in state, planned environment, or health conditionduring the cumulative sampling period. In SLES 11, you can click it to see detailsabout the current state and previous states.Navigation Icons: You can click them to access the summary views.

Pie Charts for SLES 10

You can see two pie charts that display actual system resource consumptioncompared to allocated system resources. Mouse over the pie charts to see systemresource consumption for workloads within an allocation group (AG) compared tothe relative weight of the AG. You can click any pie chart segment other than Idle orSystem to go to another view:• CPU Consumption: Displays CPU consumption data for each workload that was

active within the sampling period. Click a workload to access the WorkloadDetails view.

• Relative Weight: Displays the system resources allocated to an AG. Click an AGto access the Workload Group view.

Pie Charts for SLES 11

You can see two pie charts that compare system resource consumption by virtualpartition or by workload.• Per Virtual Partition: Displays consumption data for each virtual partition that

was active within the sampling period. Click a virtual partition to access theDistribution Details view.

• Per Workload: Displays the relative weight of each pie section in relation to theworkload across all virtual partitions. Click a workload to access the WorkloadDetails view.

CPU Consumption or I/O Consumption toggles the consumption data for thesampling period.



List Controls

The expand ( ) and collapse ( ) list controls can be used to change the length of theportlet. Minimizing the lists save space on the portal page.



Following is an example Distribution view that you can see in SLES 10.

Following is an example Distribution view that you can see in SLES 11.



About the Distribution Details View

In SLES 11, the Distribution Details view displays resource consumption for a virtualpartition by tier/access level or workload.

Toolbar

State Matrix: Shows the changes in state, planned environment, or health conditionduring the cumulative sampling period. In SLES 11, you can click it to see detailsabout the current state and previous states.

Pie Charts

Compare system resource consumption by tier/access level or by workload. Clickany pie chart segment to go to another view:• Per Tier/Access Level: Displays the relative weight of each pie section in relation

to the tier/access level in this virtual partition. Click a tier/access level to accessthe Workload Group view.

• Per Workload: Displays the relative weight of each pie section in relation to theworkload in this virtual partition. Click a workload to access the WorkloadDetails view.

CPU Consumption or I/O Consumption

Toggles the consumption data for the sampling period.





List Controls

The expand ( ) and collapse ( ) list controls can be used to change the length of theportlet. Minimizing the lists save space on the portal page.

Workload Name

Shows the workload name. You can click it to show the Workload Details view andaccess cumulative, snapshot, and trend data for each workload.

Following is an example Distribution Details view that you can see in SLES 11.



About the Workload Details View

The Workload Details view helps you analyze individual workloads.

Toolbar

State Matrix: Shows the changes in state, planned environment, or health conditionduring the cumulative sampling period. In SLES 11, you can click it to see detailsabout the current state and previous states.Time Frame Buttons• Cumulative view displays aggregated workload values for the selected sampling

period.• Snapshot view displays current workload values.• Trends view displays sparkline metrics for the workload, using the trend interval

set in PREFERENCES.

Breadcrumbs

In SLES 10, the enforcement priority (EP) and allocation group (AG) are listed.Click the AG name to access the Workload Group view.In SLES 11, the virtual partition, tier/access level, and workload are listed. Click theTier/access level name to access the Workload Group view.







Following is an example Workload Details view that you can see in SLES 10.

Workload Metrics

Workload metrics are displayed for each workload on the Trends view. The trend interval isset in PREFERENCES.


Active Queries Number of active queries SLES 10 and 11

Average CPU-SEC perQuery

Average CPU time, in seconds, of all workload queries SLES 10 and 11

Average Physical KB I/Oper Query

Average physical I/O usage, in kilobytes, of allworkload queries

SLES 11

Average Response Timeand Delay Time

Average response time and delay time for allcompleted queries

SLES 10 and 11

Cumulative CPU Cumulative CPU seconds per amp SLES 10 and 11

Decayed Active Queries Total number of queries that have decayed due toCPU or I/O consumption (Timeshare workloadsonly)

SLES 11

Delayed Queries Number of queries in the delay queue SLES 10 and 11

Impact CPU-SEC Maximum amount of CPU time used by a workloadcompared to the total CPU used by all workloads onthe system

SLES 10 and 11

Maximum CPU-SEC perQuery

Maximum CPU time, in seconds, of all queries thatcompleted

SLES 10 and 11

Maximum Physical KB I/O per Query

Maximum physical I/O usage, in kilobytes, for allqueries in this workload

SLES 11




Maximum ResponseTime

Longest response time of all requests that completed SLES 10 and 11

Tactical Queries withExceptions

Total number of queries reassigned to anotherworkload due to CPU or I/O per node tacticalexception (Tactical workloads only)

SLES 11

Throughput Number of queries arriving and completing everyminute

SLES 10 and 11

About the Workload Group View

The Workload Group view shows the group of workloads that belong to an AG or tier/access level.• The AG workload group view shows resource consumption as a percent of total CPU

consumption.• The tier/access level workload group view shows the system resource consumption as a

percent of system or virtual partition for the tier/access level.

Toolbar

State Matrix: Shows the changes in state, planned environment, or health conditionduring the cumulative sampling period. In SLES 11, you can click it to see detailsabout the current state and previous states.

Breadcrumbs

In SLES 10, the enforcement priority (EP) and allocation group (AG) are listed.In SLES 11, the virtual partition or tier/access level and workload are listed.

Distribution View

Click the pie chart icon to go to the Distribution View.

About the Request Details View

The request details view displays statistics and information about the selected session. Thisview can be accessed by clicking a session row.

Tabs


Query Details


Manage Queries




State Icons














The Overview tab provides detailed information about key metrics for the selected sessionand its queries. The metric values provide a view of the query status on the system.






































About the SQL Tab


































About the Delay Tab











About the Skew Tab
















In Teradata Database systems, you can manage queries and sessions to improve workloadperformance and balance system resources.

Abort


Change Priority

Change the priority of a query or session

Change Workload


Release Query


You must log on with a user ID that has permissions to abort, change workloads, or releasequeries. If you log out, close a portlet, or open a new portlet instance, you must log on again.




2 Click .

3 Select Abort.


5 Click Next.


7 Click Next.






This menu item is only available when workloads are not enabled and the system beingmonitored supports this feature.


2 Click .



5 Click Next.



8 Click Next.



10 Click Next.




This menu item is only available when workloads are enabled and the system beingmonitored supports this feature.


2 Click .



5 Click Next.




8 Click Next.




10 Click OK.

Releasing a Query



2 Click .



5 Click Next.



The PREFERENCES view allows you to customize the portlet.


Systems

Choose a system to monitor.

Metrics

In SLES 10, select metrics for workloads in the Tactical, Priority, Normal, orBackground enforcement priorities.In SLES 11, select metrics for workloads in the Tactical, SLG Tier, or Timesharemanagement methods.

Trend Interval

Set the time period displayed for the metric graphs.

Past Averages

Choose the time period for which a historical average is calculated.


Use the Systems tab in the PREFERENCES view to select a system to monitor.








6 Click OK.

Setting Metrics for Enforcement Priority or Tier/Access Level

For each enforcement priority group in SLES 10 or tier/access level in SLES 11, you canselect and order metrics for display in the portlet. Choose from a defined list of metrics.


2 Click the Metrics tab for an enforcement priority group or tier/access level.

The Default display pane uses sample data to show how metric rows are displayed inthe portlet.


4 Do any of the following to change the way metric rows are displayed:• Add a metric row. Drag a metric from the Available Rows list to the Default display

pane.• Remove a metric row. Click located on the metric row.• Change metric row order. Drag a metric already in the Default display pane to a new

location in the pane (up or down).


6 Click OK.

Setting the Workload Trend Interval

Use the Trend Interval tab in the PREFERENCES view to set the length of timerepresented in sparkline metrics.




4 Select an Interval.The default is 24 hours.


6 Click OK.










6 Click OK.



Technology

2206 user 14.01